BR112019018575B1 - INTEGRATED SYSTEM FOR MICROALGAE PRODUCTION - Google Patents

Abstract

INTEGRATED SYSTEM FOR MICROALGAE PRODUCTION. An integrated system for microalgae production with autonomous fault identification and contouring, which can be deployed on land or at sea. The system comprises a fully scalable reactor, CO2 extraction, oxygen replenishment for surrounding water, and all the necessary equipment to run it safely, ensuring high energy efficiency and optimized control of environmental variables to maximize biomass yield.

Description

FIELD OF INVENTION

[001] The present invention relates to an integrated system for the production of microalgae, with autonomous fault identification and contouring, which can be implemented on land or at sea. The system comprises a fully scalable reactor, CO2 extraction, oxygen replacement to the surrounding water, and all the necessary equipment to run it safely, ensuring high energy efficiency and better control of environmental variables to maximize biomass yield. .

FUNDAMENTALS

[002] Much attention has recently been given to the production of biodiesel from all types of oil sources. One of the most promising is the use of microalgae, whether from marine or freshwater organisms. These algae are known to be capable of achieving very high productivity and good oil yields if the conditions are met. Much research has been devoted to trying to find the most productive or resilient algal streams at universities and research institutes. This field is advancing at a relatively good pace.

[003] The same is not true for cultivation methods. Most research has been conducted at laboratory scale or small-scale pilot projects and the main focus thus far has been on verifying the potential yield of the most promising streams in raw bioreactors or raceway tanks.

[004] The main concept behind selected flow growth is relatively simple, all that is needed is an adequate infrastructure capable of maintaining the required amount of water, maintaining critical parameters such as water temperature, PH, nutrients and emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2) with a concentration within acceptable limits and avoid contamination of the culture water by other undesirable organisms.

[005] Despite the relatively simple requirements, many technical challenges arise when trying to scale designs that work on table tops or produce new ones that are, from the beginning, conceived as large scale. It is particularly challenging to find ways to keep costs as low as possible without losing the ability to effectively perform all necessary tasks. These challenges have prevented the successful design and implementation of economically viable bioreactors that perform at the required level.

[006] The high operational and capital costs of existing cultivation alternatives to date prevent the promise of microalgae from being fully fulfilled. The main items that generate costs are the acquisition of large cultivation areas close to a CO2 source, the preparation of the land and the installation of equipment, such as bioreactor structures, pumps, filters, sensors, etc. All this equipment requires a lot of energy for operation, generating high operating costs which, together with the high initial capital costs, create a very demanding productivity limit to have an economically viable project.

[007] Operating costs are a major challenge to be overcome. Existing reactor designs to date require a considerable amount of energy to operate, particularly in pumping and controlling water temperature throughout the day and throughout the year. Most microalgae streams are very sensitive to temperature and PH levels of the ideal growth range and if ideal conditions are not met, productivity drops significantly and in some cases the algae die or are harmed and productivity is reduced. irretrievably reduced.

[008] Much research has been dedicated to finding better suitable flows, more resistant to variations in culture water and at the same time capable of producing high oil yields. Some lines of research have attempted to genetically modify high productivity streams to make them resilient or highly resilient, to make them more productive for oil yield, but this has created concern of what could happen if these streams escaped into the environment. during the large-scale phase of the project.

[009] What is needed is an integrated approach that addresses the various aspects of microalgae cultivation that requires: 1) a system that significantly reduces operational and capital costs and ensures good control of environmental parameters; 2) a system that maintains ideal conditions for the growth of selected microalgae flow during the different phases of cultivation so that productivity can be as high as possible. For any system to be successful, the system needs to be built with cheap materials to minimize capital costs, be very simple and robust to reduce maintenance costs, run, as much as possible, autonomously, not requiring human intervention constant and have integrated safety mechanisms to prevent contamination of the crop and the environment in the event of equipment failure.

STATE OF THE TECHNIQUE

[010] There are many approaches to cultivating microalgae. The traditional approach is to use raceway tanks which basically consist of closed circuit tanks, normally oval in shape. In these tanks, water is maintained using circulation pumps or rotating blades. Nutrients and carbon dioxide (CO2) are added at fixed points and the algae are inoculated at the beginning of the process.

[011] Raceway tanks are expensive to build: a large tract of suitable land, close to a CO2 source, must be acquired and then a lot of civil works are required: leveling the land, digging wells, pouring concrete and creating structures waterproof so that water does not infiltrate the land, potentially damaging the structure and/or causing contamination of the soil or groundwater.

[012] Most raceway tanks are left open to the environment and this creates many problems:

[013] a) Contamination of the algae culture by undesirable organisms can cause a significant drop in productivity by consuming part of the nutrients or even harming the algae culture with residues or toxins that such undesirable organisms produce;

[014] b) The difficulty in controlling the water temperature, which can vary significantly during the day and night and throughout the year. Temperature variations are especially more pronounced if areas such as deserts are selected to install raceway tanks. Due to the low value of the land, which is not suitable for agriculture or pasture, these areas tend to be an attractive alternative to installing microalgae farms with respect to the initial capital cost. However, desert areas have the disadvantage that the ambient temperature changes significantly from day to night and throughout the year. Unless adequate measures are taken to prevent these temperature variations from being reflected in the algae growing media, productivity will be harmed and the algae may even die. Alternatives are to insulate the raceways tanks with some material and place transparent covers over them that will reduce heat transfer between the water and the atmosphere; or use a system to actively control temperature, involving heat exchangers. Both alternatives increase capital and/or operating costs;

[015] c) Water evaporation and/or rain can potentially change the concentration of nutrients, salinity or PH, leaving them outside the desired crop ranges, and sophisticated monitoring systems are required, consisting of various sensors and actuators , to ensure that the crop runs smoothly. If tanks are located near urban areas or facilities such as industries or power plants, which discharge pollutants into the atmosphere, there is also a risk that rain will capture some of these pollutants and carry them into the tank, potentially poisoning the algae;

[016] d) The injected CO2 can potentially escape from the tank into the atmosphere and be lost. Expensive injection systems, capable of injecting only the necessary amount of CO2, which the algae culture consumes through very small bubbles at the bottom of the tank, by pumping gas at high pressure through a very fine diffuser, have been proposed. to mitigate this risk. These systems are sophisticated and have high capital and operating costs, but they still have limitations that make it very difficult to achieve the desirable goal of running the pond culture run so that no CO2 escapes and that the CO2 concentration remains at concentration levels. desired;

[017] e) Raceways require constant maintenance and cleaning and normally need to be drained, disinfected and readjusted at the end of each batch. The energy cost of pumping all the water to drain the tank is an important part of the operating costs, reducing the overall efficiency of the process. Furthermore, the cost of disinfection and post-treatment required to process the effluents to avoid damaging the environment need to be considered.

[018] Other solutions have been proposed to overcome the limitations of raceways and different bioreactor designs have been proposed. Many designs are based on the raceway concept, simply creating a means of isolating the algal culture from the environment through a physical barrier around the culture. This can be done with a transparent material such as glass, plastic or acrylic resins.

[019] The simplest approach is to use covers made of plastic or any other transparent material to cover the tanks. This creates insulation for thermal losses and reduces or eliminates evaporation and contamination problems. Roofs need to span a relatively large distance and typically require some type of support structure. They need to be strong, but at the same time as thin as possible, to avoid reducing light penetration. This is not a simple thing to achieve, especially considering they remain exposed to the elements and susceptible to damage from high winds, rain or hail. Covers can indeed improve the overall productivity of raceways, but they also imply higher capital costs.

[020] Another approach is to replace the tanks and/or covers with plastic material. Instead of building concrete pits, the land is simply prepared so that plastic bags or a plastic liner can be placed on the ground to contain the water. For this purpose, a trench with not too steep edges is typically dug and sand, or other flexible material, is used to produce a support layer for the plastic material used to create an impermeable layer. Using just a plastic liner is a cheaper alternative and produces a reactor similar to a traditional raceway tank that remains open to the elements. The use of closed plastic bags produces a reactor similar to a traditional raceway tank equipped with lids. In both cases, construction costs are a fraction of traditional raceway tank construction costs.

[021] The disadvantage is that so-called plastic bag tanks are not as durable as traditional tanks. The plastic liner and/or plastic bag requires maintenance and replacement at regular intervals. All other infrastructure equipment remains largely the same: pumps, filters, sensors and actuators need to be used and special interface structures need to be created to allow these to be installed in plastic bag reactors. These interfaces must be carefully designed and regularly inspected because they create discontinuities in the plastic surface and, as such, create weak points for leaks.

[022] Plastic bag raceway tanks have lower capital costs than traditional ones, but operating costs remain basically unchanged or may be slightly higher.

[023] Other more elaborate bioreactors have been suggested. At one extreme there are approaches that attempt to create inexpensive structures to minimize capital costs, such as plastic bags mounted vertically with support structures, self-supporting plastic bag reactors that rely on specific shapes to create reinforcement and structural stability in some directions, and be capable of containing a certain volume of water requiring little or no external support, or plastic bags that are placed in a body of water such as a lake or sea working solely as a physical barrier.

[024] These reactors tend to be fragile and susceptible to failures, leaks and other problems. The operation is complicated and requires constant human intervention. Reactors are often too simple to allow effective control of water flow, CO2 or nutrient concentrations and algal growth may not be uniform throughout the reactor, with some areas producing higher growth rates than normal. others. If harvesting is delayed to allow all the different parts of the reactor to fully develop, the algae, in the areas that have experienced the greatest growth, may run out of nutrients or CO2 and may end up taking advantage of their oil reserves, consuming some of the oil produced. In more serious cases, hotspots can offer unacceptable living conditions, killing algae.

[025] A compromise needs to be found and this usually means that productivity and yield will be affected. The harvesting process also tends to be more complicated in these reactors and can involve pumping water to heights of several meters, or having to physically transport and move the plastic bags containing all the water and algae to a processing point, impacting costs. operational and reducing the advantage of having low capital costs.

[026] At the other extreme, we have very sophisticated bioreactors that consist of a series of acrylic or plastic tubes fully supported by metal structures and accessories that can be mounted at favorable slopes to maximize land use and capture the majority of sunlight. These reactors offer the advantage of allowing better control over CO2 injection and nutrient concentration and can be used in a continuous flow regime, reducing downtime, simplifying harvesting and increasing efficiency. The idea is to achieve higher productivity and lower operating costs at the expense of a significantly higher initial capital cost. To be viable, the equipment needs to be robust enough to last many years of operation and the design needs to be good enough to allow a substantial reduction in operating costs to offset the high initial capital costs.

[027] Unfortunately, however, this measure was not possible mainly due to the high pumping costs created by a long run of small diameter pipes. To reduce these pumping costs, it would be necessary to use larger diameter pipes, but this, in turn, requires thicker walls which would increase the weight and cost of the pipes and support structures, in addition to compromising transparency. of the tubes.

BENEFITS

[028] The proposed system was designed considering various aspects of the algae production cycle and offers solutions to reduce operational and capital costs, without sacrificing productivity or safety.

[029] Cheap and easily available materials are used in the construction of reactors that are designed to facilitate manufacturing, assembly, deployment and maintenance and reduce operating costs.

[030] The system is designed so that it can be deployed on land or water. Land operation is convenient if a large CO2 producer, such as a power plant, cement factory, steel plant, etc. want to remediate your CO2 production and land is available nearby.

[031] Operation on water is convenient because it solves the problems of land availability, capital costs, land preparation costs and the pressure of competition with food production, animal husbandry or natural reserves. Any body of water can be used, as long as the operation of bioreactors does not conflict with other uses of the specific water body or with the conservation of fauna and flora.

[032] One of the main advantages of the proposed system is the ability to extract the necessary CO2 from seawater. The extraction process is integrated with other processes and utilizes energy wasted by these processes, such as, but not limited to, pressure and heat differences. The oceans are known to be the repository of enormous amounts of CO2, often the amounts in the atmosphere or those produced annually by human activity. It is estimated that extracting CO2 from the sea is cheaper than supplying CO2 to the farm, as well as offering the benefit of combating ocean acidity.

[033] The oceans have a large surface area and their surface is in constant movement due to currents, waves and weather patterns, creating an even greater interface with the atmosphere. Any CO2 extracted at a particular point will be quickly replenished by nearby mixed water and, ultimately, from CO2 absorbed from the atmosphere. In this way, extracting CO2 from seawater provides a means of harnessing natural processes for transporting CO2 from emitters around the world and making it available wherever it is needed, wherever the farm is. In the long term, the expected global effect will be the reduction of CO2 levels both in the atmosphere and dissolved in marine waters, a very desirable objective, being defended by ecologists and scientists around the world.

[034] An algae farm operating at sea has the benefit of unrestricted availability of CO2 at marginal cost, the availability of large contiguous areas, the elimination of capital costs and conflicting land use. Furthermore, since seawater temperatures vary very little due to the enormous amount of heat stored in the ocean, water temperature monitoring and control systems can be eliminated from algae farms, saving equipment and energy costs. caused by these systems.

[035] This creates a decisive advantage for sea operations and therefore it is estimated that the most attractive areas for the cultivation of microalgae using the proposed technology are located at sea, preferably in locations with depths of 15 m or more . There is no limit to the maximum depth of the selected area, which means that a vast expanse of the oceans can be used to establish algae production farms.

[036] The reactors are fully capable of autonomous operation, being able to operate and survive at sea under any weather conditions. Should severe weather threaten the area, exposed units are able to dive to a safe depth and remain at the designated depth as long as necessary, then return to the surface, undamaged, when conditions are clear.

[037] The system is capable of detecting and bypassing faults autonomously, ignoring faulty units to allow operation to continue on unaffected sections and reporting detected faults back to the management system which is then able to identify each affected unit and generate maintenance issue notes. Custom software pinpoints faulty units on a map and assigns repair priority to support the maintenance team's efforts.

[038] As a result, the system can operate in continuous flow for long periods of time, without the need for operator intervention. At regular intervals, all that is required is for a collection team to visit the farms to collect the algae slurry produced, emptying or replacing production tanks and replenishing consumables such as nutrients or fuel. At these times, it is possible to carry out preventive or corrective maintenance according to the low priority problem notes received, ensuring that everything is in good working order until the next scheduled visit. If reports of urgent problems are received, a specialized team is mobilized and, after a quick on-site inspection, carries out the necessary repairs.

[039] The system integrates algae harvesting, distributed pumping of culture water and distributed dispersion of nutrients. The pressurized water from the algae collector is used as an energy source in the wet part of the reactors. In doing so, part of the energy used in harvesting processes is recycled for pumping crop water and dispersing nutrients, improving overall energy efficiency.

[040] Distributed water pumping offers the additional benefits of reducing pressure peaks throughout the system and the possibility of using thinner walls in the reactor elements, further increasing pumping efficiency and reducing energy consumption and operating costs.

[041] Components that remain in permanent contact with seawater (wet equipment) are made of materials that are not susceptible to corrosion, performance degradation or failure when exposed to seawater for long periods of time. The materials used are also highly resistant to UV rays and chemical degradation by all chemicals used in the production process. To prevent or reduce biofouling, additives can be added to the wet elements. Each individual component is constructed to be inexpensive and easily replaceable, so that over time, if any fouling occurs and cleaning proves too difficult, they can be replaced without a major impact on costs.

[042] No electrical components, such as wires, motors, pumps, sensors, etc., are used in wet equipment, which also does not require any electricity as a power source. Any equipment in permanent contact with seawater is only fed with pressurized water and/or compressed air. All logic, control devices and monitoring functions are performed using only pneumatic and hydraulic devices.

[043] Completely eliminating electricity from the reactor design (wet part) means there is no need for expensive insulation capable of withstanding the marine environment for long periods of time. Equipment cost is reduced and system reliability is dramatically improved.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[044] An object of the proposed invention is the integration of various aspects of the algae production cycle into a single system, such that operating capital costs can be reduced without sacrificing productivity or safety.

[045] Another object of the proposed invention is a reactor design that allows the system to be deployed both on land and in water. In case of operation in water, the reactor is capable of being submerged to a pre-defined depth to avoid dangerous weather conditions.

[046] Another object of the invention is a project that allows the use of cheap and easily available materials in the construction of reactor parts, so that manufacturing, assembly, implementation and maintenance are facilitated and operating costs are reduced. Components that remain in permanent contact with water (wet equipment) are made of materials that are not susceptible to corrosion, performance degradation or failure when exposed for long periods of time to fresh water or sea water, UV light and chemicals used in the production process. To prevent or reduce biofouling, additives can be added to the wet elements, but because the components are constructed to be inexpensive and easily replaceable if clogging eventually occurs, they can be replaced without a major cost impact.

[047] One of the main objects of the proposed system is the ability to extract the necessary CO2 from seawater. The extraction process is integrated with other processes and utilizes energy wasted by those processes, such as, but not limited to, pressure and heat differences.

[048] Another object of the proposed invention is the ability to detect and bypass faults autonomously, ignoring faulty units to allow operation to continue in unaffected sections and reporting detected faults back to the management system. The management system is capable of individually identifying each affected unit and generating problem notes, listing the affected units and the nature of the problem. Problem notes are transmitted to a control center and are addressed according to severity and urgency. Custom software pinpoints faulty units on a map and assigns repair priority to support the maintenance team's efforts.

[049] Another object of the proposed invention is the integration of algae harvesting and distributed dispersion of nutrients and distributed pumping of culture water. Pressure water from the algae collector is used as an energy source in the wet part of the reactor, allowing energy used in harvesting processes to be recycled for pumping culture water and dispersing nutrients, improving overall energy efficiency.

[050] Another object of the invention is to use only hydraulic and pneumatic energy to operate all equipment in permanent contact with water. All functions including pumping, equipment control, logic implementation, monitoring, etc. are performed using only hydraulic and pneumatic devices.

[051] The present invention relates to an integrated microalgae production and harvesting system, comprising a reactor having a plurality of reactor nodes and a plurality of tube elements, the plurality of reactor nodes and the plurality of tube elements configured to create a water culture suitable for algae growth; and an algae separation unit. The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae may comprise a CO2 extractor composed of a water degasser; a plurality of pumps configured to supply water to the water degasser; a motor configured to energize the plurality of pumps and heat the water in the water degasser; a heat exchanger configured to heat water from the water degasser and recirculate the heated water to the water degasser; an evaporator fed with exhaust gases from the engine and evaporated gases from the water degasser, the evaporator configured to use the evaporated gases to sublimate solid CO2; a CO2 extractor powered by pre-cooled evaporated gases from the evaporator; a CO2 separator configured to supply solid CO2 to the evaporator; and a heat exchanger configured to heat the waste gases coming from the CO2 separator and vent the heated waste gases to the atmosphere.

[052] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a condensed water purifier; a heat exchanger configured to exchange heat between the engine exhaust gases and the water degasser evaporated gases to condense the water vapor contained in the engine exhaust gases and the water degasser evaporated gases into condensed water. The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise an oxygen extractor configured to extract oxygen from the culture water supplied by the reactor; a discharge water aerator fed with water from the condensed water purifier and oxygen from the oxygen extractor; a heat exchanger configured to heat culture water from the reactor entering the oxygen extractor; a heat exchanger configured to recover heat from the water leaving the oxygen extractor.

[053] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, wherein the algae separation unit may comprise an algae separator comprising a concentrator; a helical impeller; an algae storage unit. The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, in which the concentrator is conical in shape and the helical impeller is configured to rotate to scrape the algae from the concentrator, force the culture reactor water through the concentrator, and thereby produce a slurry of algae. The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a culture dilutor configured to refill the reactor with culture water; a flow divider configured to divide the culture water coming from the reactor between the algae separator and the culture dilutor; and a pump configured to extract water from the water separator through the oxygen extractor and supply water to the reactor.

[054] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, wherein each tube element may contain an inner tube configured to permeate CO2 to feed the algae culture; each reactor node may comprise tube ports configured to open and close tube elements connected to the reactor node; a propeller pump configured to pump water through the pipe elements; and a vane pump fed by pressurized water from the algae separator, the pressurized water containing nutrients, the vane pump configured to energize the propeller pump.

[055] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, wherein the reactor node may comprise a module assembly having hydraulic and pneumatic components, the module assembly may comprise an I/O unit assembly configured to generate output signals. hydraulic and pneumatic outputs for controlling the reactor node and transmitting hydraulic and pneumatic output signals to other reactor nodes; a logic unit assembly configured to process hydraulic and pneumatic output signals received from the I/O unit assembly, generate logic functions, and hydraulic and pneumatic logic output signals to be received by the I/O unit assembly.

[056] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, wherein the logical unit assembly has at least one of a plurality of replaceable router cards, each router card configured to reroute signals to and from the reactor node. a specific way. The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae, wherein the logical unit assembly comprises a plurality of logical gates, selected from a group consisting of AND gates, NOT AND gates, OR gates, SEL gates, EXCLUSIVE OR gates, SW gates , zero ports, memory ports, register ports and diagnostic ports. The integrated microalgae production and harvesting system may comprise a linearly powered shift register; and wherein the state of the linearly powered shift register is used to select one set of logical units at a time to be active among the plurality of sets of logical units in the reactor. The integrated system for microalgae production and harvesting in which the logic gates of the logic unit assembly are hydraulically driven. The integrated system for microalgae production and harvesting in which the logic gates of the logic unit assembly are pneumatically driven.

[057] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise an input bus having a plurality of input lines; a plurality of analog-to-digital converters, each analog-to-digital converter connected to a plurality of input lines; an output bus having a plurality of output lines; a plurality of solenoid valves, each solenoid valve connected to each of the plurality of output lines; a plurality of pressure outlet lines, each pressure outlet line fed by a corresponding solenoid valve and connected to a pressure inlet line at the reactor node; a plurality of pressure input lines, each pressure input line fed by a pressure output line originating from the reactor node and connected to the corresponding analog-to-digital converter; and wherein each solenoid valve in a first position allows fluid flow to move a logic gate to a high position; and wherein each solenoid valve in a second position allows fluid flow to move a logic gate to a low position; and wherein the position of each of the plurality of solenoid valves is configured to transmit commands to control the reactor node; and wherein the position of each logic gate is configured to transmit the state of the reactor node to each analog-to-digital converter.

[058] The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae, wherein each reactor node may comprise a master designation or a slave designation, with each slave reactor node being associated with a designated master reactor node; and wherein the plurality of logic gates may contain a zero logic gate fed with a zero pressure digital signal; a clock logic gate fed with a pressure signal digital clock; a master logic gate fed with a digital master pressure signal; a query logic gate fed with a digital query pressure signal; a query logic gate fed with a digital query pressure signal; a state logic gate fed with a digital state pressure signal; wherein the zero logic gate, the clock logic gate and the master logic gate generate a sequence of commands to the remainder of the plurality of logic gates of the logic unit assembly allowing a single reactor logic unit assembly to be selected at any time; wherein the help port of a selected logical unit assembly is configured to transmit an alarm signal to the next reactor node if any abnormal condition is present in the reactor node where the selected logical unit assembly is installed or if a alarm is received from the preceding reactor node via the help pressure line; wherein the query logic port and the status logic port in a logical unit set that is not selected are configured to relay to the next reactor node signals received from the previous reactor node by the query pressure line and by the status pressure line, respectively, and the query logic gate and the status logic gate in the selected logic unit assembly are configured to ignore the received signals from the previous reactor node and transmit to the next reactor node the signals active alarms on the reactor node where the selected logic unit assembly is installed; and wherein the query logic port on a selected logical drive assembly is configured to generate an alarm signal on the query pressure line if any abnormal condition generates an alarm at the reactor node where the selected logical drive assembly is installed, and the state logic gate in a selected logic unit assembly is configured to generate an alarm signal through the state pressure line if an alarm signal is received from the previous reactor node through the help pressure line.

[059] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, wherein the reactor node may comprise a plurality of tube ports, each tube port having a port configured to seal each tube element connected to each of the plurality of ports. pipe; a plurality of actuators configured to open or close the plurality of doors that open or close each tube door; and wherein alarm detection within a node reactor activates actuators to close a first pipe door to bypass a failure and open a second pipe door to bypass a failed pipe element.

[060] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise at least one controller comprising a pressure controller cavity; a pressure controlling device aligned within the pressure controller cavity; a controller spring configured to move as the pressure within the controller cavity changes, thereby moving the pressure controller device to align inlets within the pressure controller cavity with openings within the pressure controller device. pressure; and wherein a pressure signal is generated from alignment of the pressure controller device within the pressure controller cavity. The integrated system for microalgae production and harvesting in which the number of inputs to the controller determines the number of bits in the pressure signal. The integrated system for microalgae production and harvesting in which the controller is hydraulically energized. The integrated system for microalgae production and harvesting in which the controller is pneumatically energized.

[061] The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae in which the pressure controlling device is in the shape of a parallelogram with cutouts of material removed from each corner of the pressure controlling device creating two central extensions at the ends of the pressure controlling device. pressure so that the inlets at the end of the pressure controller cavity are not closed by the surface of the pressure controller device. The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae wherein a pressure controlling device has a hole through the center of the pressure controlling device to accommodate the controlling spring; wherein the hole does not pierce the full length of the pressure controlling device so that the remaining material in the central extension has sufficient structural integrity to withstand the force provided by the controlling spring and the hole is as long as possible.

[062] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a plurality of controllers, the plurality of controllers may comprise at least one pneumatic CO2 pressure controller; at least one hydraulic water pressure controller; at least one hydraulic basic pressure controller; at least one pneumatic signal input pressure controller; and at least one hydraulic input signal pressure controller.

[063] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a hydraulic depth sensor having a plastic bag and a movable depth detector, wherein each reactor node in the reactor is configured to be submerged to a pre-defined depth to avoid dangerous weather conditions.

[064] The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae wherein the controller comprises a reset pressure inlet in the pressure controller cavity; a reset port in the pressure controlling device; and a pressure supply outlet in the pressure controller cavity. The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae wherein the controller comprises a regulated pressure inlet in the pressure controller cavity; a pressure control opening with a tapered V-shape at one end of the pressure controlling device; and a pressure supply outlet in the pressure controller cavity. The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae wherein the controller may comprise a low bit less significant pressure input into the cavity of the pressure controller; a high least significant bit pressure input into the pressure controller cavity; a bit less significant low pressure opening in the pressure controlling device; a bit less significant high pressure opening in the pressure controlling device; and a bit less significant pressure outlet in the pressure controller cavity. The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae wherein the controller may comprise a low bit more significant pressure input into the cavity of the pressure controller; a bit more significant high pressure input into the pressure controller cavity; a bit more significant high pressure opening in the pressure control device; and a bit more significant pressure outlet in the pressure controller cavity.

[065] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may include a CO2 pressure controller, the CO2 pressure controller may include a CO2 pressure controller cavity comprising at least one CO2 pressure inlet; a reset CO2 pressure inlet; a regulated CO2 pressure inlet; a CO2 pressure supply outlet configured to supply CO2 to the inner tube of the tube member; at least one digitized signal bit may include a low least significant bit CO2 pressure input; a high least significant bit CO2 pressure input; a less significant bit CO2 pressure output; a CO2 pressure controlling device may include a reset CO2 pressure port configured to align with the reset CO2 pressure inlet and the CO2 pressure supply outlet; a CO2 pressure control port configured to align with the regulated CO2 pressure inlet and the CO2 pressure supply outlet; a low least significant bit CO2 pressure port configured to align with the low least significant bit CO2 pressure inlet and the least significant bit CO2 pressure outlet; a high least significant bit CO2 pressure port configured to align with the high least significant bit CO2 pressure inlet and the least significant bit CO2 pressure outlet; a CO2 pressure controller rubber grid configured to surround the CO2 pressure controller device and create physical barriers to prevent leakage into the CO2 pressure controller cavity; a control spring configured to compress as the pressure within the CO2 pressure controller cavity increases by moving the CO2 pressure control device in a first direction and to a position within the CO2 pressure controller cavity determined by the amount pressure increase; and the control spring configured to stretch as the pressure within the CO2 pressure controller cavity decreases by moving the CO2 pressure control device in a second direction and to a position within the CO2 pressure controller cavity determined by amount of pressure decrease. The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae in which the position of the CO2 pressure controlling device generates a digitized one-bit output based on the alignment of the lowest bit CO2 pressure port with the lowest bit CO2 pressure input significant low, and the opening CO2 pressure bit least significant bit high with the CO2 pressure inlet least significant bit high; determines the state of CO2 pressure, according to the state of the digitized output of a bit, whether the output bit is low indicating a leak or a reset state, or whether the output bit is high indicating CO2 pressure within the operating range; and controls the CO2 pressure at the CO2 pressure supply outlet based on the alignment status of the reset CO2 pressure port with the reset CO2 pressure inlet and the CO2 pressure control port with the reset CO2 pressure inlet. regulated CO2 pressure.

[066] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a water pressure controller, the water pressure controller may comprise a water pressure controller cavity comprising at least one water pressure inlet; a reset water pressure inlet; a regulated water pressure inlet; a water pressure supply outlet configured to supply water to the outer tube of the tube member; at least two bits of digitized signal which may comprise a low least significant bit water pressure input; a bit less significant high water pressure inlet; a bit less significant water pressure output; a bit more significant low water pressure inlet; a bit more significant high water pressure inlet; a bit more significant water pressure output; a water pressure controlling device may comprise a reset water pressure opening configured to align with the reset water pressure inlet and the water pressure supply outlet; a low bit least significant water pressure port 1 and a low bit least significant water pressure port 2 configured to align with the low bit least significant water pressure inlet and the low bit least significant water pressure outlet ; a low most significant bit water pressure opening configured to align with the high least significant bit water pressure inlet and the least significant bit water pressure outlet; a low most significant bit water pressure opening configured to align with the low most significant bit water pressure inlet and most significant bit water pressure outlet; high bit water pressure opening configured to align with the high bit bit pressure inlet and the high bit water pressure outlet; a water pressure controller rubber grid configured to surround the water pressure controller device and create physical barriers to prevent leakage into the water pressure controller cavity; a controlling spring configured to compress as the pressure within the water pressure controller cavity increases by moving the water pressure controlling device in a first direction and to a position within the water pressure controller cavity determined by the amount pressure increase; and the controlling spring configured to stretch as the pressure within the water pressure controller cavity decreases by moving the water pressure controlling device in a second direction and to a position within the water pressure controller cavity determined by the amount of pressure decrease. The integrated microalgae production and harvesting system in which the position of the water pressure controller generates a two-bit digitized output based on the alignment of the lowest bit water pressure opening 1 and the lowest bit water pressure opening significant low 2 with inlet water pressure bit least significant bit low, opening water pressure bit least significant bit high with water pressure inlet least significant bit high, opening water pressure bit most significant bit low with inlet most significant bit water pressure low, opening most significant bit water pressure high with inlet water pressure most significant bit high; determines the state of water pressure according to the state of the two-bit digitized output, whether the two output bits are 00 indicating a leak state or a reset state, whether the two output bits are 01 indicating a state of wait, if the two output bits are 11 indicating a normal operating state, and if the two output bits are 10 indicating a closing state; and controls the water pressure at the water pressure supply outlet based on the alignment status of the reset water pressure opening with the reset water pressure inlet and the water pressure control opening with the reset water pressure inlet. regulated water pressure.

[067] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a basic pressure controller, the basic pressure controller comprising a basic pressure controller cavity and may comprise at least one basic pressure inlet; a regulated basic pressure input; a basic pressure supply outlet configured to supply water to the culture water cavity within the reactor node; at least one digitized signal bit which may comprise a low least significant bit basic pressure input; a basic pressure input least significant bit high; a basic pressure output least significant bit; a base pressure controlling device may comprise a base pressure control opening configured to align with the regulated base pressure inlet and the base pressure supply outlet; a low least significant bit basic pressure opening configured to align with the low least significant bit basic pressure inlet and the least significant bit basic pressure outlet; a high least significant bit basic pressure opening configured to align with the high least significant bit basic pressure inlet and the least significant bit basic pressure outlet; a base pressure controller rubber grid configured to surround the base pressure controller device and create physical barriers to prevent leakage into the base pressure controller cavity; a control spring configured to compress as the pressure within the base pressure controller cavity increases by moving the base pressure control device in a first direction and to a position within the base pressure controller cavity determined by the amount of increase depression; the control spring configured to stretch as the pressure within the base pressure controller cavity decreases by moving the base pressure control device in a second direction and to a position within the base pressure controller cavity determined by the amount of decrease of pressure. The integrated system for the production and harvesting of microalgae in which the position of the basic pressure controller device generates a digitized one-bit output based on the alignment of the low least significant bit basic pressure opening with the low least significant bit basic pressure input , and the basic pressure opening least significant bit high with the basic pressure entry least significant bit high; determines the state of the base pressure according to the state of the digitized output of a bit, whether the output bit is low indicating a base pressure that is too high, outside the operating range, or whether the output bit is high indicating a base pressure within the operating range; and controls the water pressure at the base pressure supply outlet based on the alignment status of the base pressure control opening with the regulated base pressure inlet.

[068] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise a signal pressure controller, the input signal pressure controller may comprise an input signal pressure controller cavity, comprising at least one pressure inlet signal, at least two digitized signal bits comprising a low least significant bit signal pressure input; a high least significant bit signal pressure input; a least significant bit signal pressure output; a low most significant bit signal pressure input; a high most significant bit signal pressure input; a more significant bit signal pressure output; a signal pressure controlling device, which may comprise a low least significant bit signal pressure opening configured to align with the low least significant bit signal pressure input and the least significant bit signal pressure outlet; a high least significant bit signal pressure opening configured to align with the high least significant bit signal pressure input and the least significant bit signal pressure output; a low most significant bit signal pressure opening configured to align with the low most significant bit signal pressure input and the most significant bit signal pressure output; a high most significant bit signal pressure opening configured to align with the high most significant bit signal pressure input and the most significant bit signal pressure output; a signal pressure controller rubber grid configured to surround the signal pressure controller device and create physical barriers to prevent leakage into the signal pressure controller cavity; a control spring configured to compress as the pressure within the signal pressure controller cavity increases by moving the signal pressure control device in a first direction and to a position within the signal pressure controller cavity determined by amount of pressure increase; and the control spring configured to stretch as the pressure within the signal pressure controller cavity decreases by moving the signal pressure control device in a second direction and to a position within the signal pressure controller cavity determined by the amount of pressure decrease. The integrated system for production and harvesting of microalgae in which the position of the signal pressure controller device generates a two-bit digitized output based on the alignment of the low least significant bit signal pressure port with the least significant bit signal pressure input low significant, from the high least significant bit signal pressure opening with the high least significant bit signal pressure input, from the low most significant bit signal pressure opening with the low most significant bit signal pressure input, from the low high most significant bit signal pressure with the high most significant bit signal pressure input; and determines the signal pressure state according to the state of the two-bit digitized output, whether the two digitized output bits are 00 indicating a leak state, whether the two digitized output bits are 01 indicating a low state, if the two digitized output bits are 11 indicating a high state.

[069] The integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, wherein the reactor node may comprise a flag configured to be raised to identify an alarm at the reactor node. The integrated system for microalgae production and harvesting may comprise an anchor assembly configured to anchor each reactor node and allow it to be sunk to a pre-defined depth.

[070] The present invention further relates to a method for producing and harvesting microalgae comprising pumping water through a reactor having a plurality of reactor nodes, each reactor node having a plurality of tube elements; supply of CO2 to the reactor; algal culture growth in the water within the pipe elements; pumping crop water from pipe elements to a flow divider; dividing the culture water between an algae separator and a culture extender; refilling the tube elements with culture water from the culture extender; collecting algae from the algae separator.

[071] The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise the extraction of CO2 comprising powering at least one pump using a motor; pumping water to a water degasser; water heating inside the water degasser; supplying an evaporator with exhaust gases from the engine, gases evaporated from the water degasser; sublimation of solid CO2 in the evaporator; precipitation of solid CO2 in the CO2 separator cooling plus pre-cooled evaporated gases from the evaporator; and supply of solid CO2 to replenish the supply of solid CO2 in the evaporator.

[072] The method of producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise water condensation from engine exhaust gases and gases evaporated from the water degasser before being fed into the evaporator; extraction of oxygen from the culture water supplied by the reactor; aeration of condensed water and water to be discharged with the extracted oxygen; and discharge of aerated water.

[073] The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may comprise extracting heat from the engine to heat the water supplied to the water degasser; extracting heat from the engine exhaust to heat the water in the water degasser; and recirculation of heated water to the water degasser. The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise extracting heat from engine exhaust gases and evaporated gases from the water degasser to condense the engine exhaust gases in a heat exchanger and remove contaminants in a water purifier. condensed water; using the extracted heat to preheat the incoming water to feed the water degasser.

[074] The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise extracting heat from the water subjected to oxygen extraction to heat the water supplied to the water degasser. The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise extracting heat from the water to be discharged to heat the reactor culture water to extract oxygen. The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise forcing water through a concentrator within the algae separator using a helical pusher.

[075] The method for producing and harvesting microalgae may further comprise determining the state of the plurality of reactor nodes; detecting an alarm within at least one of the plurality of reactor nodes; stopping water pumping from at least one pipe element within the reactor node associated with the alarm; and beginning the flow of water to another tube element, thus bypassing a failure without stopping the reactor operation.

[076] The present invention further relates to an integrated system for producing and harvesting microalgae, comprising a reactor having a plurality of reactor nodes and a plurality of tube elements, the plurality of reactor nodes and the plurality of control elements. tube configured to create an isolated culture water suitable for algae growth; each of the plurality of reactor nodes having a module assembly with electronic components, analog-to-digital converters and solenoid valves, the module assembly configured to receive electronic input signals from other module sets in other reactor nodes; convert pressure signals coming from a reactor node where the module assembly is installed into electronic status signals using the analog-to-digital converter; processing the electronic input signals and electronic status signals and generating electronic control signals to control the reactor node where the module assembly is installed and electronic output signals to be transmitted to other module assemblies in other reactor nodes; feeding the electronic control signals to the solenoid valves and generating output pressure signals to control the reactor node; and an algae separator unit.

DRAWINGS - FIGURES

[077] Capital letters A to D are used in some drawings to identify parts of the drawing and to differentiate components belonging to correspondingly identified sections. To avoid confusion, figure details are numbered with capital letters ''E'' onwards.

[078] Various other objects, corresponding features and advantages of the present invention will be fully appreciated as the same becomes better understood when considered in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which similar reference features designate the same parts or parts similar in various views, and in which: Table 1: List of figures and drawing numbers DRAWINGS - NUMERICAL REFERENCES Table 2: List of reference numbers and figures where they are indicated

DETAILED DESCRIPTION - FIRST RUN MODE

[079] The present invention consists of several parts that are designed to work together in an integrated system to allow the cultivation of seaweed on land or sea farms. The system is basically the same, the only difference is that in the case of land operation, some parts are not necessary and are therefore removed to save costs.

[080] The system is composed of three main parts: a) the individual components and assemblies used to create a volume to contain the algal water culture hereinafter also called wet components, reactor, wet reactor or wet part of the system ; b) the parts necessary to control and operate the system at the required degree of precision are henceforth also called dry components or the dry part of the system; c) the monitoring system.

[081] The so-called dry components do not mean that they are not in contact with water, but that they are not part of the wet reactor. The wet components are in direct contact with the aquatic algae culture and, in the case of a farm operating at sea, also with external seawater, and can also be submerged for safety during severe weather conditions. Most dry components are not in contact with external seawater at any time and do not need to be submerged during storms.

[082] There are many tasks that need to be performed simultaneously in perfect coordination to allow the system to meet all requirements. Therefore, an important part of the project is a monitoring system capable of transmitting information over relatively long distances so that the status of all individual units is available in a central control room and that appropriate actions can be taken depending on the messages. received.

[083] Figure 1 shows an embodiment of a tube element (100). Several of these tube elements (100), together with other components, are assembled to create a continuous isolated volume that constitutes the wet reactor culture water. The tube element (100) consists of an outer tube (101) with a cross section in the form of a rectangle with rounded edges (102). The outer tube (101) contains water, nutrients, algae and byproducts such as oxygen. The outer tube (101) is made from a suitable low-cost material, such as a plastic resin or other suitable material, using extrusion or another production method that is cheap and reliable. The selected material needs to be highly transparent; resistant to chemical degradation and impermeable to: sea water, CO2, oxygen and other chemicals used in the cultivation of microalgae; resistant to UV light; flexible, with high resistance to bending fatigue and small impacts, such as those that can be caused by a small boat or jet-ski used by maintenance teams, and resistant to biological fouling by marine organisms.

[084] The outer tube (101) may also have a coating or intermediate layer of a continuous reflective material along its lower part, so that light that passed through the algal culture instead of escaping to the sea is reflected back to the culture, increasing light availability in the deepest part of the unit, increasing algae productivity. The selected material also needs to be minimally buoyant so that the tube element (100) does not sink in the event of failure and cause one or more tube elements to become detached.

[085] Inside the outer tube (101) there is an inner tube (103) made of silicone rubber or other low-cost material; malleable and resistant to bending fatigue; impervious to water; resistant to chemical attack from sea water and other chemicals used in the cultivation of microalgae and highly permeable to CO2. The inner tube (103) is used to contain the CO2 under pressure so that the CO2 penetrates the algae culture contained between the inner tube (103) and the outer tube (101) of the tube element. The amount of CO2 that penetrates the culture in a given section of the wet reactor can be controlled by adjusting the pressure inside the internal tube of that section. Increasing the pressure causes more CO2 to enter the crop and, similarly, reducing the pressure causes less CO2 to enter the crop. By carefully adjusting the CO2 pressure throughout the reactor, the necessary amounts of CO2 can be made available to the microalgae as they grow and multiply, avoiding the problems of a shortage of CO2 limiting growth or excess CO2 affecting the pH of the water. and can harm microalgae.

[086] Figure 1E shows in detail how the inner tube (103) is fixed to the interior of the outer tube (101) by means of a flange (104) made of the same material as the outer tube or a suitable material to obtain a better connection. The flange (104) connecting the inner tube (103) and the outer tube (101) is made to leave a gap (105) at both ends of the tube member (100) to allow the inner tube (103) and the outer tube (101) of the tube element (100) are fitted to other parts. The thickness of the inner tube (103) and outer tube (101) is adjusted to be as thin as possible to save material and reduce costs while ensuring the required strength, toughness and durability. The inner tube (103) can be extruded together with or immediately before the outer tube (101), so that the materials fuse together, creating a highly resistant connection. Alternatively, another process, such as welding or gluing, may be used depending on cost and reliability to produce the tube element (100). The pipe element (100) can be pre-cut at the factory to standard sizes or compressed and rolled into elevations for transportation convenience and later be cut according to requirements during installation.

[087] Figure 2 shows a partially exploded assembly of a straight joint (113) and two tube elements (100a and 100b). To fix each inner tube (103a and 103b), an inner clamp (107a and 107b), respectively, is used and to fix the outer tube (101), a tube clamp (110a) and (110b), respectively, is used. used. The straight joint (113) is constructed to fit snugly against the tube member (100) and provides fitted connections to connect the outer tube (101) and inner tube (103) of the tube member (100) into two isolated circuits and independent, so that the culture water and CO2 remain separated throughout the reactor. The tube member (100a) depicted on the left side has been displaced from the straight joint (113) and has been cut away to show the inner clamp (107a) as well as the tube clamp (110a). The tube element (100b) on the right side is represented in the appropriate location, without cutout, to show the correct positioning of the inner clamp (107b) and the tube clamp (110b).

[088] The straight joint (113) is manufactured with a low-cost material, impermeable to water and other chemicals used in the cultivation of microalgae, resistant to UV light and suitable for use at sea. The material also needs to be rigid and minimally buoyant so as to provide a stable structure to attach the pipe elements (100) and not sink if failure causes a straight joint (113) or section of one or more pipe elements ( 100) and the straight joints to come loose.

[089] The detail in Figure 2E shows that the internal clamp is composed of an internal band (108) and an internal band fastener (109). The inner band (108) is made from a flexible material that is durable, resistant to UV light and sea water, and has a low stretch coefficient when subjected to tension. The inner band fastener (109) creates a means to reduce the length of the inner band (108) by creating friction between the inner wall of the inner tube (103) of a tube member (100) and the component to which it is being attached .

[090] The detail in Figure 2F shows that the tube clamp is composed of a tube band (111) and a tube band fastener (112). The tube band (111) is made from a flexible material that is durable, resistant to UV light and sea water, and has a low stretch coefficient when subjected to tension. The tube band fastener (112) creates a means to reduce the length of the tube band (111) by creating friction between the inner wall of the outer tube (101) of a tube member (100) and the component to which it is attached. being fixed.

[091] The detail of Figure 2G shows an enlarged view of the first embodiment of the straight joint (113) with the tube element (100b) that was visible in Figure 2 not shown for better clarity. The straight joint (113) has an outer wall (114) with rounded edges on the inner wall made to dimensions so that it fits tightly into the outer tube (101) of a tube member (100). The outer wall (114) of the straight joint (113) is thicker in the center, creating a strip of wall (123) that divides the straight joint (113) into two symmetrical tube ports (125a and 125b). The wall strip (123) has two vertical edges (124a and 124b) that function as stops for the pipe elements (100) attached to each pipe port of the straight joint (113), allowing the pipe elements (100) are properly placed in relation to the straight joint (113) and to each other. In this way, the wall band (123) prevents one tube element (100) from moving beyond its proper position to a point where it would displace the other tube element (100) which compromises the fixation. The wall strip (123) also reinforces the straight joint (113) so that it can better withstand the pressure applied by the pipe clamps when they are tightened into place to secure the pipe elements (100) in each pipe port (125 ). To improve retention of the tube member (100), the outer wall (114) of each tube port (125) has two parallel outer flanges (121a and 121b) on the tube port (125a) and two parallel outer flanges (121c and 121d) on the tube port (125b) creating an external connection socket (122a) on the tube port (125a) and an external connection socket (122b) on the tube port (125b). A tube clamp (110) must be installed around the middle of each outer clamp groove so that when the tube clamp (110) is tightened, the outer edges are compressed against the inner wall of the outer tube (101 ) of the tube element (100), creating more friction and improving fixation.

[092] The straight joint (113) also has an internal guide (116) with dimensions that allow it to fit tightly into the inner tube (103) of a tube element (100). The internal guide (116) is fixed to the external wall (114) of the straight joint (113) by means of a support (117) with dimensions that allow the internal guide (116) to be in perfect alignment with the internal tube (103) of a tube element (100) when the outer tube (101) of said tube element (100) is fixed to the outer wall (114) of the straight joint (113). The two guide support openings (118a and 118b), one in each tube port (125a) and (125b), respectively, allow the inner tubes of the tube elements and the inner clamps used to secure the inner tubes to reach their mounting position on each side of the straight joint (113).

[093] The internal guide (116) of the straight joint (113) has two parallel internal flanges (119a and 119b) on the tube port (125a) and two parallel internal flanges (119c and 119d) on the tube port (125b) creating an internal connection groove (120a) in the tube port (125a) and an internal connection groove (120b) in the tube port (125b). A tube clamp (110) must be installed around the middle of each outer clamp groove so that when the tube clamp (110) is tightened, the outer edges are compressed against the inner wall of the outer tube (101 ) of the tube element (100), creating additional friction that improves clamping.

[094] Figure 3 shows a way of executing a 90 degree joint (127) that can be used when necessary to create a pipeline capable of making curves and covering a greater percentage of the available surface, whether on land or at sea. The 90 degree joint (127) is constructed so that it has two tube ports (125a and 125b) that have the same shape as the tube port (125) on the straight joint (113) so as to allow it to fits perfectly into the pipe elements in the same way as the straight joint (113). Unlike the straight joint (113), in which the pipe ports are aligned at both ends, the 90-degree joint (127) has a 90-degree middle body (128) connecting the outer wall (114) or both ports of pipe that create the 90 degree bend (127) at the joint. To avoid creating unwanted turbulence in the flow, the 90 degree middle body (128) has 90 degree rounded flanges (129) with the same curvature as the rounded edge walls (115) of the tube port (125). The inner guides (116) at each end of the 90 degree joint (127) are connected by a 90 degree inner guide (130) which creates the required 90 degree bend. The 90 degree joint (127) is manufactured from a low-cost material, impermeable to water and other chemicals used in the cultivation of microalgae, resistant to UV light and suitable for use at sea. The material also needs to be rigid and minimally buoyant so as to provide a stable structure to secure the pipe elements and not sink if failure causes a straight joint (113) or section of one or more pipe elements and a or more 90 degree joints (127) and straight joints (113) become loose.

[095] The detail in Figure 3E shows that the 90 degree joint (127) is constructed so that each of its tube ports has an outer wall (114) and an inner guide (116) made with the same dimensions as straight joint tube ports (113). To improve retention of the pipe member (100), each pipe port (125) of the 90 degree joint (127) has two parallel outer flanges (121a and 121b) on the outer wall (114) of each pipe port (125). ) creating an external clamp groove (122). The pipe clamp (110) should be installed around the middle of this outer clamp groove (122) so that when the pipe clamp (110) is tightened, the outer edges (121) are compressed against the inner wall of the outer tube (101) of the tube element (100), creating more friction and improving clamping. Likewise, each tube port (125) of the 90 degree joint (127) has two internal flanges (119a and 119b) on the internal guide (116), creating an internal clamp groove (120) in each tube port ( 125) around which the internal clamp (107) will be installed. When the pipe clamp (110) is tightened, the inner flanges (119) are compressed against the inner wall of the inner tube (103) of the pipe member (100), creating additional friction that improves clamping. Each tube port (125) has a wall strip (123) located at the point where the tube port (125) and the 90-degree midbody (128) are connected. A vertical edge (124) on each wall strip (123) functions as a stop for the tube member (100) attached to each tube port (125), allowing the tube members to be properly positioned with respect to the joint. 90 degrees (127). The wall strip (123) also reinforces the pipe ports of the 90-degree joint (127) so that they can better withstand the pressure applied by the pipe clamps when they are tightened into place to secure the pipe elements. The inner guide (116) on each tube port (125) is attached to the 90-degree inner guide (130), which in turn is attached to the 90-degree middle body (128) via a 90-degree bracket ( 131). The dimensions of the 90 degree bracket (131) allow the inner guide (116) to be in perfect alignment with the inner tube (103) of a tube member (100) when the outer tube (101) of the tube member (100 ) mentioned is connected to the outer wall (114) of the pipe port (125) of the mentioned 90 degree joint (127). A guide bracket opening (118) in each tube port (125) allows the inner tubes of the tube elements and the inner clamps used to secure the inner tubes to reach their mounting position in each tube port (125) of the 90 degree joint (127).

[096] Figure 4 shows a way of executing a 180 degree joint (132) that can be used when necessary to create a pipeline capable of making curves and covering a greater percentage of the available surface on land or at sea. The 180 degree joint (132) is constructed to have two tube ports (125a) and (125b) that have the same standard shape as those of the straight joint (113) in order to allow it to fit snugly into the tube elements in the same way as the straight joint (113). Unlike the straight joint (113) in which the tube ports are aligned at each end, the 180 degree joint (132) has a 180 degree middle body (133) connecting the outer wall (114) of both tube ports (125) which creates the 180 degree turn for the joint. To avoid creating unwanted turbulence in the flow, the 180 degree middle body (133) has 180 degree rounded flanges (134) with the same curvature as the rounded edges of the wall (115) of the tube port (125). The inner guides (116) on each side of the 180 degree joint (132) are connected by a 180 degree inner guide (135) which creates the required 180 degree rotation. The 180 degree joint (132) is manufactured from a low-cost material, impermeable to water and other chemicals used in the cultivation of microalgae, resistant to UV light and suitable for use at sea. The material also needs to be rigid and minimally buoyant so that it provides a stable structure to attach the pipe elements and will not sink if failure causes a 180 degree joint (132) or section of one or more pipe elements and a or more joints to release.

[097] The detail in Figure 4E shows that the 180 degree joint (132) is constructed so that each of its tube ports has an outer wall (114) and an inner guide (116) made with the same dimensions as straight joint tube ports (113). To improve retention of the tube member (100), each tube port (125) of the 90 degree joint (132) has two parallel outer flanges (121a and 121b) on the outer wall (114) of each tube port (125). ) creating an external clamp groove (122). The tube clamp (110) should be installed around the middle of this outer groove (122) so that when the tube clamp (110) is tightened, the outer edges are compressed against the inner wall of the outer tube (101 ) of the tube element (100), creating more friction and improving fixation. Likewise, each tube port (125) of the 180 degree joint (132) has two internal edges (119a and 119b) on the internal guide (116), creating an internal connecting groove (120) in each tube port in around which the internal connection must be installed. When the pipe clamp (110) is tightened, the inner flanges (119) are compressed against the inner wall of the inner tube (103) of the pipe member (100), creating additional friction that improves clamping. Each tube port (125) has a wall strip (123) located at the point where the tube port (125) and the 180 degree middle body (133) are connected. A vertical edge (124) on each wall strip (123) functions as a stop for the pipe elements attached to each pipe port (125), allowing the pipe elements to be placed correctly relative to the 180 degree joint ( 132). The wall bands (123) also reinforce the pipe opening of the 180-degree joint (132), so that the pipe openings can better withstand the pressure applied by the pipe clamps (11) when the pipe clamps (110) are tightened in place to secure the tube elements. The inner guide (116) on each tube port (125) is attached to the 180-degree inner guide (135) which in turn is attached to the 180-degree middle body (133) via a 180-degree bracket (136). ). The 180 degree bracket dimensions (136) allow the inner guide (116) to be in perfect alignment with the inner tube (103) of a tube member (100) when the outer tube (101) of the tube member (100 ) mentioned is connected to the outer wall of the pipe port (125) of the mentioned 180 degree joint (132). A guide bracket opening (118) in each tube port (125) allows the inner tubes of the tube elements and the inner clamps used to secure the inner tubes to reach their mounting position in each tube port of the 90 joint. degrees (127).

[098] Figure 5 shows an execution mode of a reactor node (214). The main component of the reactor node (214) is a node core (215) that functions as a structural frame and support for other parts. Parts fit into specifically designed cavities and recesses so that mating parts can be easily inserted and removed, even if other components are in place. The node core (215) is constructed to create 04 sections that contain components to manage the connection of up to four pipe elements and other parts necessary to perform associated functions. To facilitate identification and understanding of the project, each of the four sections is identified with a bold capital letter A, B, C and D and the parts used in each section are marked with a capital letter identical to the section letter. Other parts that appear multiple times are distinguished with a lowercase letter unrelated to the sections.

[099] Figure 5 shows the parts accessible from the outside. These parts, when removed, grant access to other parts that need to operate within the node core (215), isolated from the external environment. Each node core section (215) contains a tube port (125), a port plug (137), and a CO2 valve plug (148). Also visible on the top of the node core (215) is an air release assembly (257) and a module assembly (369) and, on the sides, two pump covers (315a and 315b). Figure 5 also shows that in the case of marine operation, the reactor node (214) can be secured to an anchor assembly (282) via an anchor cable (287) that allows it to remain in place on the surface. from the sea or be submerged to a specific depth to protect the reactor node (214) and connected pipe elements from strong waves during a storm or due to other reason that may require the reactor node (214) to be submerged. The anchor cable (287) has a limiter (290) placed at a convenient point, between the anchor assembly (282) and the reactor node (214), which determines the maximum depth that the reactor node (214) can reach. be submerged.

[0100] The four tube ports allow the reactor node (214) to connect to up to four tube elements simultaneously. The reactor node (214) is constructed from materials such as plastic resins, e.g. ex. polycarbonate, PET or another suitable and low-cost option, resistant to sea water, UV light and biological fouling (additives can be used to improve these properties). The material also needs to be rigid so as to provide a stable structure for connecting the tube elements and installing various components necessary for the reactor node (214) to perform all of its functions. The materials selected must also allow the reactor node (214) to be minimally buoyant so that it will not sink if a failure causes a reactor node (214) or a section of one or more pipe elements and one or more Reactor nodes, 180 degree joints, 90 degree joints and straight joints become loose. The reactor node (214) is the key element in the wet reactor and contains several subassemblies and parts that implement several different functionalities that are critical to the operation of the wet reactor.

[0101] The detail of Figure 5H shows a possible type of anchor assembly, (282) which can be used to secure a reactor node (214) to the seabed and which consists of an anchor body (283) made of a hollow compartment, cylindrical in shape, closed at the top and open at the bottom. The anchor cable (287) is secured to the top of the anchor body (283) in an anchor loop (285) via an anchor cable loop (288) at the end of the anchor cable (287). An anchor valve (286) placed on top of the anchor body (283) allows air and water to flow in and out of the anchor body (283).

[0102] The detail in Figure 5E shows that components such as the port plugs (137B and 137C), the pump cover (315b) and the flag port (298) are attached to the node core (215) by means of fasteners (254) and secured by inserting clips (R 256) into the fasteners to hold the components in place. The shape of the fasteners (254) and clips (R 256) is standardized so that the same clips (R 256) can be used to protect all components, facilitating the work of maintenance teams.

[0103] The detail of Figure 5E also shows that each of the reactor node tube ports (214) has an outer wall (114) with rounded edges on the wall (115) and an inner guide (116) made with the same dimensions than the pipe ports of the straight joint, the 90 degree joint and the 180 degree joint. To improve retention of the tube member, each tube port has two parallel outer flanges (121a and 121b) on the outer wall (114) of the tube port, creating an external connection fitting (122). The tube clamp must be installed around the middle of this outer fitting (122) so that when the tube clamp is tightened, the outer edges are compressed against the inner tube wall of the outer tube of the tube element, creating more friction and improving fixation. Likewise, each pipe port has two internal edges (119a and 119b) on the internal guide (116), creating an internal connection fitting (120) around which the internal connection must be installed. When the inner clamp is tightened, the inner edges are compressed against the inner tube wall of the tube element, creating additional friction that improves clamping. The tube openings in the reactor node (214) terminate in a central wall of the node (220) that functions as a limiter for the tube elements connected to each tube port. For proper positioning, each tube element is inserted into the tube port until its end touches the node core wall (220). The internal guide (116) in each tube port is attached to the node core (215) via a node bracket (251). The dimensions of the node support (251) allow the inner guide (116) to be in perfect alignment with the inner tube of a tube element when the outer tube of said tube element is connected to the outer wall of the tube port. A guide support clearance (118) in each tube port allows the inner tubes of the tube elements and the internal clamps used to secure the inner tubes to reach their mounting position in each tube port.

[0104] The detail of Figure 5F shows that various components, such as the lower air release cover (258), the upper left air release cover (259), the upper right air release cover (260) and the top air release cover (262) that are part of the air release assembly (see Fig. 7 and Fig. 21) are attached using standard fasteners (254a, 254b, etc.) and clamps (R 256a, 256b etc. ), as in other parts of the reactor node (214). Figure 5F also shows that the upper right air release cover (260) contains an air release fitting (265) to the right of which air can be extracted from the reactor node (214) and that the upper air release cover (260) air vent (262) contains an air elimination opening (263) from which air can be released into the environment.

[0105] The detail of Figure 5G shows that the module assembly (369) is secured using standard fasteners (254) and clamps (R 256) as in other parts of the reactor node (214). A flag (307) used to indicate that the reactor node (214) has a failure and needs maintenance is shown in its rest or lowered position. The flag (307) is made of a suitable material mixed with a high visibility color pigment to make the flag easily visible against the background of the ocean or land when it is raised. The flag (307) has a series of digit notches (308) arranged to make four "8" figures on the front and four "8" figures on the back, so that the digit blocks (309) made of a material High-contrast color patterns can be adjusted at appropriate locations to create a unique combination of color patterns and numbers for each reactor node (214) in the wet reactor.

[0106] Also visible in Figure 5G is a diagnostic port (161), consisting of two (2) diagnostic accessories arranged in an 11x2 matrix, each identical to the diagnostic accessory (162) and a right signal port (164 ) consisting of 12 identical hose fittings, in which hoses with corresponding fittings are connected to transport pressurized water, pressurized air, pressurized CO2 and signals carried by the pressurized water in and out of the module assembly. The right signal port (164) is composed of: (u) right air refill (165), (w) right water refill (166), (K) clock output (167), (Y) drive ready for output (168), (Z) zero output (169), (v) submersion (170), (M) master/slave output (171), (r) reset (172), (Q) query (173 ), (h) help (174), (S) status (175) and (l) CO2 replenishment to the right (176). Whenever possible, a single lowercase or uppercase letter of the signal name is used to identify each signal. These cards are later used to facilitate the description of the implemented logical functions. A lowercase letter indicates an input signal and an uppercase letter indicates an output signal, with the exception of (w), (u), and (l) which are bidirectional. The case for these three signals is used to differentiate signals in the right (lowercase) signal port from signals in the left (uppercase) signal port.

[0107] Figure 6 shows the reactor node (214) from a lower back angle, allowing the port connection (137D) to the tube port (125D), the CO2 valve connection (148A, 148C and 148D) and an anchor opening (284) in the bottom of the anchor assembly (282) are seen. Figure 6 also shows that two limiters (290a and 290b) are used to define the depth at which the reactor node (214) is held. The limiter (290a) is adjusted so that it touches the node core (215) when the reactor node (214) reaches the surface and prevents the reactor node (214) from detaching from the anchor cable (287); and the limiter (290b) prevents the reactor node (214) from submerging more than an adjusted maximum depth.

[0108] The detail in Figure 6E shows fixing the CO2 valve connection (148A) using standard fasteners (254) and clamps (R 256). Also visible in Figure 6E is the outer opening of the node core (252) that allows the module assembly to sense external water pressure and the mating of the edge of the module (371) and the edge of the expansion box (390) a over the other and level with the node core (see Fig. 8 and Fig. 25).

[0109] The detail of Figure 6F shows the placement of a cable winch cavity (227) that contains a cable winch (292). The cable winch (292) holds the anchor cable (287) and moves it up and down to allow the reactor node (214) to be placed at the surface or at a preset depth, depending on the need. The anchor cable (287) is terminated by a knot (289) that holds the limiter (290a) in place.

[0110] Figure 7 shows the different components and subassemblies that make up the reactor node (214) in an exploded view. The base component of the reactor node (214) is the node core (215) which serves as support for all other components and subassemblies. The node core (215) is designed to allow up to four (04) tube elements to be connected to four (04) tube ports. To control the flow of water and CO2 in and out of each tube port, four (04) identical sets of components are used. To reduce the number of lines and numbers in the drawing and improve clarity, only the set used in port A of the tube is indicated, the other sets are identical. To control water flow, each assembly consists of a door (139A), two door springs (145a and 145b), and a door connection (137A). The door springs (145a and 145b) and the door (139A) are held in place by securing the door connection (137A) to the node core (215). To control the CO2 flow, each assembly also contains a CO2 valve (150A), two CO2 valve springs (158a and 158b) and a CO2 valve connection (148A). The CO2 valve springs (158a and 158b) and the CO2 valve (150A) are held in place by securing the CO2 valve connection (148A) to the node core (215).

[0111] The reactor node contains an anchor assembly (282), an anchor cable (287) with two stops (290a and 290b) and a cable winch (292) in case of operation in water to prevent it from becoming away and can be submerged if necessary. The cable winch (292) is installed before a pump rotor assembly (325b) is inserted into the node core (215) and a pump cover (315b) is attached to the node core (215). The cable winch (292) is engaged and held in place by the pump rotor assembly (325b) which in turn is held in place by the pump cover (315b).

[0112] Likewise, assembly of a propeller assembly (347) needs to be performed before a pump rotor assembly (325a) is inserted into the node core (215) and a pump cover (315a) is attached. in the core of the node (215). The propeller assembly (347) is engaged by the pump rotor assembly (325a) which in turn is held in place by securing the pump cover (315a) to the node core (215).

[0113] Finally, an air release assembly (257), a flag assembly (297) and a module assembly (369) complete the reactor node (214). The node core (215) can be constructed using various construction methods such as plastic injection, composite material molding, milling, etc.

[0114] Figure 8 shows that, to facilitate construction and reduce costs, the first execution mode of the node core (215) is expected to be divided into four parts: node core a (216), node core b (217), c-node core (218) and d-node core (219). The parts are designed to be easily manufactured by simple standard methods, regardless of the technique used in their manufacture, allowing direct access to all internal cavities. The pieces fit together perfectly and can then be glued, welded, or clamped to build the node core (215).

[0115] The node core a (216) has an internal water culture cavity (234) that allows culture water to flow within the node core (215). A water pump cavity (231) and a rotor rod support (225) provide space and support for inserting a pump rotor assembly that drives the propeller assembly assembly. A pump cover is used to seal the water pump cavity (231) from the outside and hold the pump impeller assembly in place inside the water pump cavity. A rear propeller shaft support (221) and a front propeller shaft support (223) are used to install the propeller assembly and are located in the middle of the water culture cavity (234) to allow the propellers to push the water from one side to the other. In this way, water can be pumped from tube port A or tube port B to tube port C or tube port D and vice versa.

[0116] A cable winch cavity (227) allows installation of the cable winch (292). A winch rotor cavity (232) provides space and support for inserting a second pump rotor assembly that drives the cable winch (292) and holds the cable winch (292) in place. A second pump cover is used to seal the winch rotor cavity (232) from the outside and hold the pump rotor assembly in place inside the winch rotor cavity (232).

[0117] The four-port insertion openings (236a, 236B, 236C, and 236D) allow access to insert or remove four ports in the node core (215). A door connection cavity (235A, 235B, 235C) (235D not visible from the viewing angle) surrounds each door insertion opening, allowing installation of a door connection to seal each door insertion opening.

[0118] The core of node b (217) is made of a single sheet pierced by four gate channels (237A, 237B, 237C and 237D). Each door channel (237A, 237B, 237C and 237D) passes through a respective door cavity (238A, 238B, 238C and 238D) that accommodates one door and two door springs each. When attached to the node core a (216), each port cavity (238A, 238B, 238C and 238D) perfectly aligns with the respective port insertion opening (236A, 236B, 236C and 236D) located in the node core a (216). (216). Each port channel (237A, 237B, 237C, and 237D) allows water to flow through the node b core (217) into and out of the culture water cavity (234) when the corresponding port is in the open position.

[0119] The node b core (217) is also pierced by a propeller access opening (240a) that allows access to install and repair the propeller assembly assembly in the node a core (216) and a series of tube holes (241a) that allow water or CO2 to pass through the node b core (217) and reach the intended termination points.

[0120] The node c core (218) is made of a single sheet of material that is pierced by four culture water channels (243A, 243B, 243C and 243D) that are aligned with the port channels (237A, 237B , 237C and 237D) respectively in the node b core (217) below and by a helix access opening (240b) that has the same shape and is aligned with the helix access opening (240a) in the node b core ( 217) below. The node c core (218) also has a series of tube holes (241b) and tube tracks (242) that create a pipeline that allows water or CO2 to flow in isolated independent circuits and reach their intended termination points. . Finally, the c-node core (218) has a CO cavity lid (244) that is elevated from the surface of the base layer.

[0121] The node core d (219) has four tube ports (125A, 125B, 125C and 125D), where up to four tube elements can be protected. The node core d (219) also has four CO2 valve insertion openings 247B (247A, 247C and 247D not visible from the viewing angle), into each of which CO2 valves are inserted with two CO2 valve springs and A CO2 valve connection is installed to ensure the CO2 valve and CO2 springs remain in place. Furthermore, the node core (219) has a flag compartment (250) where the flag assembly is installed, a module compartment (248) for installing the module assembly, and an air release compartment (249). to install the air release assembly. Surrounding the module compartment (248), there is a CO2 cavity body (245) that creates the internal space to contain the CO2 used in the reactor. An external opening of the node core (252) creates an opening to the outside through which the module assembly can sense external water pressure.

[0122] Figure 9 shows the first embodiment of the node core (215) from a different perspective (bottom left) to show the node a core (216), the node b core (217), the node core c (218) and the core of node d (219) in more detail.

[0123] The water pump cavity (231) provides space and support for inserting a pump impeller assembly that drives the propeller assembly assembly. A pump cover is used to seal the water pump cavity (231) from the outside and hold the pump impeller assembly in place inside the water pump cavity. The cable winch cavity (227) allows installation of the cable winch (292). The winch rotor cavity (232) provides space and support to insert a second pump rotor assembly that drives the cable winch (292) and holds the cable winch (292) in place. A second pump cover is used to seal the winch rotor cavity (232) from the outside and hold the pump rotor assembly in place inside the winch rotor cavity (232).

[0124] The four port insertion openings (236A, 236B, 236C and 236D) are not visible from the viewing angle, they allow access to insert or remove four ports in the node core (215). A door fitting cavity (235A, 235B, 235C) (235D not visible from the viewing angle) surrounds each door insertion opening, allowing installation of a door fitting to seal each door insertion opening.

[0125] The core of node b (217) is made of a single sheet pierced by four gate channels (237A, 237B, 237C and 237D). Each door channel (237A, 237B, 237C and 237D) passes through a respective cavity (238A, 238B, 238C and 238D) which accommodates one door and two door springs each. When attached to the node core a (216), each port cavity (238A, 238B, 238C, and 238D) perfectly aligns with the respective port insertion opening (236A, 236B, 236C, and 236D) located in the node core a (216). (216).

[0126] The node b core (217) is also pierced by the propeller access opening (240a) which allows access to install and repair the propeller assembly in the node a core (216). The node b core (217) also has a series of pipe holes (241a) that create a pipeline that allows water or CO2 to flow in isolated independent circuits and reach their intended termination points.

[0127] The node c core (218) is made of a single layer of material that is pierced by four culture water channels (243A, 243B, 243C and 243D) that are aligned with the port channels (237A, 237B , 237C and 237D) respectively in the node b core (217) below and through the helix access opening (240b) which has the same shape and is aligned with the helix access opening (240a) in the node b core (217 ) below. The node c core (218) also has a series of tube tracks (242a, 242b, etc.) that create a pipeline that allows water or CO2 to flow in isolated independent circuits and reach their intended termination points.

[0128] The node core d (219) has four tube ports (125A, 125B, 125C and 125D), where up to four tube elements can be protected. Each tube port continues to a respective lower tube port (126A, 126B, 126C, and 126D) that allows culture water to continue down the respective culture water channels (243A, 243B, 243C, and 243D) and port channels ( 237A, 237B, 237C and 237D) to reach the culture water cavity in the core of node a (216). The node core d (219) also has four CO2 valve insertion openings (247B) (247A, 247C and 247D not visible from the viewing angle) into each of which a CO2 valve and two CO2 valve springs are inserted. CO2 and CO2 valve connection is installed to ensure that the CO2 valve and CO2 valve springs remain in place.

[0129] The body of the CO2 cavity (245) is hollow, containing a CO2 cavity (246). When the d-node core (219) and the c-node core (218) are joined together, the CO2 cavity lid seals the CO2 cavity (246), creating an isolated volume to contain the CO2 that is used in the wet reactor. , so that CO2 and culture water remain separate at all times. The CO2 that is contained within the inner tubes of the tube elements reaches each internal guide (116A, 116B, 116C) (116D not visible from the viewing angle) and passes through the respective CO2 valve cavity (see Fig. 10 and Fig. 11 ) and continues directly into the CO2 cavity (246). Also visible in Figure 9 are the flag compartment (250) where the flag assembly is installed and the module compartment (248) where the module assembly is installed. The external opening of the node core (252) creates an opening to the outside through which the module assembly can sense external water pressure. The d-node core (219) also has a series of tube holes (241b) that create a pipeline that allows water or CO2 to flow in isolated independent circuits and reach their intended termination points.

[0130] Figure 10 shows a perspective view of some components of the reactor node (214) with the node core (215) drawn in ghost lines, allowing the visualization of a body of water (365) that is composed of all culture water contained within the reactor node (214) and a CO2 body (367) which is composed of the CO2 supply contained within the CO2 cavity in the reactor node (214). Figure 10 shows the internal positioning of the ports, springs and port connections in relation to the water body (365) and CO2 valves, CO2 valve springs and CO2 valve connections in relation to the CO2 body (367) . The design is symmetrical; the components located in sections A and D, as well as B and C, are mirror images of each other. To reduce the number of lines and improve clarity, the components that interact with the water body (365) are indicated only in sections A and B and the components that interact with the CO2 body (367) are indicated only in sections C and D.

[0131] The door (139A) (and mirror image (139D) drawn but not indicated) is in the closed position and as a result, the door springs (145a and 145b) are extended and the door (139A) is in contact with the port connection (137A). The door (139B) (and mirror image (139C) drawn but not shown) is in the open position and, as a result, the door springs (145c and 145d) are compressed and the door (139B) is further away from the connection of the port (137B).

[0132] The CO2 valves move together with the corresponding ports, so that in the event of a leak, the flow of culture water and the CO2 supply of the affected section are cut off. As such, the CO2 valve (150D) (and mirror image 150A drawn but not indicated) is in the closed position and as a result, the CO2 valve springs (158a and 158b) are extended and the CO2 valve ( 150D) is in contact with the CO2 valve connection (148D). The CO2 valve (150C) (and mirror image (150B) drawn but not indicated) is in the open position and as a result, the CO2 valve springs (158c and 158d) are compressed and the CO2 valve (150C) ) is further away from the CO2 valve connection (148C).

[0133] CO2 port springs and CO2 valve springs are included in the reactor node design to provide a constant push to the CO2 ports and valves toward the respective CO2 port and valve connections so that, in In the event of a power failure, all CO2 ports and valves automatically close.

[0134] Figure 11 shows a perspective view of the water body (365) and the CO2 body (367) drawn in ghost lines to better show the relative positioning of ports, port springs, port connections, CO2 valves , CO2 valve springs and CO2 valve connections. The design is symmetrical; the components located in sections A and D, as well as B and C, are mirror images of each other. To reduce the number of lines and improve clarity components that interact with the water body (365) are indicated only in sections A and B and components that interact with the CO2 body (367) are indicated only in sections C and D.

[0135] The water body (365) has four water body channels (366A, 366B, 366C and 366D) passing through the respective ports (139A, 139B) (and the mirror images (139C, 139D) drawn, but not indicated). The CO2 body (367) has four CO2 body channels (368a, 368B, 368C and 368D) that pass through respective CO2 valves (150C, 150D) (and the mirror images (150a, 150B) drawn, but not indicated).

[0136] The port (139a, 139B) is composed of a port body (140a, 140B) that is solid and a port opening (141a, 141B) that is hollow and allows fluid to pass. The door (139a) (and mirror image (139D) drawn but not shown) is in the closed position and as a result, the door springs (145a and 145b) are extended and the door (139a) is in contact with port connection (137a). The door body (140a) is aligned with the water channel body (366a), closing the channel and preventing water flow. The door (139B) (and mirror image (139C) drawn but not shown) is in the open position and as a result, the door springs (145c and 145d) are compressed and the door (139B) is further away from the port connection (137B). The door opening (141B) is aligned with the body of the water channel (366B), allowing water flow.

[0137] To accommodate material and design limitations, each door spring is installed in a cavity that begins at the node core and continues into the door body, allowing the door spring to be as large as possible and therefore have a best maximum compression ratio relative to initial length. The cavity reaches as far into the door body as the strength of the door material allows, leaving enough material before opening the door to ensure strength and durability (see Fig. 13 and Fig. 14). The two door springs within the doors (139A and 139B) are shown in dashed lines for reference. The other doors (139C and 139D) are identical, but only the visible parts of the door springs are shown for comparison and clarity.

[0138] The CO2 valve (150C, 150D) is composed of a CO2 valve body (151C, 151D) that is solid and a CO2 valve opening (152C, 152D) that is hollow and allows fluid to pass through through. The CO2 valves move together with the corresponding ports, so that in the event of a leak, the culture water and CO2 supply to the affected section are turned off. As such, the CO2 valve (150D) (and mirror image (150A) drawn but not indicated) is in the closed position and, as a result, the CO2 valve springs (158a and 158b) are extended and the valve CO2 valve (150D) is in contact with the CO2 valve plug (148D). The CO2 valve body (151D) is aligned with the CO2 channel body (368D), closing the channel and preventing CO2 flow. The CO2 valve (150C) (and mirror image (150B) drawn but not indicated) is in the open position and as a result, the CO2 valve springs (158c and 158d) are compressed and the CO2 valve ( 150C) is further away from the CO2 valve plug (148C). The CO2 valve opening (152C) is aligned with the CO2 channel body (368C), allowing CO2 flow.

[0139] The CO2 valves are considerably shorter in length than the ports, and as a result, there is sufficient space available for the CO2 valve springs in the node core without the need to create cavities in the CO2 valve body. To reduce costs, CO2 valves are designed without spring cavities.

[0140] Considering the construction of the piping openings and cavities containing components that control water culture and CO2 flow, such as doors, CO2 valves and their respective springs, the core sections of nodes A and D and the Sections B and C are built symmetrically, mirroring each other. The CO2 ports and valves are movable components and in one section move independently of the CO2 ports and valves in other sections according to the operational state of the reactor node. Although they are separate parts, in normal operation the CO2 ports and valves in each section move in the same way, so they are both open or closed.

[0141] The drawings of the Figures. 10, 11 and 12 are made with components drawn in the same position to facilitate understanding. Additionally, for ease of description, CO2 ports and valves are drawn in mirrored positions for sections A and D and for sections B and C. This does not mean that the movement of CO2 ports and valves in a section is restricted by the position of CO2 ports and valves in other sections. During normal operation, CO2 ports and valves in all sections can assume any position. The only restriction is that in a specific section the door and the CO2 valve move in the same way so that after the movement has ceased they are both open or closed.

[0142] Figure 12 shows a perspective view of the water body (365) and the CO2 body (36)7 drawn in ghost lines to serve as a reference to the position of all control tubes and sensor tubes available to monitor and Operate the tube ports on the four sections of the reactor node. Ports, port connections, CO2 valves, and CO2 valve connections are drawn on normal lines. For clarity, the door springs and CO2 valve springs are not drawn, so that the control tubes and sensors can be better visualized.

[0143] Each control tube or sensor is composed of tracks and holes in the core of node a, the core of node b, the core of node c, and the core of node d. When the node core is assembled by joining these four component parts, one part joins the exposed tube paths on the other, creating tube sections. One or more of these pipe sections, joined to the pipe holes in different parts, connect the intended termination points for each control and sensor pipe to individual insulated pipes, producing complex piping using just four easily manufactured parts.

[0144] All tubes in the pipeline originate at the main control port of the node (189), so that the tubes can be routed to the module assembly that processes sensor signals and generates control signals. Each section has the same set of control tubes and sensors, the only difference is the route each tube takes to reach the intended termination point in the different sections. The main control port of the node core (189) has 24 tubes, 06 for each section.

[0145] Figure 12 shows all four sections of the node core with each tube in each section marked with the corresponding capital letters A, B, C and D according to the section to which it refers. Other parts such as ports, port connections, CO2 valves, CO2 valve connections are also indicated with corresponding capital letters. The water body (365), the CO2 body (367), each door cavity (238A, 238B, 238C and 238D) with respective door cavity spring cuts (239A, 239B, 239C and 239D), as well as each CO2 valve cavity with respective CO2 valve cavity spring cuts are drawn in ghost lines to serve as reference. Some component indications are not made in Figure 12 to avoid confusion. Instead, all indications are made in Figures 13 and 14, showing that each shows only one section in more detail. Because the components appearing in Figure 12 in one section are also shown in Figures 13 and 14 and the description is the same for each of the four tube ports, for brevity the description is given only in Figure 13 for a closed configuration and in Figure 14 for an open configuration. Figure 12 serves as an overview of the four sections.

[0146] Figure 13 is a partial view of the reactor node showing section D with the door and CO2 valve closed and is a mirror image of section A. All parts shown are from section D and as a result, the Capital letter D is not necessary to differentiate these parts from others in other sections so they are indicated with their simple numbers or with a lowercase letter if more than one of the same part is indicated in the drawing. A node main control port section (190D) that is a portion of the node main control port that contains only pipes serving section D is the only component marked with D.

[0147] Figure 13 shows the water body (365), the CO2 body (367) and the door cavity (238) with its two door cavity spring cuts (239a and 239b) drawn in ghost lines. A CO2 valve cavity (156) with its two CO2 valve cavity spring cuts (157a and 157b) is also drawn in ghost lines. The door plug (137) contains a series of fixing holes (253a) to secure the door plug to the node core and a door connection seal ring (138) to help seal the door cavity (238) from preventing that the pressurized water injected into the door cavity (238) escapes into the environment. The CO2 valve plug (148) contains a series of fixing holes (253b) to secure it to the node core and a CO2 valve plug seal ring (149) to help seal the CO2 valve cavity. CO2 (156), preventing the pressurized water injected into the cavity of the CO2 valve (156) from escaping into the environment.

[0148] The door (139) is composed of the door body (140) that closes the water body channel (366) when the door (139) is in the closed position (in contact with the door shutter (137) , as drawn) and a door opening (141) that allows water to flow into the water body channel (366) if the door (139) is in the open position. A set of three door seal rings (142a, 142b, and 142c) isolate the door body (140) and door opening (141) to prevent leaks, and a series of door spacers (143a and 143b) on both sides of the door (139) prevent the door from completely closing the door cavity (238) when opened or closed and creates two gaps where water is injected to push the door (139) in both directions. An open port tube (193) terminates in the space created by the port spacers (143a) between the port and the port connection (137), so that if high pressure water is injected at this time when the port is closed , the door will be moved away from the port connection (137) and opened. An open port tube (195) terminates in the space created by the port spacers (143b) between the port and the edge of the port cavity (238), so that if high pressure water is injected at that point when the port is opened, the door will be pushed towards the door connection (137) and closed. The two door spring cuts (144a and 144b), one on each side of the door and aligned with the corresponding door cavity spring cuts (239a and 239b), respectively, create spaces to accommodate two door springs (145a, 145b ) which are used to ensure that, in the event of a power failure, the door closes automatically. For ease of visualization, the door spring cuts are drawn in dashed lines and the part of the door springs within the door spring cuts is omitted.

[0149] The CO2 valve (150) is composed of a CO2 valve body (151) that closes the CO2 body channel (368) when the CO2 valve (150) is in the closed position (in contact with the CO2 valve plug (148), as drawn) and a CO2 valve opening (152) that allows CO2 to flow into the CO2 body channel (368) if the CO2 valve (150) is in the open position. A set of three CO2 valve o-rings (153a, 153b, and 153c) insulates the CO2 valve body (151) and the CO2 valve opening (152) to prevent leaks and a series of CO2 valve spacers (154a and 154b) on both sides of the CO2 valve (150) prevents the CO2 valve from completely closing the CO2 valve (156) cavity when opened or closed and creates two gaps where water is injected to push the CO2 valve (156) CO2 (150) in both directions. Two CO2 valve spring guides (155) aligned with the two CO2 valve cavity spring cuts (157a and 157b) accommodate two CO2 valve springs (158a) (the CO2 valve spring inside the cutout CO2 valve cavity spring (157b) is not designed to improve visualization) which are used to ensure that in the event of a power failure, the CO2 valve closes automatically. An open CO2 valve tube (194) terminates in the space created by the CO2 valve spacers (154a) between the CO2 valve and the CO2 valve connection (148), so that if high pressure water is injected into this At the moment when the CO2 valve (150) is closed, the CO2 valve will be moved away from the CO2 valve connection (148) and opened. A closed CO2 valve tube (196) terminates in the space created by the CO2 valve spacers (154b) between the CO2 valve and the edge of the CO2 valve cavity (156), so that if high pressure water is injected at that point when the CO2 valve is open, the CO2 valve (150) will be pushed toward the CO2 valve connection (148) and close.

[0150] The port opening tube (193) and the CO2 valve opening tube (194) are connected to the same termination point on the main section of the core control port (190D) and the port closing tube (195) and the CO2 valve shut-off tube (196) are connected to another same termination point on the core control port section of the main node, so that the port and the CO2 valve open and close together . Control devices located within the module assembly ensure that when the water pressure in the door opening tube (193) and CO2 valve opening tube (194) is high, the water pressure in the CO2 valve opening tube (194) is high. port (195) and CO2 valve shutoff tube (196) is low and vice versa so that a consistent pressure difference is generated to push the port and CO2 valve in the desired direction.

[0151] A water sensing tube (197) terminates at the near edge of the water channel body (366) to allow control devices within the module assembly to monitor water pressure in the water channel body and detect leaks of water into the tube element connected to tube port D. A water supply tube (198) terminates at the end of the water channel body (366) to allow control devices within the module assembly to supply water to the body of the water channel and control the water pressure in the tube element connected to tube port D.

[0152] A CO2 sensing tube (199) terminates at the near edge of the CO2 channel body (368) to allow control devices within the module assembly to monitor CO2 pressure in the CO2 channel body and detect leaks of CO2 in the tube element connected to tube port D. A CO2 supply tube (200) terminates at the end of the CO2 channel body (368) to allow control devices within the module assembly to supply CO2 to the body of the CO2 channel and control the CO2 pressure in the tube element attached to tube port D.

[0153] Figure 14 is a partial view of the reactor node, showing section B with the door and CO2 valve open and is a mirror image of section C. All parts shown are from section B and as a result, the capital letter B is not necessary to differentiate these parts from others in other sections, but so that they are indicated with their simple numbers or with a lowercase letter if more than one of the same part is indicated in the drawing. The node main control port section (190B) which is a portion of the node main control port that contains only pipes serving section B is the only component marked B.

[0154] Figure 14 shows the water body (365), the CO2 body (367), the door cavity (238) with its two door cavity spring cuts (239a and 239b), the door cavity CO2 valve (156) with its two CO2 valve cavity spring cuts (157a and 157b) drawn in ghost lines. The door plug (137) contains a series of fixing holes (253a) to secure it to the node core and the door connection seal ring (138) to help seal the door cavity (238a) from preventing that the pressurized water injected into the door cavity (238a) escapes into the environment. The CO2 valve plug (148) contains a series of fixing holes (253b) to secure it to the node core and the CO2 valve connection sealing ring (149) to help seal the CO2 valve cavity. CO2 (156), preventing the pressurized water injected into the cavity of the CO2 valve (156) from escaping into the environment.

[0155] The door (139) is composed of the door body (140) that closes the water channel body (366) if the door (139) is in the closed position (in contact with the door shutter (137), as drawn) and a door opening (141) that allows water to flow into the body of the water channel (366) when the door (139) is in the open position (away from the door plug (137) as drawn). A set of three door seal rings (142a, 142b, and 142c) insulate the door body (140A) and door opening (141) to prevent leaks, and a series of door spacers (143a and 143b) on both sides of the door (139) prevents the door from closing completely. The door cavity (238a, 238b) when opened or closed creates two gaps where water is injected to push the door (139) in both directions. A door opening tube (193) terminates in the space created by the door spacers (143a) between the door and the door plug (137), so that if high pressure water is injected at this time when the door is closed, the door will be moved away from the door shutter (137) and opened. A port closure tube (195) terminates in the space created by the port spacers (143b) between the port and the edge of the port cavity (238), so that if high pressure water is injected at this time the door is open, the door will be pushed towards the door shutter (137) and closed. The two door spring cuts (144a, 144b), each aligned with the corresponding door cavity spring cutout (239a and 239b), one on each side of the door cavity, create space to accommodate two door springs ( not drawn) which are used to ensure that, in the event of a power failure, the door closes automatically.

[0156] The CO2 valve (150) is comprised of a CO2 valve body (151) that closes the CO2 body channel (368) if the CO2 valve (150) is in the closed position (in contact with the CO2 valve plug (148) as drawn) and a CO2 valve opening (152) that allows CO2 to flow into the CO2 channel body (368) when the CO2 valve (150) is in the open position (away from the CO2 valve plug (148), as drawn). The set of three CO2 valve sealing rings (153a, 153b, and 153c) insulates the CO2 valve body (151) and the CO2 valve opening (152) to prevent leaks and a series of CO2 valve spacers (154a and 154b) on both sides of the CO2 valve (150) prevents the CO2 valve from completely closing the cavity of the CO2 valve (156) when opened or closed and creates two gaps where water is injected to push the valve of CO2 (150) in both directions. Two CO2 valve spring guides (155) aligned with the two CO2 valve cavity spring cuts (157a and 157b) accommodate the two CO2 valve springs (not drawn) which are used to ensure that in the event of If there is a power outage, the CO2 valve closes automatically. The CO2 valve opening tube (194) terminates in the gap created by the CO2 valve spacers (154a) between the CO2 valve and the CO2 valve plug (148), so that if high pressure water is injected At this time when the CO2 valve (150) is closed, the CO2 valve will be moved away from the CO2 valve plug (148) and opened. The CO2 valve shutoff tube (196) terminates in the gap created by the CO2 valve spacers (154b) between the CO2 valve and the edge of the CO2 valve cavity (156), so that if the high water Pressure is injected at this point when the CO2 valve is open, the CO2 valve (150) will be pushed toward the CO2 valve plug (148) and close.

[0157] The port opening tube (193) and the CO2 valve opening tube (194) are connected to the same termination point on the main section of the node main control port (190B) and the CO2 valve closing tube (190B) port (195) and the CO2 valve shutoff tube (196) are connected to another same termination point on the main node main control port section (190B), so that the port and CO2 valve open and close together. Control devices located within the module assembly ensure that when the water pressure in the door opening tube (193) and the CO2 valve opening tube (194) is high, the water pressure in the closing tube (193) is high. of the port (195) and the CO2 valve shutoff tube (196) is low and vice versa, so that a consistent pressure difference is generated to push the port and CO2 valve in the desired direction.

[0158] The water sensing tube (197) terminates at the near edge of the water body channel (366) to allow control devices within the module assembly to monitor water pressure in the water channel body and detect leaks of water into the tube element connected to tube port B. The water supply tube (198) terminates at the end of the water body channel (366) to allow control devices within the module assembly to supply water to the body of the water body channel and control the water pressure in the pipe element connected to pipe port B.

[0159] The CO2 sensing tube (199) terminates near the edge of the CO2 channel body (368) to allow control devices within the module assembly to monitor the CO2 pressure in the CO2 channel body and detect leaks of CO2 into the tube element connected to tube port B. The CO2 supply tube (200) terminates at the end of the CO2 channel body (368) to allow control devices within the module assembly to supply CO2 to the CO2 channel body and control the CO2 pressure in the tube element connected to tube port B.

[0160] The detail of Figure 14E shows the termination point of the door closure tube (195) at the edge of the door cavity (238), so that if high pressure water is injected at this point when the door is open , the door will be pushed toward the port connection and close.

[0161] Figure 15 shows the reactor node (214) drawn in ghost lines to show the position of the flag assembly (297), the pump rotor assembly (325a), the propeller assembly (347), the rotor (325b) and cable winch (292).

[0162] The flag assembly (297) is represented with the flag (307b) in an intermediate position, moving between two overlapping positions (307a) lowered and (307c) raised. A flag tube (201) supplies pressurized water to control the flag (307b). A pair of flag port flanges (299) help better secure the flag assembly in place when it is attached to the node core. The pump impeller assembly (325a) is fed by a pump supply tube (208) that delivers pressurized water and a pump exhaust tube (209) that allows low pressure water to be discharged into the body of water within of the reactor node. Therefore, the pump impeller assembly (325a) rotates clockwise or stops. The pump impeller assembly (325b) is fed by a submergence control shut-off tube (206) and a submergence control opening tube (207). When the submergence control shut-off tube (206) provides an outlet for low-pressure water and the submergence control opening tube (207) supplies pressurized water, the pump impeller assembly (325b) rotates clockwise and Alternatively, when the submersion control closing tube (206) and the submersion control opening tube (207) exchange roles, the pump impeller assembly (325b) rotates counterclockwise. In this way, the cable winch (292) is driven in the desired direction to submerge or emerge the reactor node.

[0163] Figure 16, to the right of drawing sheet 19, shows an isometric sectional view of the flag assembly with the components seen in place. A flag port (298) provides support and space to fit the other components. The flag port (298) has a series of fixing holes (253) to allow it to be attached to the node core and the flag port flange (299) (partially cut out by the notch) that strengthens the flag port ( 298) and allows it to be better attached to the knot core. The flag port has an internal flag port cavity (302) that creates space to accommodate a flag lever (310) and allows the flag (307) and a flag piston (311) to move. The flag piston (311) has a flag piston head (312), so that high-pressure water injected by the flag tube (201) can push the flag piston (311) in the direction of the straight arrow shown. The flag piston (311) can partially slide in and out of the flag port cavity (302) through a flag port connection (300) that has a hole in the middle. The flag lever (310) is connected to the flag (30)7 and the flag piston (311) via lever pins (306a and 306b). The flag (307) is attached to the flag port by means of a flag pin (305) which allows the flag to rotate around it. This way, when the flag piston is pushed in the direction of the straight arrow, the flag lever moves and rotates, causing the flag to move in the direction of the curved arrow shown and be lowered. A flag spring (314) compressed between the flag port connection (300) and the flag piston head (312) provides a force in the opposite direction so that water pressure pushes the flag piston (314). 311) is reduced or a power failure occurs, the flag spring (314) pushes the piston head flag (312) in the opposite direction of the straight arrow, causing the flag to move in the opposite direction of the curved arrow and be raised . A raised flag limiter (303) limits the range of motion of the flag, stopping it when it is perfectly straight. Likewise, a flag down limiter (304) limits the range of movement of the flag that stops it when it reaches the down position. The flag (307) is made of a suitable material mixed with a high-visibility color pigment so that it is easily seen against the ocean or land background when raised. The flag (307) has digit notches (308) arranged to make four figures in the shape of an "8" on the front and four figures in the shape of an "8" on the back, so that the digit pads (309a) , 309b etc.). High contrast color material can be adjusted at appropriate locations to create a unique combination of pattern and number of colors for each flag in order to facilitate identification of a specific reactor node in the wet reactor.

[0164] Figure 17 to the left of drawing sheet 19 shows a superimposed cropped view of the flag assembly to show the position of the internal components when the flag (307) b is in the raised, intermediate and lowered positions. The base component of the flag assembly is the flag door (298) which provides support and space to fit the other components. The flag port flange (299) (partially cut by the notch) strengthens the flag port (298) and allows it to be better secured to the reactor node. The flag port has an internal flag port cavity (302) that creates space to accommodate a flag lever (310b) and allows the flag (307b) and flag piston (311) to move. The flag piston (311) has a flag piston head (312b) with two flag piston sealing rings (313a and 313b) that improve water tightness, so that high-pressure water injected through the flag (201) can push the flag piston (311) in the direction of the straight arrow without leaks. The flag piston (311) can partially slide in and out of the flag port cavity (302) through the flag port connection (300) which has a flag port seal ring (301) to seal the cavity where the flag piston head (312b) is located. The flag lever (310b) is connected to the flag (307b) and flag piston (311) via lever pins (306a and 306b). The flag (307b) is attached to the flag port by means of the flag pin (305) which allows the flag to rotate around it. This way, when the flag piston is pushed in the direction of the straight arrow, the flag lever moves and rotates, causing the flag to move in the direction of the curved arrow. The superimposed components show the positions at the extremes of the movement, so that when the flag (307a) is in the horizontal or rest position, the flag lever (310a) and the flag piston head (312a) are in the indicated positions ( The). When, on the other hand, the flag (307c) is in the vertical or alarm position, the flag lever (310c) and the flag piston head (312c) are in the indicated positions (c). The flag spring is not designed to better display the superimposed flag piston head (312a, 312b and 312c).

[0165] Figure 18 shows a partially exploded view of a reactor node showing the module assembly (369) displaced from its installed position in the node core (215). The parts that make up the water pump, the propeller assembly assembly, the pump rotor assembly and the pump cover (315) are also moved. The propeller assembly assembly is composed of four sets of propellers (348) and other components shown in detailed Figure 18E. The pump rotor assembly is composed of a pump rotor (326) that has a pump rotor rod (329), two pump vanes (334a and 334b), and a vane spring, shown in detailed Figure 18G.

[0166] The detail in Figure 18H shows that the end of the pump rotor rod (329) is formed with two sets of chamfers of different lengths. One set of two parallel chamfers extends to a pump impeller drive flange (332) and the other set of two parallel chamfers extends deeper into a pump impeller shaft flange (330). The two sets of chamfers together produce a drive end of the pump impeller (333) with a square-shaped cross-section that fits into the ratchet drive rod insertion hole to drive the ratchet drive (see Fig. 18E and Fig. 21N). The deeper set of parallel chamfers produces a pump rotor rod drive (331) that is used to drive the cable winch in conjunction with the pump rotor drive end (333) (see Fig. 24E).

[0167] Detailed Figure 18I shows an embodiment of a check valve (339) that allows water to flow only in the direction of the indicated arrow.

[0168] Detailed Figure 18J shows an exploded view of the check valve from a different angle to show its components. The check valve is composed of a check valve body (340) that is made of a rigid material and a rubber check valve (345) that is made of a flexible material. The check valve rubber (345) has a flat surface and a check valve rubber lance (346) that terminates in a cone that allows the check valve rubber (345) to be secured to the check valve body (340). The check valve body (340) is hollow to allow water to flow in its center and has a check valve seal ring (344) on the outer perimeter to seal it against the walls of the cavity where it is installed. A check valve bracket (342) forms an "X" at the bottom of the check valve body (340), yielding one edge of the check valve body (341). A check valve bracket (343) insertion hole into which the check valve rubber lance (346) is inserted is located in the center of the check valve bracket (342). Once inserted, the rubber check valve lance (346) engages, holding the rubber check valve (345) in place.

[0169] The detail in Figure 18E shows an exploded view of a set of propellers and the components used to drive the propellers. A left helix (349) (or a right helix) serves as spokes of an external gear (351). A propeller center (352) with a square propeller insertion hole (353) in the middle allows the propeller to be mounted on a propeller shaft (354). The propeller shaft (354) has a smaller axis of the propeller shaft (358) with a diameter smaller than the square shaft insertion hole (353), a propeller shaft drive (356) with the cross section of a square the same size as the square rod insertion hole (353) to drive the propeller, a larger shaft of the propeller rod (357) with a larger diameter than the square rod insertion hole (353), so that when the propeller shaft (354) is inserted into the square propeller insertion hole (353), the center of the propeller (352) stops at the edge of the long axis of the propeller shaft (357). The propeller shaft terminates in a propeller shaft nut (355) in the form of a square larger in size than the long axis of the propeller shaft (357). A propeller shaft lock wrench (359) in the form of an R-clamp is used to lock the propeller shaft (354) in its installation location.

[0170] Two identical ratchet units (360a and 360b) with a ratchet rod insertion hole (361) in the center and ratchet drive teeth (362) in the front, placed facing each other, are used to activate the propeller rod (354). A ratchet spring (363) presses the two ratchet units (360a and 360b) together, ensuring that the asymmetrical ratchet drive teeth (362) remain engaged when the ratchet unit (360a) rotates clockwise. transmitting movement from the ratchet unit (360a) to the ratchet unit (360b) and to the propeller shaft nut (355) which is mounted on the ratchet unit (360b).

[0171] The detail in Figure 18F shows the rear propeller shaft support (221) which has four rear propeller shaft holes (222) and the rear propeller shaft support (223) which has four propeller shaft holes front (224) used to install the propeller assembly. A propeller shaft (354) (with the propeller not pulled out for ease of viewing) is shown in its installation position locked in place by the propeller shaft nut (355) and the propeller shaft lock wrench (359). The rotor shaft support (225) with a rotor shaft hole (226) that provides support for the pump rotor is placed in line with a front propeller shaft hole (224). The two ratchet units and ratchet spring fit into the space between the front propeller rod bracket (223) and the rotor rod bracket (225).

[0172] The detail of Figure 18G shows that the pump rotor assembly is composed of the pump rotor (326) which has a pump rotor rod (327) and a pump rotor rod (329) located on the pump shaft. symmetry so that the pump rotor can rotate around them. The pump impeller has two pump vane inserts (328a and 328b). Into each of these reeds, a reed (334) is inserted. Each pump vane has a rounded pump vane edge (335) and a pump vane spring notch (336) that holds a pump vane spring (337) in place so that it can press both pump vanes against the walls of the cavity where the pump impeller assembly is inserted.

[0173] Figure 19 shows a partial view of the reactor node with the pump cover removed and a cutout in the node core (215) to display the water pump parts in place: the pump impeller assembly and the of propellers. The propeller set consists of four sets of propellers, two equipped with the left propeller (349a and 349b) and two equipped with the right propeller (350a and 350b). The propellers engage through the external gears, so all propellers rotate or remain stationary. Two configurations are possible: configuration 01 or direct flow with the propellers installed in the indicated position; and configuration 02 or reverse flow with the position of the left and right propellers swapped. Because the pump impeller assembly in the water pump always rotates clockwise, in setting 01 the impellers push water away from the pump impeller assembly, while in setting 02 the impellers push water in the opposite direction toward the assembly. of the pump rotor.

[0174] The detail in Figure 19E shows the pump impeller assembly in place. The pump rotor fits within a portion of the water pump cavity (231) in a rotor cavity (233) that has a circular shape with the axis offset from the pump rotor axis so that the pump rotor pump (326) touches one side of the impeller cavity (233) between the pump supply pipe (208) and the pump exhaust pipe (209). The two pump vanes (334a and 334b) forced by the vane spring extend toward the walls of the impeller cavity (233), creating separate compartments in a standard liquid vane pump configuration. The pump supply tube (208) injects high pressure water into the impeller cavity, producing a force on the pump vane (334a), forcing the pump impeller (326) to rotate around the pump impeller shaft (327 ) clockwise. As the pump impeller rotates, water between the pump vane (334b) and the pump exhaust pipe opening (209) is forced out through the pump exhaust pipe (209) to the pump vane (334b) passes through the opening of the pump supply tube (208) and the cycle is repeated producing a continuous clockwise rotation of the pump impeller, as long as high pressure water is fed through the pump supply tube (208 ). Water flowing in the pump exhaust pipe (209) passes through a check valve (339) that prevents water from the water body that contains algal cells that can stick together in groups from moving into the pump cavity. rotor when the water pump is off, avoiding a potential cause of interference. The exhaust water then continues through a pump exhaust front pipe (210) and a pump exhaust discharge pipe (211) to reach the interior of the room where it is discharged.

[0175] The detail in Figure 19F shows the positioning of the two ratchet drives (360a and 360b) located in the space between the front propeller shaft support (223) and the rotor shaft support (225). A cutout is made in the rotor shaft bracket (225) to show the ratchet spring (363) in position located around the pump rotor shaft (329) and compressed between the driving edge of the pump rotor (332). and the ratchet unit (360a). A second cutout is made in a section of the ratchet unit (360a) to show the teeth of the ratchet unit (362) on the ratchet unit (360b) that are attached to a driving propeller shaft, in the case of configuration 01 illustrated. , a left helix (349). The pump rotor shaft drive (331) causes the pump rotor shaft (329) to have a circular shape at half its perimeter, while still allowing stable rotation of the pump rotor shaft in the rotor shaft hole located on the rotor shaft support (225).

[0176] Figure 20 shows the pump cover (315) which is used to seal the water pump cavity and the impeller cavity and to provide support for the pump impeller. The pump cover (315) has a pump cover connecting cavity (317) that has an internal pump cover sealing ring (318) to seal the impeller cavity. A pump cover shaft hole (316) of the proper size to insert the pump rotor shaft is located at the correct point to support the pump rotor and allow it to rotate about its axis of symmetry when the pump cover is removed. pump (315) is secured in place in the node core. The pump cover (315) also has an external pump cover connection (320) that has a pump cover key (321) with rounded edges of the pump cover key (322a) and (322b) to accommodate a ring outer seal (319) of the pump cover that seals the water pump cavity or the cable winch cavity, depending on where the pump cover is installed. The pump cover key (321) ensures that the pump cover (315) can only be inserted in the proper installation orientation. The pump cover has four pump cover fasteners (323), each with a fixing hole (253) in the middle to allow the pump cover to be secured to the node core. A cut in the pump cover exhaust pipe (324) creates the pump exhaust front pipe opening that allows exhaust water to flow through the check valve and into the pump exhaust discharge pipe.

[0177] Figure 21 shows a partially exploded view of the reactor node to illustrate the various components of the air release assembly. The flag assembly and module assembly are not shown for clarity and to allow a view of the interior of the module housing (248) and the propeller assembly assembly (347) in the installed position.

[0178] Within the module compartment (248), the node core main control port (189), a left node core auxiliary control port (191), and a right node core auxiliary control port ( 192), which together route all signal and control tubes from the node core to the module assembly, can be seen. The air release housing (249) cut into the top of the node core (215) contains a set of four air release cuts (271A, 271B, 271C, and 271D), one for each respective tube port that are openings. half the width of the length tube port that reaches all the way into the water body, so that air, oxygen or any gas that is released from the culture water solution can be captured and channeled to a air release (270) to be extracted. The air release compartment (249) is covered by a lower air release cover (258) that has two long air release channels (268A and 268D) for tube ports A and D, respectively, and two air release shorts (267B) to tube ports B and (267C) (indicated only in detail in Figure 21G) to tube port C. Each long and short channel terminates with an air release passage (269A, 269B, 269C) (indicated only in detail in Figure 21G) and (269D) which connects the respective channel to the air release chamber (270). Four check valves (339A, 339B, 339C, and 339D) are installed in the lower air release cover (258) (see Figures 21G and 21H) to prevent air from flowing back to the air release cutout and then to the corresponding tube port. Without check valves, wave movement in the ocean, producing temporary low pressure in the culture water within a tube port, can cause air to be sucked out of the air release chamber (270). The lower air release cover (258) has a flag fitting cutout (266) to allow the flag to reach its lowered position.

[0179] The lower air release cover (258) is covered by an upper left air release cover (259) and an upper right air release cover (260) that seal the long air release channels and the short air release channels in the lower air release cover (258). The upper left air release cover (259) has a left air release fitting (264) that allows the connection of a hose to extract air and/or oxygen from the air release chamber (270). The upper right air release cover (260) has a right air release fitting (265) that allows the connection of a hose to extract air and/or oxygen from the air release chamber (270).

[0180] The detail of Figure 21E shows that the node core main control port, the node core auxiliary control port on the left, and the node core auxiliary control port on the right are made of large connector inputs identical (383a, 383b etc.). The main control port of the node core is made of 24 large connector inputs identical to the large connector input (383a) placed in a row. The left node core auxiliary control port and the right node core auxiliary control port are each composed of 4 large connector inputs identical to the large connector input (383b), placed in a second parallel row with the same spacing between the large connector ports. The left node core auxiliary control port and the right node core auxiliary control port are placed symmetrically with respect to the symmetry axis of the module enclosure, skipping the positions at the two ends of the node core main control port (the large connector inlet (383b) is placed in front of the large connector inlet (383a)).

[0181] The detail in Figure 21F shows that the upper right air release cover has a series of fixing holes, such as (253a, 253b, 253c, etc.), so that it can be attached to the lower air outlet cover and to the base of the air outlet top cover (261) which has the check valve cavity (338) where the check valve (339e) is installed. The base of the air outlet top cover (261) has two fasteners (254a and 254b), each with a clip insertion hole (R 255a and 255b), respectively, where the R clips are inserted to secure a air outlet top cover (262) which has two corresponding fixing holes (253d and 253e) so that when it is attached to the base of the air release top cover (261), the air release top cover (262) holds the check valve (339) in place. The top air release cover (262) has an air release opening (263) that allows air to escape to the outside environment. The check valve (339e) prevents air or water from the external environment from entering the reactor node.

[0182] The detail of Figure 21G shows a portion of the lower air release cover. The short air release passage (267C) begins in the check valve cavity (338C) where the check valve (339C) is installed and ends at the air release passage (269C) for tube port C. A air vent valve (272) with three air vent valve sealing rings (273a, 273b, and 273c) and an air vent valve opening (274) is installed in an air vent valve cavity ( 275). The air vent valve cavity (275) is connected to an open air vent cutout (277) and a closed air vent cutout (278) at its ends and has an air vent release cutout ( 276) in its center. When pressurized water is injected into the air vent opening cutout (277) while the air vent closing cutout (278) has low pressure water, the air vent valve (272) is pushed toward the end of the air vent valve (275) cavity connected to the air vent closure cutout (278) and the air vent valve (274) opening aligns with the air vent release cutout (276) , allowing air to escape into the environment.

[0183] The lower air release cover has fastening holes such as (253a, 253b, 253c), which allow it to be attached to the air release housing, and fasteners such as (254a, 254b, etc.), each with a clip insertion hole (R 255a, 255b etc.) respectively where R clips are inserted to secure the upper right air release cover.

[0184] The detail of Figure 21H shows a portion of the lower air release cover where the long air release channel (268D) for port D of the tube is located. The long air release channel (268D) starts in the check valve cavity (338D) where the check valve (339D) is installed. A fixing hole (253) that allows the lower air release cover to be attached to the air release housing and a fastener (254) with a clip insertion hole (R 255) where an R clip is inserted to secure The upper right air release cover can also be seen.

[0185] The detail of Figure 21I shows the air release cutout (271B) where a float (280B) with a float seal ring (281) is in place in the sunken position. Air within the air release cutout (271B) causes the float (280B) to sink and the float seal ring (281) to lose contact with the bottom of the air release bottom cover installed above the access opening to the check valve cavity and the short air release channel.

[0186] The detail of Figure 21J shows one of a set of fasteners (254) that allows the lower air release cover to be attached to seal the air release compartment. The air release cutout (271C) terminates in a float cavity (279C), where a float (280C) with a float seal ring (281) is installed on top.

[0187] The detail in Figure 21K shows a fastener (254) that allows the lower air release cover to be attached to seal the air release compartment. The air vent release cutout (276) connected to the air release chamber (270) is made so that air reaches the middle of the air vent valve cavity situated in the lower air release cover above. The air vent open notch (277) and the air vent closing notch (278) are made to allow water to reach both ends of the air vent valve cavity situated in the lower air release cover above , so that the air vent valve can be moved as needed.

[0188] The detail in Figure 21L shows a set of fasteners (254) that allow the lower air release cover to be attached to seal the air release compartment and the air release cutout (271A) with the float (280A ) in place in the raised position. Water inside the air release cutout (271A) causes the float (280A) to rise until the float seal ring (281) is pressed against the bottom of the air release bottom cover installed above the air release closure. access to the check valve cavity and long air release channel.

[0189] The detail of Figure 21M shows a set of fastening elements (254) that allow the lower air release cover to be attached to seal the air release compartment and the air release cutout (271D) that ends in a float cavity (279D), where a float ()280D with a float seal ring (281) on top is installed.

[0190] The detail in Figure 21N shows a cutout in the rotor rod support (225) and the two ratchet drives (360a and 360b), so that the pump rotor rod (329) and the pump rod nut propeller (355) can be seen. The ratchet spring (363) inserted into the drive end of the pump rotor (333) compressed between the drive edge of the pump rotor (332) and the ratchet unit (360a) pushes the ratchet unit (360a) toward to the ratchet unit (360b) which is retained by the front propeller shaft bracket (223), causing the ratchet drive teeth (362) to be pressed together. A drive gap (364) separates the drive end of the pump rotor (333) and the propeller shaft nut (355), allowing them to rotate at different speeds in the event that the pump rotor shaft (329) to and/or the propeller inserted into the propeller shaft is driven by the external gear (351) at a different speed. The drive of the pump rotor rod (331) causes the pump rotor rod (329) to have a circular shape at half its perimeter, still allowing stable rotation of the pump rotor rod in the rotor rod hole located on the rotor rod support (225).

[0191] Figure 22 shows the reactor node (214) drawn in ghost lines to show the water body (365), the four tube ports A, B, C and D and the four water body channels (366A , 366B, 366C and 366D), so that the path of culture water and air extraction can be clearly seen. The culture water enters the reactor node at a pipe port and descends through the corresponding water body channel to the lowest level where the propeller assembly assembly (347) is located. Air (oxygen) passing through a tube port escapes through the corresponding air release cutout (271A, 271B, 271C and 271D) reaching the air release chamber (270). The pump cover (315) and pump impeller assembly (325) are shown for reference.

[0192] The detail in Figure 22E shows the components of the air release system in more detail. Air bubbles present in the water body (365) eventually pass through the air release cutout (271D) reaching the float cavity (279D) where the float (280D) is installed. As long as there is air in the float cavity (279D), the float (280D) sinks, opening access to the check valve (339D). Air passes through the check valve (339D) and continues into the long air release channel (268D) until the air release passage (269D) reaches the air release chamber (270). The right air release fitting (265) connected to the air release chamber (270) by the air release passage (269D) allows air to be extracted through a hose. Likewise, air bubbles collected in the air release cutout (271C) reach the float cavity (279C) where the float (280C) is installed. As long as there is air in the float cavity (279C), the float (280C) sinks, opening access to the check valve (339C). Air escapes through the check valve (339C) and continues into the short air release channel (267C) until the air release passage (269C) reaches the air release chamber (270). As air escapes, the water level rises within the air release cutout (271C) and float cavity (279C), causing the float (280C) to rise until it seals access to the check valve (339C ) and the short air release channel (267C), preventing water from flowing into the air release chamber (270).

[0193] The air accumulated in the air release chamber (270) can be vented by moving the air vent valve (272) so that the air vent release notch (276) is unobstructed, opening access to the check valve (339e) which allows air to escape into the environment, but prevents water and air from the environment from entering and reaching the air release chamber (270). The air vent valve (272) is controlled by an air release opening tube (202) and an air release closing tube (203). If pressurized water is injected into the air release opening tube (202) at the same time as the air release closing tube (203) has low pressure water, the air vent valve (272) moves in toward the air release shutoff tube (203), opening access to the check valve (339e). If, on the other hand, pressurized water is injected into the air release shutoff tube (203) at the same time that the open air release tube (202) has low pressure water, the air vent valve (202) 272) will move towards the open air release tube (202) (as drawn) closing the access to check valve (339e).

[0194] The construction of the wet reactor air release piping is such that ports B and C, as well as ports A and D, are mirror images of each other. A single detailed view from one side is therefore sufficient to illustrate the construction. For greater magnification and better visualization, Figure 22E shows structures in pipe openings C and D only because this has the added benefit of allowing ventilation components to be shown in the same drawing.

[0195] Figure 23 shows a partially exploded view of the reactor node with the components of the anchoring system displaced from the node core (215). The module assembly (369) is also shifted to show it in assembled configuration from a different angle than in Figure 18.

[0196] The anchor assembly (282) is fixed to the anchor cable (287) which has two limiters (290a and 290b). The anchor cable rotates around the cable winch (292) which is installed in the cable winch cavity (227) and holds the anchor cable taut between the anchor assembly and the reactor node. The pump cover (315b) seals the winch rotor cavity (232), provides support, and holds the pump rotor assembly (325) in place within the winch rotor cavity (232). To reduce the number of unique parts required, save costs and increase maintenance efficiency, the pump cover (315b) used in the anchoring system and the pump cover (315a) used in the water pump system (drawn in the installed position ) are identical. When the pump rotor assembly is in place, the rod end of the pump rotor (329) is fitted into the cable winch drive hole (296) (see Figure 23F).

[0197] The detail in Figure 23E shows the end of the pump rotor shaft (329) which has two sets of chamfers of different lengths. One set of two parallel chamfers extends to the pump impeller drive flange (332) and the other set of two parallel chamfers extends deeper into the pump impeller shaft flange (330). The two sets of chamfers together produce the drive end of the pump impeller (333) with a square shaped cross section that fits into the ratchet drive shaft insertion hole to drive the ratchet drive on the water pump. The deeper set of parallel chamfers produces the pump rotor shaft drive (331) which is used to drive the cable winch in conjunction with the pump rotor drive end (333) which penetrates deeper into the cable winch until it reaches its fitting position. The pump rotor shaft flange (330) locks against the face of the cable winch (295) (see Figure 23F) and the pump rotor drive flange (332) locks against a mating surface inside the cable winch. By this arrangement, the pump rotor simultaneously drives and holds the cable winch in place, allowing only rotational movement of the cable winch that rotates attached to the pump rotor assembly.

[0198] The detail in Figure 23F shows the cable winch (292), the anchor cable (287) and the limiter (290a). The cable winch (292) is in the shape of a tapered pulley with two flat circular cable winch faces (295) with a cable winch drive hole (296) in the center. The cable winch (292) has a series of cable winch teeth (293) made into the tapered surfaces of the pulley so that the cable winch teeth (293) engage the anchor cable with greater pressure and grip when the anchor cable (287) approaches the axis of the winch cable (292). The limiter (290a) with a stopper hole (291a) in the center is fixed to the free end of the anchor cable (287) by means of two knots (289a and 289b).

[0199] The detail of Figure 23G shows how the limiter (290b) with a limiter hole (291b) in the center is fixed to a point on the anchor cable (287), passing the anchor cable (287) through the anchor hole (287) limiter (291b) and making two knots (289c and 289d), one on each side of the limiter (290b).

[0200] Figure 24 shows the reactor node with a cutout in the node core (215) to show the anchoring system components in place. The open dive control tube (207) and a closed dive control tube (206) control the movement of the pump rotor assembly (325) that holds the cable winch (292) in place. The pump cover (315) holds the pump rotor assembly (325) in place and provides support for the pump rotor assembly (325) to rotate. Limiters (290a and 290b) keep the anchor cable (287s) holding knot core (215) attached to the anchor assembly (282).

[0201] The detail of Figure 24E shows the cable winch (292) in place, within the cable winch cavity (227). The pump rotor rod (329) seats in the cable winch (292) and the edge of the pump rotor rod (330) engages the face of the cable winch (295) holding the cable winch (292) in place against a wall of the cable winch cavity (228). The cable winch (292) is supported and rotates about the axis provided by a cable winch shaft (294) which fits into a suitable notch in the node core and pump impeller shaft (329). The anchor cable (287) rotates around the cable winch (292) and terminates in a limiter (290a) which is held in place by two knots (289a and 289b). Because the stops (290a and 290b) are larger than the cable winch cavity (227), the anchor cable (287) is held in place. When the cable winch (292) rotates, the teeth of the cable winch (293) grip the anchor cable (287) moving it up or down according to the direction of rotation.

[0202] The detail of Figure 24F shows the reactor node with the pump cover removed to show in detail the water pump cavity (231) and the rotor cavity (233). Within the rotor cavity (233), a rotor rod insertion hole (229) is cut allowing insertion of the pump rotor rod. Within the water pump cavity (231), a water pump check valve cavity (230) allows insertion of a check valve. When the pump cover is installed, it holds the check valve in place within the water pump check valve cavity (230) and the pump cover exhaust pipe cutout (324) (see Figure 20) connects the water pump check valve cavity (230) and the pump exhaust discharge tube (211).

[0203] Figure 25 shows an exploded view of an execution mode of a module assembly. The module assembly contains all components necessary to process hydraulic and pneumatic inputs originating from other reactor nodes or collected from inside or outside the reactor node where the module assembly is installed. The module assembly generates the control signals necessary to implement appropriate actions at the reactor node in which the module assembly is installed and the signals that are transmitted to other reactor nodes. No electrical components are used in the module assembly and no electrical power is required for normal operation of the module assembly. Avoid electricity and only use mechanical, hydraulic and/or pneumatic components and circuits made from low-cost materials, such as plastic resins, rubbers, stainless steel springs, etc. Suitable for the ocean environment, they reduce operating and capital costs and increase system reliability.

[0204] The module assembly is composed of a module box (370) that has an internal module net volume (373). The module box (370) functions as a base, providing support and connectivity to fit a logical unit assembly (432), an I/O unit assembly (403), and an expansion unit assembly (388) that also works as a lid that closes the module box (370).

[0205] The module case (370) has a module edge (371) with a series of fasteners (254) and fixing holes (253a). The expansion unit assembly (388) has an expansion box lip (390) that has a series of mounting holes (253b, 253c, etc.). which align with a fastener (254) or a fixing hole (253a) located on the edge of the module (371) of the module case (370). When the expansion unit assembly (388) is placed on top of the module canister (370), some fastening holes on the expansion unit assembly align with a fastener on the module canister, such as (253b and 254), respectively. The R-clamps are inserted into the R-clamp insertion holes on the top of these fasteners to secure the expansion unit assembly (388) and module case (370) together. Other mounting holes on the expansion unit assembly align with a mounting hole on the module canister, such as (253c and 253a), respectively. These two fastener holes in the module assembly are placed so that they align with a fastener in the node core that is correspondingly longer so that it extends through the two fastener holes. R-clamps are inserted into the R-clamp insertion holes on top of these longer fasteners to secure the module assembly to the node core while also providing additional grip to secure the expansion unit assembly and the expansion unit canister. module.

[0206] To maximize the net volume of the module (373), the module case (370) has a shape adjustment of the module case (372) that allows the module case to use all available space in the module compartment in the node core without interfering with the CO2 cavity body. An external opening of the module (375) aligned with the external opening of the node core allows access to the external environment to sense external water pressure. A basic module tube connector (378) allows access to the water body initially to the logical unit assembly (432) and then through other connections to the I/O unit assembly (403) and the logic unit assembly (403). expansion unit (388) (see Figure 26). A module control top connector (380) allows the I/O unit assembly (403) to connect to all sensor tubes and control tubes entering and leaving the node core through the module case (370 ) (see Figure 26).

[0207] The logical unit assembly (432) is composed of a logical layer assembly (443) that contains all components and interconnections that allow the components in the logical unit assembly (432) to perform their intended functions and a housing logic (433) that provides interconnection to other units and support for the logic layer assembly (443). The logic layer assembly (443) is inserted into a rear opening of the logic box (435) in the logic box (433). Once inside, the logic box (433) holds all of the components of the logic layer assembly (443) together, allowing them to function as expected and be easily manipulated. Two logic box puller holes (436) are used to assist in the process of installing and removing the logic unit assembly (432) in the module box (370). A group of logic box top connections (437) provide connections to the I/O unit assembly (403) (see Figure 26).

[0208] The I/O unit assembly (403) is comprised of an I/O layer assembly (418) that contains all of the components and the interconnections that enable the components in the I/O unit assembly ( 403) perform their intended functions and an I/O box (404) that provides interconnection with other units and support for the I/O layer assembly (418). The I/O unit assembly (403) is inserted into a rear opening of the I/O box (406) in the I/O box (404). Once inside, the I/O box (404) holds all of the components of the I/O layer assembly (418) together, allowing them to function as intended and be easily manipulated. Two I/O box puller holes (408) are used to assist in the process of installing and removing the I/O unit assembly (403) into the module box (370). A shape adjustment of the I/O box (407) allows the I/O box (404) to fit into the module box (370). A shape adjustment of the I/O box (407) allows the I/O box (404) to fit into the module box (370).

[0209] The expansion unit assembly (388) is composed of an expansion layer (400) and an expansion box (389) that provides interconnection to other units and support for the expansion layer (400). The expansion box (389) has an expansion box flag cutout (399) to accommodate the flag when it is in its lowered position and two expansion box handles (393) that provide a good grip for handling by maintenance personnel. maintenance. A group of expansion box top connections (395) provide external connections to other reactor nodes, maintenance tools, and an interface to a diagnostic device. A rear opening of the expansion box (392) allows the expansion layer (400) to be inserted into the expansion box (389). Since it was possible to implement all the functions necessary for the operation of the reactor node using only the I/O unit assembly (403) and the logical unit assembly (432), the expansion layer (400) is made of just one thick sheet of material in the appropriate shape to fit snugly into the expansion box (389) and with a layer of expansion through the cutout (402) that allows signals from the upper connections of the expansion box (395) to pass through the expansion box assembly (395). expansion unit (388), reach the bottom connections of the expansion box and are available to the I/O unit assembly (403) (see Figure 26). In the event that future expansions replace the expansion layer (400) with a set of expansion layers with a set of components that perform additional functions, the expansion layer connections through the cutout (402) need to be preserved to prevent alteration or loss. of functionality in the I/O unit assembly (403).

[0210] The module enclosure (370), expansion enclosure (389), I/O enclosure (404), and logic enclosure (433) are designed to provide support and interconnection to the various signals traveling to all different parts and in principle do not need to be changed unless a major change requires new connections to be established. All components and the interconnections that enable the components to perform their intended functions are enclosed in the active inserts (the logical layer assembly (443), the I/O layer assembly (418), and eventually a new insert replacing the expansion layer (400), if new features are implemented in the future). If an update or correction of a design error is required, this will likely only require changes to active insertions, affecting a reduced set of components. Because these parts are much smaller than the rest of the reactor node and many changes, such as fixing a bug, will likely only require changes to a small area of the affected active insert, the cost and time required to implement changes or updates is reduced. increasing system flexibility.

[0211] The detail of Figure 25E shows that the expansion box (389) has an expansion box edge (390) with a series of fixing holes (253). Also visible in detail, Figure 25E is a part of the expansion box top connections. A diagnostic port (161), comprising 22 diagnostic fittings arranged in an 11x2 matrix, each identical to the diagnostic fitting (162), and a left signal port (163) comprising 12 identical hose fittings, where hoses with Corresponding accessories are connected to carry pressurized water, pressurized air, pressurized CO2, and pressurized water-borne signals in and out of the module assembly. The left signal port (163) is composed of: (U) left air replenishment, (W) left water replenishment (178), (k) clock input (179), (gnd) base (180) , (z) zero input (181), (V) submerge output (182), (m) master/slave input (183), (R) reset output (184), (q) query input (185) , (H) help output (186), (s) status input (187) and (L) left CO2 replenishment (188). Whenever possible, a single lowercase or uppercase letter of the signal name is used to identify each signal. These cards are later used to facilitate the description of the implemented logical functions. A lowercase letter indicates an input signal and an uppercase letter indicates an output signal, with the exception of (W), (U), and (L) which are bidirectional. The capital letter for these three aforementioned signals is used to differentiate the signals in the right (lowercase) signal port from the signals in the left (uppercase) signal port.

[0212] The right signal port (164) is shown and all its signals indicated in detail in Figure 5G. The description of the left signal port and the right signal port has been divided into two drawings to allow the drawings to be made at higher magnification with clearer details and to show the module assembly in a position installed on the node core with R-clamps in place in detail Figure 5G and in an exploded position so that the case rim and fastener holes can be seen in detail; Figure 25E.

[0213] The detail of Figure 25F shows an I/O box pullout hole (408) and the rear opening of the I/O box (406), where the I/O layer assembly is inserted into the E box /S (404). Also visible in detail in Figure 25F is a portion of the I/O box top connections that shows an I/O box diagnostic connector (410) made up of a set of 22 small connector inputs, each identical to the input connector (386) arranged in an 11x2 matrix directly below and in the same pattern as the diagnostic accessories on the diagnostic port (see detail Figure 25E). Another portion of the I/O cabinet's top connections shows that a set of 12 large connector inputs, each identical to the large connector input (383a) (only a few of them visible in detail in Figure 25F) are placed directly below and at the top of the I/O cabinet. same pattern as the hose fitting on the left signal port (see Figure 25 and detail Figure 25E). The same occurs on the other side of the I/O cabinet, where another set of 12 identical large connector ports is placed directly below and in the same pattern as the hose fittings on the signal port on the right (see Figure 25 and detail in Figure 5G). An I/O box expansion connector (411) is comprised of a set of seven large connector inputs, each identical to the large connector input (383b) placed in the same range as the large connector inputs for the I/O box expansion connector (383b). left signal and the right signal port in a straight line perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the I/O box (404) through the center of the large connector input (383a) and the center of the large connector input (383b) which occupies the central position of the I/O box expansion connector (411) placed on the symmetry axis of the I/O box (404).

[0214] The I/O box expansion connector (411) is intended to make high pressure water, ground pressure water, and an external pressure signal with sufficient water volume (power) available at a convenient point to supply the expansion unit assembly. These power signals will likely be needed in the event of future expansion in the expansion unit assembly and are provided at this time to avoid the need to modify the I/O box later. However, they are not currently required so all I/O box expansion connector connections are closed to the expansion unit by the expansion layer.

[0215] The detail of Figure 25G shows the logic box (433), a logic box extractor hole (436) and a portion of the logic box's upper connections. A logic box signal connector (438) is comprised of a set of 33 small connector inserts, each identical to the small connector insert (384c) and each having a small connector seal ring identical to the small seal ring of connector (385c) arranged in an 11x3 matrix. A logic box right control connector (441) is comprised of a set of 11 small connector inserts, each identical to the small connector insert (384b) and each with a small seal ring identical to the small seal ring on the logic box. connector (385b). 10 small connector inserts are placed in a straight line and the last one is placed in front of the small connector insert (384b) at the 9th position with the same spacing as between other small connector inserts. The small connector inserts (384b, 384c, etc.) are used to exchange information signals between the logical unit assembly and the I/O unit assembly. Because information signals do not need to drive large components, the diameter of tubes and connectors can be reduced to save space, material and energy costs. A logic box power connector (439) is comprised of a set of 7 large connector inserts, each identical to the large connector insert (381) and each with a large connector seal ring identical to the large connector seal ring of connector (382) placed in a straight line with the center of the large insertion of the connector (381) which occupies the central position placed on the axis of symmetry of the logic box (433).

[0216] The detail of Figure 25H shows a portion of the module's upper control connector (380) that is comprised of 32 identical large connector inserts (381a, 381b, etc.) each with an identical large connector sealing ring ( 382a, 382b etc.), 24 large connector inserts (381a) are placed in a row and the remaining 8 large connector inserts (381b) are placed in a second parallel row in two separate groups of 4 large connector inserts with the Even spacing between large connector inserts. The two groups of 4 large connector inserts are placed symmetrically with respect to the symmetry axis of the module case, skipping positions at the two ends of the row with 24 large connector inserts (the large connector insert (381b) is placed in front of the large insertion element (381a)).

[0217] The detail of Figure 25I shows a section of the module flange (371) of the module box showing a fastener (254) that is used to secure the expansion box to the module box and a fixing hole (253) that is used in conjunction with a fixing hole in the same position in the expansion case to secure the module assembly to the node core. Detail Figure 25I also shows the base pressure tube connector of the module (378) which is made of 4 identical large connector inserts (381a, 381b, etc.), each with a large connector seal ring identical to the ring. large connector seal (382) placed in a line on the axis of symmetry of the module case with 3 large connector inserts grouped together with the large connector insert (381b) in the middle and a large connector insert (381a) isolated on the right .

[0218] Figure 26 shows an exploded view of an embodiment of the module assembly viewed from below to show additional details. The module assembly is comprised of a module box (370) that serves as a base, providing support, connectivity, and space for fitting the logical unit assembly (432), the I/O unit assembly (403), and the of the expansion unit (388) which also functions as a cover that closes the module box (370). Once properly assembled, the expansion canister flange (390) rests on the module flange (371), allowing the expansion unit assembly (388) to be secured to the module canister (370) using R-clamps.

[0219] Adjusting the shape of the module case (372) allows the module case (370) to fit within the module compartment in the node core without interfering with the CO2 cavity body. The module housing (370) has a propeller access port (374) connection with a propeller access port sealing ring (376) that closes the propeller access opening when the module assembly is installed in the housing. of the node core module. A module base tube port (377) connected to the module base tube connector on the other side of the module case allows access to the body of water through the module case initially to the logic unit assembly (432) and then then through other connections to the I/O unit assembly (403) and expansion unit assembly (388) (see Figure 25). A lower module control connector (379) connected to the upper module control connector on the other side of the module case allows the I/O unit assembly (403) to connect to all sensor tubes and control tubes that enter and leave the node core through the module case )370) (see Figure 25).

[0220] The logical unit assembly (432) is composed of the logical layer assembly (443) which contains all of the components and interconnections that allow the components in the logical unit assembly (432) to perform their intended functions and the logic box (433) which provides interconnection to other units and support for the logic layer assembly (443). A front opening of the logic box (434) allows the logic layer assembly (443) to be easily removed from the logic box (433) by inserting a long rod or other suitable tool into the front opening of the logic box (434) to push the logic box assembly (434) logic layer (443) previously inserted out of the logic box (433). A lower logic box connector (442) of the appropriate shape and location to fit the module base tube connector on the top of the module box (370) allows access to the water body from the logic unit assembly (432) ( see Figure 25).

[0221] The I/O unit assembly (403) is composed of the I/O layer assembly (418) that contains all the components and the interconnections that allow the components in the I/O unit assembly (403 ) perform their intended functions and the I/O box (404) that provides interconnection with other units and support for the I/O layer assembly (418). A front opening of the I/O box (405) allows the I/O layer assembly (418) to be easily removed from the I/O box (404) by inserting a long rod or other suitable tool into the front opening of the I/O box (405). I/O box (405) to push the previously inserted I/O layer assembly (418) out of the I/O box (404). The shape fitting of the I/O box (407) allows the I/O box (404) to fit into the module box (370). A lower I/O box control connector (412) of the proper shape and location to fit the upper module control connector on the other side of the module box (370) allows the I/O unit assembly (403 ) connect to all sensor tubes and control tubes that enter and leave the node core through the module box (370) (see Figure 25). An I/O box logic connector (413) of the proper shape and location to fit into the logic box top connections on the other side of the logic box provides connections to the logic unit assembly (432) (see Figure 25).

[0222] The expansion unit assembly (388) is composed of the expansion layer (400) and the expansion box (389) that provides interconnection to other units and support for the expansion layer (400). A shape adjustment of the expansion box (394) allows the expansion box (389) to fit into the module box (370). A front opening of the expansion box (391) allows the expansion layer (400) to be easily removed from the expansion box (389) by inserting a long rod or other suitable tool into the front opening of the expansion box (391) to push the expansion layer (400) previously inserted out of the expansion box (389). A set of expansion box lower connections (396) of the proper shape and location to fit the I/O box upper connections on top of the I/O box 404 provides connections to the I/O unit assembly ( 403) (see Figure 25).

[0223] Since it was possible to implement all the functions necessary for the operation of the reactor node using only the I/O unit assembly (403) and the logical unit assembly (432), the expansion layer (400) is made of just one thick sheet of material. A shape-fitting cut of the expansion layer (401) is made in the expansion layer (400) to allow it to fit snugly into the expansion box (389). Cutting through the expansion layer (402) allows signals from the expansion box top connections at the top of the expansion box (389) (see Figure 25) to pass through the expansion layer (400) and be available to the I/O unit assembly (403) on the bottom connections of the expansion box (396). In the event that future expansions replace the expansion layer (400) with an expansion layer assembly with a set of components that perform additional functions, the expansion layer connections through the cutout (402) need to be preserved to prevent alteration or loss. of functionality in the I/O unit assembly (403).

[0224] The detail in Figure 26E shows a part of the expansion layer (400) and a part of the lower connections of the expansion box. An expansion box diagnostic connector (397), consisting of 22 small connector inserts arranged in an 11x2 matrix, each identical to the small connector insert (384) and each having a small connector o-ring identical to the o-ring The connector's small gasket (385) is placed directly below and in the same pattern as the diagnostic accessories on the diagnostic port (see detail in Figure 25E) and directly above and in the same pattern as the I/O box diagnostic connector ( see detail in Figure 25F). Since the I/O box and expansion box are installed inside the module box, each small connector insert on the expansion box diagnostic connector fits into the corresponding small connector slot on the module box diagnostic connector. I/O and small connector sealing ring where each small connector insert seals the connection, preventing leakage and signal interference.

[0225] Another portion of the expansion box bottom connections visible in detail in Figure 26E shows that a set of 12 large connector inserts, each identical to the large connector insert (381a) and each with a large connector seal ring (381a) connector identical to the large connector o-ring (382a) placed directly below and in the same pattern as the hose fittings on the right signal port and directly above and in the same pattern as the large connector inlet on the top of the I/O box ( see Figure 25 and detail in Figure 5G). The same occurs on the other side of the expansion box, where another set of 12 identical large connector inserts, each with a large connector o-ring, is placed directly below and in the same pattern as the hose fittings on the left signal port. and directly above and in the same pattern as the large connector inputs on the top of the I/O box (see Figure 25 and detail in Figure 25E).

[0226] An expansion box expansion connector (398) made from a set of seven large connector inserts, each identical to the large connector insert (381b) and each having a large connector sealing ring identical to the large connector seal insert (382b) placed in the same gap as the large connector inserts for left signal port and right signal port. The expansion box expansion connector (398) is placed in a straight line perpendicular to the symmetry axis of the expansion box (389) through the center of the large connector insert (381a) and with the center of the large connector insert (381b) which occupies the central position of the expansion box expansion connector (398) placed on the symmetry axis of the expansion box (389). Since the I/O box and expansion box are installed inside the module box, each large connector insert on the bottom of the expansion box fits into the corresponding large connector slot on the top of the I/O box. S and the large connector sealing ring where each large connector insert seals the connection, preventing leaks and signal interference.

[0227] The detail of Figure 26F shows the I/O box logical connector at the bottom of the I/O box (404) which is composed of an I/O box signal connector (414), a power connector from the I/O box (415), a logical left control connector from the I/O box (416), and a logical right control connector from the I/O box (417).

[0228] The I/O box signal connector (414) is a set of 33 small connector inputs, each identical to the small connector input (386c), arranged in an 11x3 matrix directly above and in the same pattern as the logic box signal connector (see detail in Figure 25G).

[0229] The I/O box logical left control connector (416) is a set of 10 small connector inputs, each identical to the small connector input (386a), placed in a single row directly above and on the same logic box left control connector pattern. The I/O box logical right control connector (417) is a set of 11 small connector inputs, each identical to the small connector input (386b). A set of 10 small connector ports are placed in a straight line and the last one is placed in front of the small connector port (386b) at the 9th position with the same spacing as between other small connector ports. The I/O logic box right control connector (417) is placed directly above and in the same pattern as the logic box right control connector (see detail in Figure 25G).

[0230] Once the logic box and I/O box are installed inside the module housing, each small connector insert on the top of the logic box fits into the corresponding small connector input on the bottom of the I/O box. /S and on the connector's small sealing ring where each small insertion of the connector seals the connection preventing leaks and signal interference.

[0231] The I/O box power connector (415) is made of seven identical large connector ports (382) arranged in a straight line perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the I/O box (404) with the center of the large connector input (383) that occupies the central position placed on the symmetry axis of the I/O box (404). The I/O box power connector (415) is placed directly above and in the same pattern as the logic box power connector. Since the logic box and I/O box are installed inside the module box, each large connector insert on the top of the logic box fits into the corresponding large connector slot on the bottom of the I/O cabinet and The O-ring connector on each large connector insert seals the connection, preventing leaks and signal interference.

[0232] The detail of Figure 26G shows a portion of the lower control connector of the I/O box (412) that is composed of 32 identical large connector inputs (383a, 383b, etc.) 24 large connector inputs (383a) are placed in one row and the remaining 8 large connector entries (383b) are placed in a second parallel row in two separate groups of 4 large connector entries with the same spacing between the large connector entries. The two groups of 4 large connector inputs are symmetrically positioned with respect to the symmetry axis of the I/O box, skipping positions at the two ends of the row of 24 large connector inputs (the large connector input (383b) is placed in front of the large connector inlet (383a)). The I/O box lower control connector (412) is placed directly above and in the same pattern as the module control upper connector on the top of the module box. Since the logic box and I/O box are installed inside the module box, each large module control top connector connector insert fits into the corresponding large connector slot on the bottom of the I/O box and the large connector sealing ring on each large connector insert seals the connection preventing leakage and signal interference.

[0233] The detail of Figure 26H shows the lower connector of the logic box (442) which is made of 4 large inputs of the identical connector (383a, 383b etc.) placed in a line on the axis of symmetry of the logic box with 3 large inputs of the connector grouped together with the large connector input (383b) in the middle and 1 isolated large connector input (383a) on the right. The logic box bottom connector (442) is placed directly above and in the same pattern as the module base tube connector on the top of the module box. Once the logic box is installed inside the module box, each large connector insert in the module base tube connector on the top of the module box fits into the corresponding large connector inlet on the bottom of the logic box and the Large connector sealing ring on each large connector insert seals the connection, preventing leaks and signal interference.

[0234] The detail of Figure 26I shows a portion of the module's lower control connector (379) that is made of 32 large identical connector inserts (381a, 381b, etc.) each with a large sealing ring (382a, 382b etc.) 24 large connector inserts (381a) are placed in one row and the remaining 8 large connector inserts (381b) are placed in a second parallel row, in two separate groups of 4 large connector inserts with the same spacing between the large connector inserts. The two groups of 4 large connector inserts are placed symmetrically with respect to the symmetry axis of the module case, skipping positions at both ends of the row with 24 large connector inserts (the large connector insert (381b) is placed in the front of large connector insert (381a). The lower module control connector (379) is placed directly above and in the same pattern as the set of large connector inserts for the node core main control port, the left node core auxiliary control port, and the right node core control port. node core auxiliary control at the bottom of the node core module bay. Once the module box is installed inside the module cage, each large connector insert on the bottom of the module box fits into the corresponding large connector inlet on the bottom of the module cage and the large connector sealing ring on each large connector insert seals the connection preventing leaks and signal interference (see Figure 21).

[0235] The detail of Figure 26J shows the module base tube port (377) which is made of 4 identical tube openings (387a, 387b etc.) placed in a line on the axis of symmetry of the module case with 3 grouped tube openings with the tube opening (387b) in the middle and 1 isolated tube opening (387a) on the right. The module base tube port (377) is placed directly below and in the same pattern as the module base tube connector on the top of the module case so that each tube opening provides an access channel to the module body. water passing through the module base tube connector to the logic unit assembly.

[0236] Figure 27 shows an exploded view of the first embodiment of the I/O unit assembly (403) that implements hydraulic and pneumatic circuits that condition and process input and output signals originating and terminating in the module assembly. An I/O layer a (419), an I/O layer b (420), and an I/O layer c (421) provide support and connectivity to a set of I/O components (423) and a I/O check valve assembly (422) in a similar manner to how a multilayer electrical circuit board provides support and connectivity to electrical components in an electrical circuit. The I/O components (423) are located and held in place between the I/O layer a (419) and I/O layer b (420) and the I/O check valve assembly (422 ) is located and held in place between the I/O layer b (420) and the I/O layer c (421).

[0237] I/O layer a (419), I/O layer b (420) and I/O layer c (421), I/O components (423) and check valve assembly I/O (422) constitute the I/O layer assembly that, once correctly assembled, is inserted into the I/O box (404). The result is a standard, compact I/O unit assembly (403) that is used in all module sets installed in reactor nodes that have all four tube ports enabled (connected to the tube elements). Pre-assembled and pre-tested units can be kept in stock as the main part for installation in a new module assembly on a streamlined production line and kept in reserve as spare parts to replace defective units detected in the field.

[0238] Also visible in Figure 27 is the front opening of the I/O box (405) which facilitates removal of the I/O layer assembly from the I/O box (404), two I/O box extractor holes /S (408a and 408b) that facilitate installation and removal of the I/O unit assembly into the module box and the I/O box top connections (409) that connect the I/O unit assembly to the assembly of the expansion unit.

[0239] Figure 28 shows an exploded view of the first execution mode of the logic unit assembly (432) that implements hydraulic circuits to process conditioned logic signals received from the I/O unit assembly, generating intermediate logic functions necessary to produce signals more complicated logic and produce logical output signals to send back to the I/O unit assembly. The I/O unit assembly uses these logic output signals to generate appropriate output signals to control the reactor node that contains the module assembly in which the logic unit assembly and the I/O unit assembly are installed. and transmit information to other reactor nodes.

[0240] A logical layer a (444), a logical layer b (445), a logical layer c (446), and a logical layer d (447) provide support and connectivity to a set of logical components (450) in a manner similar to how a multilayer electrical circuit board provides support and connectivity to electrical components in an electrical circuit. The logic components (450) are located and held in place between the logic layer a (444) and the logic layer b (445). A router card insertion compartment (448) on top of the logical layer c (446) allows insertion of a router card that functions as a configuration device. Eight different types of router cards are available, but only one can be inserted at a time into a given set of logical layers. To prevent the chosen router card from being placed incorrectly, two asymmetrically positioned router card insertion switches (449a and 449b) are located on the sides of the router card insertion compartment (448), allowing the selected router card fits only in the proper orientation. Router cards redirect tube port-related signals entering the logic unit assembly through the logic box left control connector (tube port A and tube port B) and the logic box right control connector (tube port port C and pipe port D) before being processed by other components in the logic layer assembly. In this way, individual signals belonging to one tube port can be redirected to corresponding positions of signals belonging to another tube port, according to the redirection plan of the installed router card (see Figures 77 and 78).

[0241] The available router cards are: 1) direct router card (451) which does not redirect signals and simply forwards signals from each tube port in the same position they entered; 2) rotator board AB (452) that exchanges tube port A signals with tube port B signals and forwards tube port C and tube port D signals; 3) CD router card (453) that forwards tube port A and tube port B and exchanges tube port C signals with tube port D signals; 4) ABCD router board (454) that exchanges signals from tube port A with signals from tube port B and signals from tube port C with signals from tube port D; 5) ADBC router board (455) that exchanges signals from tube port A with signals from tube port D and signals from port B with signals from tube port C; 6) DBCA router card (456) which redirects signals from tube port A to tube port D, from tube port D to tube port B, from tube port B to tube port C, and from tube port C to tube port A; 7) CBDA router board (457) which redirects signals from tube port A to tube port C, from tube port C to tube port B, from tube port B to tube port D, and from tube port D to tube port A; 8) ACBD router board (458) which exchanges signals from tube port A with tube port C and exchanges signals from tube port B with signals from tube port D.

[0242] The logical layer a (444), logical layer b (445), logical layer c (446), logical layer d (447), the logical components (450) and a router board constitute the logical layer assembly that , once correctly assembled, is inserted into the logic box (433) that provides support and connectivity for the logic layer assembly. The result is a compact logical unit assembly (432) that is used in all module sets installed in the reactor nodes. Also visible in Figure 28 is the front opening of the logic box (434) that facilitates removal of the logic layer assembly from the logic box (433), two logic box pullout holes (436a and 436b) that facilitate installation and removal of the assembly. of the logical unit in the module box and the upper logical box connections (437) that connect the logical unit assembly to the I/O unit assembly.

[0243] To describe the implementation and operation of components and other parts of the invention in a convenient and simple manner, the following notation is used:

[0244] A digital signal is encoded by one or more bits. A single-bit signal, when the fluid pressure (water, air, CO2, etc.) is above the proper limit, is represented by the number 1. A single-bit signal when the fluid pressure is below the proper limit is represented by the number 0. For signals with more than one bit, an appropriate combination of bits (1s and 0s) is used.

[0245] The following Boolean logic functions are used:

[0246] AND; denoted x A y, satisfies x A y = 1 if x = y = 1 and x A y = 0 otherwise

[0247] OR; denoted x v y, satisfies x v y = 0 if x = y = 0 and x v y = 1 otherwise.

[0248] NO; denoted x, satisfies x = 0 if x = 1 and x = 1 if x = 0.

[0249] EXCLUSIVE OR; denoted x y satisfies x y = 0 if x = y x y = 1 if x # y.

[0250] EQV (equivalence); denoted x = y satisfies x = y = 1 if x = y x = y = 0 if x # y.

[0251] Figure 29 shows an embodiment of components that are used in the I/O unit assembly to process input and output signals and perform other functions. Each component is installed in a cavity that is the appropriate length to allow the component to slide and the same width and thickness as the component to provide a tight fit. To allow a better visualization of the details of the components, these cavities are drawn in ghost lines. There are two types of components illustrated in Figure 29: controllers and actuators.

[0252] Controllers and actuators have similar shapes: a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with central extensions at both ends (longitudinally) that prevent the component body from turning off input signals when it is located in a on the sides of your cavity. A cylindrical spring hole is drilled around the axis of free-sliding symmetry of each component, starting at the center of a central extension to a depth sufficient to accommodate a spring of appropriate length for the specific component and leaving sufficient material on the other side of the component to ensure the structural integrity of the other core span and the component. Away from the component's axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to skip the spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the component, two symmetrical strips are available to be pierced at specific locations by openings of various shapes that allow the passage of fluids (liquids and/or gas). A rubber grille surrounds all openings and the main body of the component that isolates each opening so that fluid passing through each opening does not leak into other openings. The number, shape and location of openings and, as a result, the length and width of each component vary depending on its task and the number and type of functions implemented.

[0253] Actuators are components used to convert a low-power digital input signal (reduced water flow signal in a small pipe diameter) into one or more high-power digital output signals (larger water flows allowed by larger pipe diameters). larger tubes) that transmit information to other reactor nodes and control the reactor node in which the actuators are installed. Actuators can also be used as an additional component implementing logic functions necessary for the operation of the reactor node. Because actuators generate output signals based on digital input signals, all actuator openings (504a, 504b, 504c, 504d, 504e) on a specific component have the same shape and size.

[0254] Controllers are used to digitize an input signal into one or more Gray coded bits (only one bit can be changed at a time). A controller may also have additional functionality in conjunction with digitizing the input signal, such as a mechanism to regulate the pressure of the input signal as long as it remains within a specified range and to implement additional logic functions required for operation of the control node. reactor. Controller openings come in different shapes and sizes.

[0255] To improve the accuracy of digitizing the input signal, the length of the controller is increased as much as space in the I/O unit assembly allows. The length of the actuator, on the other hand, is as short as possible to accommodate the required number of actuator openings required to perform its function. As a result, a controller spring hole (490) is longer than an actuator spring hole (505) and a controller spring (491a, 491b, 491c, 491d) is longer than an actuator spring (506a, 491d) 506b, 506c, 506d, 506e).

[0256] The elastic coefficient of the controller springs is adjusted so that the controller slides in the cavity reaching the designed positions according to the pressure of its analog input signal. The elastic coefficient of the actuator springs is adjusted so that the actuators move to one or the other side of the cavity according to the status of the digital input signals.

[0257] The low-power digital input signals that drive the actuators can be delivered in tubes with a reduced cross-section compared to the signals that control the controllers. As a result, the actuator center extensions (503a, 503c, 503d, 503e) may be shorter than the controller center extensions (489a, 489b, 489c).

[0258] When an input signal pushes the component to the side of the cavity where the spring is located, the spring is compressed until the applied force produced by the input signal is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or the central extension touches the cavity wall and the spring are completely inserted into the spring hole, reaching their maximum compression. This position is called the active position and represented by the number 1.

[0259] When the force applied by the input signal pushing the component disappears, the spring extends out of the spring hole, pushing the component back to the other side until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or that the central extension on the other side touches the cavity wall and the spring reaches its maximum extension. This position is called the resting position and represented by the number 0.

[0260] An opening located on the opposite side of the input signal allows displaced fluid to flow in and out of the cavity when the installed component moves from side to side, eliminating positive and negative pressure increases that would impede movement of the component.

[0261] For situations where no spring is used, a set of two complementary input signals that feed the cavity where the component is installed is required: a main input signal on one side of the cavity and an auxiliary input signal that has the reverse polarity of the main input signal on the opposite side of the cavity. The active position (1) is defined as the position the component moves when the main input signal is high (1) and the inactive position (0) is defined as the position the component moves when the main input signal is high (1) and the inactive position (0) is defined as the position the component moves when the main input signal is high (1). main input is low (0). The active side is therefore the side of the cavity opposite the main input signal and the inactive side is the side of the cavity where the main input signal is located. For notation consistency, the input signal in spring applications and the main input signal in non-spring applications are equivalent. The main and auxiliary input signals may in some cases not be complementary and take the same value at times. The active side is still defined as the side of the cavity opposite the main input signal and the inactive side is the side of the cavity where the main input signal is located.

[0262] The notation xxx θ 0 or xxx θ 1, where xxx is the component reference number and 0 or 1 is the position of the component as described in the previous 4 paragraphs, is used to facilitate the description of the position of the various components in a draw.

[0263] Some components have been designed so that they can be installed in more than one orientation. A suitable symbol is used to differentiate alternative orientation from normal orientation. The notation ~ xxx θ 0 or ~ xxx θ 1 is used to indicate that the xxx component has been installed in a different orientation (inverted, inverted, rotated, or a combination thereof) which has the effect of introducing a NOT function into the input signal, so that the outputs produced are the same compared to a component installed in the normal orientation with the input signal inverted.

[0264] This notation is primarily used to describe the positions of components subject to digital signals, but can be extrapolated to analog signals, using a number between 0 and 1 to indicate the relative position of the component. The notation xxx θ 0.4 indicates that the xxx component is located at a position 40% of the length of its cavity.

[0265] Figure 29 shows the first embodiments of four types of controllers: a CO2 pressure controlling device (460); a water pressure controlling device (467); a basic pressure controlling device (477); a signal pressure controlling device (483).

[0266] The CO2 pressure controller device (460) is used to control the CO2 pressure within a section of the wet reactor and to produce a single-digit digital signal of the current CO2 pressure reading at the point being controlled . The CO2 pressure controlling device (460) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with the central extensions of the controller (489a and 489b) at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical spring controller hole (490) is drilled about the axis of symmetry starting at the center of a central controller extension (489b) at a depth sufficient to accommodate a controller spring (491a), leaving sufficient material in the central extension of the controller (489a) on the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central extension of the controller (489a) and the CO2 pressure control device (460). The CO2 pressure controller device (460) is installed within a cavity of the CO2 pressure controller (459) that is sized to allow a tight fit and transmits input and output signals to appropriate locations. A rubber grille of the CO2 pressure controller (461) surrounds all openings and the main body of the CO2 pressure controller device (460) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through one opening does not leak into other openings

[0267] When the CO2 pressure controller device (460) is pushed to the side of the CO2 pressure controller cavity (459) where the controller spring (491a) is located, the spring is compressed until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or that the central extension of the controller (489b) touches the cavity wall of the CO2 pressure controller (459) and the controller spring (491a) reaches its maximum compression by being completely inserted into the hole of the controller spring (490) (to avoid confusion and better display details on the CO2 pressure controller device (460), the portion of the controller spring (491a) located within the controller spring hole (490) is not drawn ). When the force pushing the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) disappears, the controller spring (491a) extends out of the controller spring hole (490) pushing the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) back. to the other side until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or the central extension of the controller (489a), on the other side, touch the cavity wall of the CO2 pressure controller (459) and the spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the controller spring hole (490) and maintain the structural integrity of the CO2 pressure control device (460), two symmetrical bands are pierced at specific locations by openings of various shapes, allowing the passage of fluids (liquids or gases, depending on the opening). The CO2 pressure controlling device (460) has four openings: 1) a CO2 pressure reset opening (462); 2) a CO2 pressure control port (463); 3) a bit less significant low CO2 pressure opening; 4) a less significant bit opening of high CO2 pressure (465).

[0268] The water pressure controlling device (467) is used to control the water pressure within a section of the wet reactor and to produce a two-digit Gray coded digital signal of the current water pressure reading at the point that is being controlled. The water pressure controlling device (467) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with central extensions of the controller at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical controller spring hole is made about the axis of symmetry to accommodate a controller spring (491b) (for clarity, the portion of the controller spring (491b) located within the controller spring hole is drawn in lines dashed lines), leaving enough material on the central controller extension (489c) on the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central controller extension (489c) and the water pressure controlling device (467). The water pressure controller device (467) is installed within a cavity of the water pressure controller (466) that is sized to allow a tight fit and transmits input and output signals to appropriate locations. A rubber grid of the water pressure controller (468) surrounds all openings and the main body of the water pressure controlling device (467) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through one opening does not leak into other openings.

[0269] When the water pressure controller device (467) is pushed to the side of the water pressure controller cavity (466), where the controller spring (491b) is located, the spring is compressed until the force applied is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or that the central extension of the controller touches the wall of the water pressure controller cavity (466) and the controller spring (491b) reaches its maximum compression while being completely inserted into the spring hole of the controller. When the force pushing the water pressure controller device (467) decreases, the controller spring (491b) extends out of the controller spring hole, pushing the water pressure controller device (467) back toward the other side until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or until the central extension of the controller (489c) on the other side touches the cavity wall of the water pressure controller (466) and the spring reaches its maximum extension . Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the controller spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the water pressure controller device (467), two symmetrical bands are pierced at specific locations by openings of various shapes, allowing the passage of fluids. The water pressure controlling device (467) has seven openings: 1) a water pressure reset opening (469); 2) a water pressure control opening (470); 3) a least significant high water pressure bit opening (471); 4) a least significant low water pressure bit opening 1 (472); 5) a least significant low water pressure bit opening 2 (473); 6) a more significant low water pressure bit opening (474); 7) a more significant high water pressure bit opening (475).

[0270] The base pressure controller device (477) is used to control the base water pressure within each reactor node and produce a single-digit digital signal of the current reading of the base water pressure at the point being controlled. . The basic pressure controlling device (477) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with central extensions of the controller at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical controller spring hole is drilled around the axis of symmetry to accommodate a controller spring (491c), leaving sufficient material in the central controller extension on the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central controller extension and the controller device basic pressure (477). The basic pressure controller device (477) is installed within a cavity of the basic pressure controller (476) that is sized to allow a tight fit and transmits input and output signals to appropriate locations. A rubber grid of the base pressure controller (478) surrounds all openings and the main body of the base pressure controller device (477) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through one opening does not leak into other openings.

[0271] When the basic pressure controller device (477) is pushed to the side of the cavity of the basic pressure controller (476), where the controller spring (491c) is located, the spring is compressed until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or that the central extension of the controller that the wall of the basic pressure controller cavity (476) and the spring reaches its maximum compression while being completely inserted within the spring hole of the controller. When the force pushing the base pressure controlling device (477) decreases, the controller spring (491c) extends out of the controller spring hole, pushing the base pressure controlling device (477) back to the other side until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or until the central extension of the controller on the other side touches the wall of the base pressure controller cavity (476) and the spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to bypass the controller spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the basic pressure controller device (477), two symmetrical bands are pierced at specific locations by openings of various shapes, allowing passage of fluids. The base pressure controlling device (477) has three openings: 1) a base pressure control opening (479); 2) a basic pressure high least significant bit opening (480); 3) a least significant low base pressure bit opening (481).

[0272] The signal pressure controller device (483) is used to produce a two-digit Gray coded digital signal for each individual input signal. The signal pressure controller device (483) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with central extensions of the controller at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical controller spring hole is drilled around the axis of symmetry to accommodate a controller spring (491d), leaving sufficient material in the central controller extension on the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central controller extension and the controller device signal pressure (483). The signal pressure controller device (483) is installed within a cavity of the signal pressure controller (482) that is sized to allow for a tight fit and transmits input and output signals to appropriate locations. A rubber grid of the signal pressure controller (484) surrounds all openings and the main body of the signal pressure controlling device (483) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through one opening does not leak into other openings.

[0273] When the signal pressure controller device (483) is pushed to the side of the signal pressure controller cavity (482) where the controller spring (491d) is located, the spring is compressed until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or that the central extension of the controller touches the cavity wall of the signal pressure controller (482) and the spring reaches its maximum compression being completely located within the spring hole of the controller. When the force pushing the signal pressure controller device (483) decreases, the controller spring (491d) extends out of the controller spring hole, pushing the signal pressure controller device (483) back toward the other side until the applied force is balanced by the force provided by the compressed spring or until the central extension of the controller on the other side touches the cavity wall of the signal pressure controller (482) and the spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the controller spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the signal pressure controller device (483), two symmetrical bands are pierced at specific locations by openings of various shapes, allowing the passage of fluids. The signal pressure controlling device (483) has four ports: 1) a high least significant bit signal pressure port (485); 2) a low least significant bit signal pressure opening (486); 3) a low most significant bit signal pressure opening (487); 4) a more significant bit high signal pressure opening (488).

[0274] Figure 29 shows the first modalities of two types of actuators: single and double. A single actuator has actuator openings (504a, 504b, 504c, and 504d) arranged in two lines perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the actuator spring hole, while the double actuator (500) has actuator openings (504e) arranged in three lines perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the actuator spring hole. The actuator openings are arranged so that the center positions of the cavity where the actuator is installed (one row for single actuators and two rows for dual actuators) align with the actuator opening or are completely covered by an actuator section with no opening of the actuator when the actuator moves to position 0 or 1, causing the actuator spring (if installed) to be fully extended or fully compressed, respectively. Appropriately shaped rubber grilles surround all openings and the main body of the actuators is single and the actuators double insulate each opening so that fluid passing through one opening does not leak into other openings.

[0275] Individual actuators are divided into three types depending on where the actuator openings are located: 1) normally open mono actuator (493) which has the actuator opening (504c) located in the same line on the side of the actuator hole actuator spring (505); 2) mono normally closed actuator (495) which has the actuator opening (504d) located on the same line, on the opposite side of the actuator spring hole; 3) mono actuator (497a) (and mono actuator (497b)) having the actuator opening (504a) (and the actuator opening (504b)) located in alternating positions in two rows, an actuator opening on the side of the hole of the actuator spring and an actuator opening on the alternate opposite side of the actuator spring hole. The mono actuator (497a) and the mono actuator (497b) are, in fact, identical components, the difference is that one was placed in its cavity in one orientation and the other was placed inverted with respect to the axis of symmetry around the hole actuator spring.

[0276] The normally open mono actuator (493) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with the central extensions of the actuator (503c) at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical actuator spring hole (505) is drilled about the axis of symmetry starting at the center of a central actuator extension (503c) deep enough to accommodate the actuator spring (506c), leaving sufficient material in the central actuator extension (503c) actuator on the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central actuator extension and the normally open mono actuator (493). The normally open mono actuator (493) is installed within a mono actuator cavity (492c) that is sized to allow a tight fit and transmits the input and output signals to the appropriate locations. A rubber grille of the normally open actuator (494) surrounds all actuator openings and the main body of the mono normally open actuator (493), isolating each actuator opening so that fluid passing through an actuator opening does not leak into the other actuator openings.

[0277] When the normally open mono actuator (493) is pushed to the side of the mono actuator cavity (492c) where the actuator spring (506c) is located, the actuator spring is compressed until the central extension of the actuator (503c) touches the cavity wall of the mono actuator (492c) and the spring reaches its maximum compression and is completely inserted into the actuator spring hole. When the force pushing the normally open mono actuator (493) decreases, the actuator spring (506c) extends out of the actuator spring hole pushing the normally open mono actuator (493) back to the other side until the central extension of the actuator on the other side touches the wall of the mono actuator cavity (492c) and the actuator spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the actuator spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the normally open mono actuator (493), two actuator openings (504c) are located on the same line, on the side of the actuator spring hole. actuator spring (505), such that when the normally open mono actuator (493) is located in the position indicated in Figure 29 with the actuator spring (506c) at full extension (inactive position), both actuator openings (504c ) align with the center of the actuator mono cavity (492c).

[0278] The normally closed monoactuator (495) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with the central extensions of the actuator (503d) at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical actuator spring hole is drilled about the axis of symmetry starting at the center of one central actuator extension deep enough to accommodate the actuator spring (506d), leaving sufficient material in the central actuator extension (503d) on the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central actuator extension (503d) and the normally closed mono actuator (495). The normally closed mono actuator 495 is installed within a mono actuator cavity (492d) that has adequate dimensions to permit a tight fit and transmits input and output signals to appropriate locations. A normally open mono actuator (496) rubber grille surrounds all actuator openings and the normally closed mono actuator main body (495), isolating each actuator opening so that fluid passing through an actuator opening does not leak. to the other actuator openings.

[0279] When the normally closed mono actuator (495) is pushed to the side of the mono actuator cavity (492d) where the actuator spring (506d) is located, the actuator spring is compressed until the center extension of the actuator touches the wall of the mono actuator cavity (492d) and the spring reaches its maximum compression while being completely inserted inside the actuator spring hole. When the force pushing the normally closed mono actuator 495 decreases, the actuator spring (506d) extends out of the actuator spring hole pushing the normally closed mono actuator (495) back to the other side to the center extension of the actuator (503d) on the other side touches the wall of the actuator mono cavity (492d) and the spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the actuator spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the normally closed mono actuator (495), two actuator openings (504d) are located in the same line on the opposite side of the hole of the actuator spring, so that when the normally closed monoactuator (495) is located in the position indicated in Figure 29 with the actuator spring (506d) at maximum compression (active position), both actuator openings (504d) open align with the center of the mono actuator cavity (492d). For additional information, the actuator spring portion (506d) within the actuator spring hole is drawn in dashed lines.

[0280] The mono actuator (497a) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with the central extensions of the actuator (503a) at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical actuator spring hole is drilled about the axis of symmetry starting at the center of one central actuator extension deep enough to accommodate the actuator spring (506a), leaving sufficient material in the central actuator extension (503a) of the other side to ensure the structural integrity of the central actuator extension (503a) and mono actuator (497a). The mono actuator (497a) is installed within a mono actuator cavity (492a) that is adequately sized to allow for a tight fit and to transmit input and output signals to the appropriate locations. A rubber grille of the mono actuator (498a) surrounds all actuator openings and the main body of the mono actuator (497a) isolating each actuator opening so that fluid passing through one actuator opening does not leak into the other openings of the actuator. actuator.

[0281] When the mono actuator (497a) is pushed to the side of the mono actuator cavity (492a) where the actuator spring (506a) is located, the actuator spring is compressed until the center extension of the actuator touches the mono actuator cavity wall (492a) and the spring reaches its maximum compression being completely inserted into the actuator spring hole. When the force pushing the mono actuator (497a) decreases, the actuator spring (506a) extends out of the actuator spring hole pushing the mono actuator (497a) back to the other side until the actuator center extension (503a) on the other side touches the cavity wall (492a) of the actuator and the spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the actuator spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the mono actuator (497a), two actuator openings (504a) are located in alternating positions in two rows, one actuator opening on the side of the actuator spring hole and an actuator opening on the alternate opposite side of the actuator spring hole so that when the mono actuator (497a) is located in the position indicated in Figure 29 with the actuator spring (506a) At maximum extension (rest position), an actuator opening aligns with the center of the mono actuator cavity (492a). When the mono actuator (497a) is located on the other side of the cavity from the mono actuator (492a) with the actuator spring (506a) at maximum compression (active position), the other actuator opening (504a) aligns with the center of the cavity of the mono actuator (492a).

[0282] The mono actuator (497b) is the same component as the mono actuator (497a), the only difference is that the mono actuator (497b) was installed inverted with respect to the axis of symmetry around the actuator spring hole, so that when the actuator spring (506b) is at maximum extension (rest position), the actuator opening (504b) aligns with the center of the mono actuator cavity (492b) while the actuator opening (504a) aligns to the center of the mono actuator cavity (492a) when the actuator spring (506a) is at maximum compression (active position). For additional information, the portion of the actuator spring (506b) within the actuator spring hole is drawn in dashed lines.

[0283] This asymmetry provides additional flexibility to the mono actuator which can be installed in one orientation to produce an output power signal that is a function of the input signal or be installed in the inverted orientation to produce an output power signal that is a function of the input signal. is a function of the negated input signal (an additional NO function can be implemented by rotating the mono actuator with respect to the axis of symmetry around the actuator spring hole).

[0284] The dual actuator (500) is made in the shape of a parallelogram with material removed from the corners, producing a symmetrical shape with the central extensions of the actuator (503e) at both ends (longitudinally). A cylindrical actuator spring hole is drilled about the axis of symmetry, starting at the center of a central actuator extension deep enough to accommodate an actuator spring (506e). To reduce the number of unique components and achieve consistent response to input signals to the actuators, the same actuator spring is used for both single and dual actuators. Because actuator springs are designed to fit inside single actuators that are shorter, the actuator spring hole leaves an additional dual actuator spring guard (502) on the other side of the dual actuator (500) that provides additional structural integrity to the central actuator extension (503e) and the dual actuator (500). The dual actuator (500) is installed within a dual actuator cavity (499) that is sized to allow a tight fit and transmits input and output signals to appropriate locations. A double actuator rubber grille (501) surrounds all actuator openings and the main body of the dual actuator (500) isolating each actuator opening so that fluid passing through one actuator opening does not leak into other openings of the actuator.

[0285] When the dual actuator (500) is pushed to the side of the dual actuator cavity (499) where the actuator spring (506e) is located, the actuator spring is compressed until the central extension of the actuator touches the wall of the double cavity of the actuator (499) and the spring reaches its maximum compression by being completely inserted into the actuator spring hole. When the force pushing the dual actuator (500) decreases, the actuator spring (506e) extends out of the actuator spring hole pushing the dual actuator (500) back to the other side until the actuator center extension (503e) on the other side touches the wall of the double actuator cavity (499) and the spring reaches its maximum extension. Away from the axis of symmetry, at a safe distance to clear the actuator spring hole and maintain the structural integrity of the dual actuator (500), three alternative actuator openings (504e) are located in three lines perpendicular to the axis of symmetry, one next to the actuator spring hole, one on the opposite side of the actuator spring hole, and one in the middle of the dual actuator (500) on the alternate side, so that when the dual actuator (500) is located in the position indicated in Figure 29 with the actuator spring (506e) at full extension (inactive position) the two actuator openings in the center of the dual actuator cavity (499) are in a certain pattern and when the dual actuator (500) is located on the other side of the double actuator cavity (499) with the actuator spring (506e) in maximum compression (active position) the pattern of the actuator openings is reversed.

[0286] Like the mono actuator, dual actuators can be installed in one orientation to produce an output power signal that is a function of the input signal or be installed in the inverted orientation to produce an output power signal which is a function of the negated input signal.

[0287] The position and orientation of the actuators in Figure 29 can be easily indicated using the notation:

[0288] 493 x 0; 495 ± 1; 497a θ 0; ~ 497b θ 0; 500 x 0.

[0289] Figure 30 shows the various input and output connections required in the component cavities for proper operation of the controllers and actuators. Many alternative arrangements are possible, depending on available space and other design considerations. The connections in Figure 30 are provided as a reference of possible configurations that implement a viable working component cavity where a suitable controller or actuator can be installed. To facilitate visualization of the various connections, the components are not drawn in Figure 30.

[0290] A reference pressure tube (507) connects the ends of the cavities containing controllers to a common reference pressure signal. A CO2 pressure input 1 (508) and a CO2 pressure input 2 (509) are two possible locations for a CO2 pressure input signal to be injected into the opposite side of the CO2 pressure controller cavity (459). relative to the reference pressure tube (507). Up or down orientations for the CO2 pressure inlet tube are more convenient to save space in the layout, but any alternative orientation and location of the inlet tube that delivers the inlet signal flows over the edge of the cavity, preferentially arriving at one corner of the cavity is acceptable. More than one tube can be used, as long as they are both interconnected at some point and therefore have the same signal (same pressure).

[0291] A CO2 pressure regulation input (511) provides pressurized CO2 in a circuit that is always on (unless a fault causes the CO2 supply to be turned off). A CO2 pressure reset input (510) supplies pressurized CO2 in a separate circuit that can be turned on or off independently of the CO2 pressure regulation input (511) if the reset signal is active or inactive, respectively. Openings in the CO2 pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow or prevent CO2 from passing through the CO2 pressure controller device and reaching the other side of the CO2 pressure controller cavity ( 459), where CO2 is collected at a CO2 pressure supply outlet (512) and routed to the delivery point at the reactor node.

[0292] A low least significant bit CO2 pressure input (513) provides a low pressure water signal (0) to generate the CO2 pressure lsb (least significant bit). A low least significant bit CO2 pressure input (514) provides a high water pressure signal (1) to generate the least significant bit CO2 pressure. Openings in the CO2 pressure controller device (not shown in Fig. 30 or see Figure 32) allow the least significant bit CO2 pressure input signal low (513) or the least significant bit CO2 pressure input signal high pressure (514) pass through the CO2 pressure controller device and reach the other side of the CO2 pressure controller cavity, where the CO2 is collected at a least significant bit CO2 pressure output (515), generating a digital signal of a bit for the CO2 pressure at the specific point where the CO2 pressure input signal was captured.

[0293] A water pressure input 1 (516) and a water pressure input 2 (517) are two possible locations for a water pressure input signal to be injected into the opposite side of the water pressure controller cavity (466) relative to the reference pressure tube (507). Up or down orientations for the water pressure inlet pipe are more convenient to save space in the layout, but any alternative orientation and location of the inlet pipe that delivers the input signal flows to the edge of the cavity, preferentially arriving to one of the corners of the cavity is acceptable. More than one tube can be used, as long as they are both interconnected at some point and therefore have the same signal (same pressure).

[0294] A water pressure regulation inlet (519) provides pressurized water in a circuit that is always on (unless a fault causes the water supply to be turned off). A water pressure reset input (518) provides pressurized water in a separate circuit that can be turned on or off independently of the water pressure regulation input (519) if the reset signal is active or inactive, respectively. Openings in the water pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow or prevent water from passing through the water pressure controller device and reaching the other side of the water pressure controller cavity ( 466), where water is collected at a water pressure supply outlet (520) and routed to the delivery point at the reactor node.

[0295] A low bit water pressure input (522) and a low bit water pressure input (523) provide a low water pressure signal (0) to generate bit water pressure. least significant bit and the water pressure msb (most significant bit), respectively. A high water pressure input least significant bit (521) and a high water pressure input most significant bit (524) provide a high pressure water signal (1) to generate the water pressure least significant bit and the water pressure most significant bit, respectively. Openings in the water pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow the low least significant bit water pressure input signal (522) or the high least significant bit water pressure input signal. (521) passes through the water pressure controller device and reaches another side of the water pressure controller cavity (466), where water is collected in a less significant bit water pressure outlet (525). Other openings in the water pressure controlling device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow the low pressure msb water signal (523) or the high pressure 5b msb water signal to pass through the control device of water pressure and reaches the other side of the water pressure controller cavity (466), where water is collected at a water pressure msb outlet (526). The water pressure output least significant bit (525) and the water pressure output most significant bit (526) together encode the water pressure at the specific point where the water pressure input signal was captured to a digital signal 2-bit encoded Gray code.

[0296] A base pressure inlet (527) is injected into the opposite side of the base pressure controller cavity (476) relative to the reference pressure tube (507). Up or down orientations for the ground pressure inlet pipe are more convenient to save space in the layout, but any alternative orientation and location of the inlet pipe that delivers the input signal flows over the edge of the cavity, preferably reaching one of the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. More than one tube can be used, as long as they are both interconnected at some point and therefore have the same signal (same pressure).

[0297] A basic pressure regulation input (528) provides pressurized water in a circuit that is always on (unless a fault causes the water supply to be turned off). An opening in the base pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allows or prevents water from passing through the base pressure controller device and reaching the other side of the base pressure controller cavity (476), where water is collected at a base pressure supply outlet (529) and routed to the delivery point at the reactor node.

[0298] A low least significant bit base pressure input (531) provides a low water pressure signal (0) to generate the pressure at the least significant bit base. A high least significant bit basic pressure input (530) provides a high water pressure signal (1) to generate the least significant bit basic. Openings in the base pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow the water signal low least significant bit base pressure input (531) or high least significant bit base pressure input (530) to pass through through the base pressure controller device and reaches the other side of the base pressure controller cavity (476), where water is collected at a least significant bit base pressure outlet (532), generating a one-bit digital signal for the pressure base pressure at the specific point where the base pressure input signal was obtained.

[0299] A signal pressure inlet (533) is injected into the opposite side of the signal pressure controller cavity (482) relative to the reference pressure tube (507). Up or down orientations for the signal pressure input tube are more convenient to save space in the layout, but any alternative orientation and location of the input tube that delivers the input signal flows over the edge of the cavity, preferentially arriving at one of the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. More than one tube can be used, as long as they are both interconnected at some point and therefore have the same signal (same pressure).

[0300] A low least significant bit signal pressure input (535) and a low most significant bit signal pressure input (536) provide a low pressure water signal (0) to generate the least significant bit signal and the most significant bit sign, respectively. A high least significant bit signal pressure input (534) and a high most significant bit signal pressure input (537) provide a high water pressure signal (1) to generate the least significant bit signal and the high water pressure signal (1). most significant bit, respectively. Openings in the signal pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow the low least significant bit signal pressure input water signal (535) or the least significant bit pressure signal input high pressure (534) passes through the signal pressure controller device and reaches another side of the signal pressure controller cavity (482), where water is collected in a least significant bit signal pressure outlet (538). Other openings in the signal pressure controller device (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) allow the low most significant bit signal pressure input water signal (536) or most significant bit signal pressure input high (537) passes through the signal pressure controller device and reaches the other side of the signal pressure controller cavity (482) where water is collected in a more significant bit signal pressure outlet (539). The least significant bit signal pressure output (538) and the most significant bit signal pressure output (539) together encode the specific input signal into a 2-bit Gray coded digital signal.

[0301] A mono 1 lower actuator from input 1 (540), a mono 1 lower actuator from input 2 (541), a mono 1 upper actuator from input 1 (542), a mono 1 upper actuator from input 2 (543) and a mono actuator 1 top of input 3 (544) are some of the possible locations for inputs connected to the bottom and top of the mono actuator cavity (492c). Any orientation and location of the input tubes that emit the input signals flush to the edge of the cavity, preferably reaching the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. At least one input must be connected on each side of the cavity for the actuator to function correctly. In the example represented in Figure 30, for simplicity, only one input is shown on the left side of the mono actuator cavity (492c): Mono actuator 1 upper input 3 (544) which transmits the signal that commands the normally open mono actuator installed (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32). At least one of the four inputs (540, 541, 542, 543) shown on the other side must be implemented. Assuming for simplicity that the mono input 1 top input 1 actuator (542) must be connected to the base ((542) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as is the case in the example in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal supplied at the top of mono input 1 of actuator 3 (544) ((542) = -(544)) if no actuator spring is installed (in other possible use of the actuator).

[0302] A mono actuator 1 source 1 (545) and a mono actuator 1 source 2 (546) located in the upper center of the mono actuator cavity (492c) provide two input power signals to the actuator. Two independent lines in the lower center of the cavity, an output 1 of mono actuator 1 (547) and an output 2 of mono actuator 1 (548) can be simultaneously connected to the respective input power signal at the top or closed, depending on the position of the normally open mono actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32). At any time, the outputs (547 and 548) will be connected to a water or CO2 source and will have a significant logic value (high or low) or disconnected and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state), depending on the position of the mono actuator. normally open in the cavity (see Figure 32).

[0303] A top input 1 of mono actuator 2 (549) and a side input 1 of mono actuator 2 (550) are a possible combination of two inputs to the mono actuator cavity (492d), an input connected to the side and a inlet connected to the top of the cavity. Any orientation and location of the input tubes that emit the input signals flowing to the edge of the cavity, preferably reaching the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. At least one input must be connected to each side of the mono actuator cavity (492d) for proper actuator operation. In the example depicted in Figure 30, side input 1 of mono actuator 2 (550) carries the signal that commands the installed normally closed mono actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) and top input 1 of mono actuator 2 (549) is connected to the base ((549) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as is the case in the example in Figure 32) or to the opposite polarity of the signal supplied at side input 1 of mono actuator 2 (550) ((549) = -(550)) if the actuator spring is not installed (in a possible other use of the actuator).

[0304] A mono actuator 2 source 1 (551) and a mono actuator 2 source 2 (552) located in the upper center of the mono actuator cavity (492d) provide two input power signals to the actuator. Two independent lines in the lower center of the cavity, an output 1 of mono actuator 2 (553) and an output 2 of mono actuator 2 (554) can be simultaneously connected to the respective input power signal at the top or closed, depending on the position normally closed mono actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32). At any time, the outputs (553 and 554) will be connected to a water or CO2 source and will have a significant logic value (high or low) or disconnected and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state), depending on the position of the mono actuator. normally closed in the cavity (see Figure 32).

[0305] A side input 1 of mono actuator 3 (555), a side input 2 of mono actuator 3 (556), a side input 3 of mono actuator 3 (557) and a side input 4 of mono actuator 3 (558) are some of the possible locations for mono actuator cavity inlets (492b) connected to the sides of the cavity. Any orientation and location of the input tubes that emit the input signals flowing to the edge of the cavity, preferably reaching the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. Layout or design constraints may require that one or more inlets be positioned offset from the edges of the cavity, as is the case with side inlet 2 of mono actuator 3 (556) which is located slightly offset from the edge of the cavity. At least one input must be connected on each side of the cavity for the actuator to function correctly. In the example in Figure 30, side input 4 of mono actuator 3 (558) transmits the signal that controls the installed mono actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) and at least one of the three inputs on the other side (555 , 556, 557) must be implemented. Assuming, for simplicity, that it is side input 3 of mono actuator 3 (557); it must be connected to the base ((557) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as is the case in the example in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal provided at side input 4 of mono actuator 3 (558) ( (557) = -(558)) if no actuator spring is installed (in other possible use of the actuator).

[0306] A mono actuator 3 source 1 (559) and a mono actuator 3 source 2 (560) located in the upper center of the mono actuator cavity (492b) provide two input power signals to the actuator. Two independent lines in the lower center of the cavity, an output 1 of mono actuator 3 (561) and an output 2 of mono actuator 3 (562) can be alternately connected to the respective input power signal at the top or closed depending on the position of the mono actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32).

[0307] A mono actuator 4 top input 1 (563) and mono actuator 4 top input 2 (564) are a possible viable combination of inputs connected to the top of the mono actuator cavity (492a). Any orientation and location of the input tubes that emit the input signals flowing to the edge of the cavity, preferably reaching the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. At least one input must be connected on each side of the mono actuator cavity (492a) for correct actuator operation. In the example in Figure 30, the upper input 2 of the mono actuator 4 (564) transmits the signal that controls the installed mono actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) and the upper input 1 of the mono actuator 4 (563) is connected to the base ((563) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as in the example in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal supplied at the top input 2 of the mono actuator (564) ((563) = -( 564)) if no actuator spring is installed (in a possible other use of the actuator).

[0308] A mono actuator 4 source 1 (565) and a mono actuator 4 source 2 (566) located in the upper center of the mono actuator cavity (492a) provide two input power signals to the actuator. A single mono actuator 4 (567) output 1 located at the bottom center of the cavity combines the two mono actuator 4 (565) source 1 and mono actuator 4 (566) source 2 inputs producing a single power output that is a logical function of the upper input 2 of the mono actuator 4 (564), source 1 of the mono actuator 4 (565) and a source 2 of the mono actuator 4 (566).

[0309] A dual actuator top inlet 1 (568) and dual actuator top inlet 2 (569) are a possible viable combination of inlets connected to the top of the dual actuator cavity (499). Any orientation and location of the input tubes that emit the input signals flowing to the edge of the cavity, preferably reaching the corners of the cavity, is acceptable. At least one input must be connected to each side of the dual actuator cavity (499) for proper dual actuator operation. In the example of Figure 30, the upper input 2 of the dual actuator (569) carries the signal that controls the installed dual actuator (not shown in Figure 30, see Figure 32) and the upper input 1 of the dual actuator (568) is connected to the base ((568) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as in the example in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal provided at the top input 2 of the dual actuator (569) ((568) = -(569) ) if no actuator spring is installed (other use of the actuator is possible).

[0310] A double actuator top source 1 (570), a double actuator top source 2 (571), a double actuator top source 3 (572) and a double actuator top source 4 (573), located in the top of the dual actuator cavity (499), provide four input power signals to the actuator. A dual actuator output 1 (574) located at the bottom of the cavity combines two inputs above: and a dual actuator top source 2 (571) and a dual actuator output 2 (575) located at the bottom of the cavity combine the others two inputs above: the double actuator top source 3 (572) and the double actuator top source 4 (573).

[0311] Figure 31 shows an implementation of a high pressure supply plan (576) that is used to connect all inlets that need to be connected to a high pressure water source (1), such as the pressure inlet of CO2 least significant bit high (514), source 2 actuator mono2 (552), etc. and an implementation of a base plane (577) that is used to connect all inputs that need to be connected to a common low pressure (0) base manifold, such as a low least significant bit CO2 pressure input (513), mono actuator source 2 3 (560) etc. These plans create larger conduits that equalize water pressure and prevent bottlenecks that can cause pressure variations and undesirable logical instability. Because the components that activate and deactivate inputs to outputs will have variable positions during normal operation, not all inputs will be connected at any given time, creating a statistical average load on the high pressure supply plane and base plane. A clearance cut (578) can be used at selected points to maintain minimum clearances and ensure the structural integrity of the parts. In this example, the clearance cut (578) ensures that the material separating the base plane (577) and the signal pressure inlet (533) is capable of withstanding the water pressure difference, including a safety margin and not break or crack when subjected to a worse condition during normal operation or a failure.

[0312] Figure 32 shows a top view of the controllers and actuators with the input and output connections to clarify the interaction between the components and the connections and operation of these components. Figure 32 is further referred to in the operation section.

[0313] Figure 33 shows the first modalities of components used to implement logical functions.

[0314] An OR gate (579) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded gate edges (580). The OR gate (579) has a set of two OR gate sealing rings (581a and 581b) and an OR gate rod (582) attached to the center of one of the faces. The OR gate (579) is a device that allows two input signals to drive another gate installed in the cavity in which the OR gate is installed (see Figure 35 and Figure 36).

[0315] An AND port (583) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded port edges of the port with the same cross-section as the OR port (579), but longer in the axial direction to accommodate two sections of the E port (585). Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, hole 1 through port E (586) connects the front and back faces. In the second section, a hole 2 through port E (587) connects the top and bottom faces and a side hole from port E (588) connects the front face to hole 2 through port E (587). The top and bottom faces remain closed in the first section and the back face remains closed in the second section. A rubber grille of the E port (584) surrounds all orifices and the main body of the E port (583) isolating each orifice and each face so that fluid passing through one orifice does not leak into other orifices.

[0316] An SEL port (589) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded port edges having the same cross section as the OR port (579) and the E port (583), but longer in the axial direction to accommodate three sections of the SEL port (591). Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, a hole 1 through the SEL port (592) connects the front and back faces and a hole 1 on the side of the SEL port (595) connects the bottom face to the hole 1 through the SEL port (592). In the second section, a hole 2 through the SEL port (594) connects the top and bottom faces and a side hole of the SEL port (595) connects the front face to hole 2 through the SEL port (594). The third section repeats the same arrangement of connections as the first section. The top face remains closed in the first and third sections and the back face remains closed in the second section. A rubber grille of the SEL port (590) surrounds all holes and the main body of the SEL port (589), isolating each hole and each face so that fluid passing through one hole does not leak into other holes.

[0317] An EXCLUSIVE OR gate (596) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded gate edges having the same cross section as the OR gate (579), the AND gate (583) and the SEL gate (589) , but longer in the axial direction to accommodate four OUEXCLUSIVE door sections (598). Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, a hole 1 through the EXCLUSIVE OU port (599) connects the front and back faces. In the second section, a hole 2 through the EXCLUSIVEOR port (600) connects the top and bottom faces and a side hole 2 of the EXCLUSIVEOR port (601) connects the front face to hole 2 through the EXCLUSIVEOR port (600). The third section repeats the same arrangement of connections as the first section. The fourth section repeats the same arrangement of connections as the second section. The top and bottom faces remain closed in the first and third sections and the back face remains closed in the second and fourth sections. A rubber grid of the OUEXCLUSIVE port (597) surrounds all holes and the main body of the OUEXCLUSIVE port (596) isolating each hole and each face so that fluid passing through one hole does not leak into other holes.

[0318] A SW port (602) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded port edges having the same cross section as the OR port (579), the AND port (583, the SEL port (589) and the EXCLUSIVE OR port (596), but longer in the axial direction to accommodate five sections of the SW port (604). Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, a hole1 of face of the SW door (605) and a hole 1 side of the SW door (606) connect the top and back faces. In the second section, a hole 2 through the SW door (607) connects the top and bottom faces and a hole 2 side of SW port (608) connects the back face to hole 2 through SW port (607). The third and fifth sections (odd sections) repeat the same arrangement of connections as the first section. The fourth section (even) repeats the same arrangement of connections of the second section. The front and bottom faces remain closed in the odd-numbered sections and the front face remains closed in the even-numbered sections. A rubber grille of the SW gate (603) surrounds all orifices and the main body of the SW gate (602) isolating each orifice and each face so that fluid passing through one orifice does not leak into other orifices.

[0319] A diagnostic port (609) is composed of a body in the form of a parallelogram with rounded port edges having the same cross-section as the OR port (579), the AND port (583), the SEL port (589 ), the EXCLUSIVE OU port (596) and the SW port (602), but longer in the axial direction to accommodate twenty-one diagnostic port sections (611). Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, a face hole of the diagnostic port 1 (612) and a side hole of the diagnostic port 1 (613) connect the top and back faces. In the second section, a hole 2 through the diagnostic port (614) connects the top and bottom faces and a hole 2 side of the diagnostic port (615) connects the rear face to the hole 2 of the diagnostic port (614). The odd-numbered sections repeat the same arrangement of connections as the first section. The even sections repeat the same arrangement of connections as the second section. The front and bottom faces remain closed in odd-numbered sections and the front face remains closed in even-numbered sections. A rubber grille of diagnostic port (610) surrounds all holes and the main body of the diagnostic port (609) isolating each hole and each face so that fluid passing through one hole does not leak into other holes.

[0320] A diagnostic port spring guide (616) attached to each end provides support for a spring and functions as a stop to maintain a gap at the edge of the cavity where the diagnostic port (609) is installed.

[0321] The SW port (602) and the diagnostic port (609) are topologically similar: they both have an odd number of sections, and the even sections and odd sections of both components have the same connections. The differences in hole shapes: circular in the diagnostic port (609) and square in the SW port (602) and the availability or not of spring guides do not affect the main function of the component. The SW port (602) is not used in the first reactor node execution mode, but because it is shorter, it can be drawn in more detail and is therefore used as a better way to illustrate the shape and explain the operation of the diagnostic port (609).

[0322] Figure 34 shows various cavities that accommodate logic components and corresponding input and output connections that implement example logic functions. Many alternative arrangements are possible to implement more complex logic functions. Depending on specific needs such as available space, simplicity, quick response, availability of intermediate functions and other design considerations, a certain arrangement can be selected. The illustrations in Figures 34, 35, and 36 are provided as a reference of simple configurations that implement basic logic functions that can be used as building blocks to produce more complex logic functions. To better illustrate connections, components are not shown in Figure 34.

[0323] An E 1 cavity (617) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit into a first E port. An auxiliary E 1 (618) connects the cavity to a basic signal. A main E 1 (619) provides the main input to the E gate. An E 1 input (620) provides the other logic input to the E gate. A free E 1 (622) is an additional input connected to the base and an output And 1 (621) collects the result.

[0324] An E cavity 2 (623) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit a second E port that is installed inverted (see Figures 35 and 36) as a means of introducing an additional NOT function into the main input. An auxiliary E 2 (624) connects the cavity to a base signal. A main E2 (625) provides the main input to the E gate. An E2 input (626) provides the other logic input to the E gate. A free E2 (628) is an auxiliary input connected to the base and an output And 2 (627) collects the result.

[0325] An E cavity 3 (629) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit a third AND gate with an OR gate. An auxiliary E 3 (630) connects the cavity to a base signal. A main AND 3 (631) provides the main input to the OR gate. One of four options: a 1 AND 3 OR input (632), a 2 AND 3 OR input (633), a 3 AND 3 OR input (634), or a 4 AND 3 OR input (635) is required to provide the other logical input to the OR gate. The four options are designed to indicate all possible locations for the entry line that can be chosen depending on the project. The main E 3 (631) and the other logical input selected for the OR gate (for simplicity assumed as input 1 E 3 OR (632)) produce the output of the OR gate ((631) v (632)) which in turn , is the main input to the E gate. An E 3 input (636) provides the other logical input to the E gate. A free E 3 (638) is an auxiliary input connected to the base and an E 3 output (637) collects the result.

[0326] An SEL cavity 1 (639) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit an SEL port with an OR port. An auxiliary SEL 1 (640) connects the cavity to a base signal. A main SEL 1 feeds the main input to the OR gate. One of four options: a 1 SEL 1 OR input (642), a 2 SEL 1 OR input (643), a 3 SEL 1 OR input (644) or a 4 SEL 1 OR input (645) is required to provide the other logical input to the OR gate. The four options are designed to indicate all possible locations for the entry line that can be chosen depending on the design. The main SEL 1 (641) and the other logic input selected for the OR gate (for simplicity, assumed as input 1 SEL 1 OR (642)) produce the output of the OR gate ((641) v (642)) which, by In turn, it is the main input to the SEL port. A 1 SEL 1 input (646) provides a first input to the SEL gate. A free SEL 1 1 (648) is the first auxiliary input connected to the base and the SEL 1 output 1 (647) collects the first output. A 2 SEL 1 input (649) provides a second input to the SEL port. A free SEL 1 2 (651) is a second auxiliary input connected to the base and a 2 output SEL 1 (650) collects the second output.

[0327] An EXCLUSIVE OU cavity (652) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit into a first EXCLUSIVE OU port. An EXCLUSIVE-OR signal 1 (653) provides the first input signal to the EXCLUSIVE-OR gate. An EXCLUSIVE-OR signal 2 (654) provides the second input signal to the EXCLUSIVE-OR gate. An EXCLUSIVE OR input 1 (655) is a first auxiliary input connected to high pressure (1), a free EXCLUSIVE OR 1 (657) is a first auxiliary input connected to the base (0), and an EXCLUSIVE OR output 1 (656) collects the first output . An input 2 EXCLUSIVE OR (658) is a second auxiliary input connected to high pressure (1), a free OU EXCLUSIVE 2 (660) is a second auxiliary input connected to the base, and an output 2 EXCLUSIVE OU (659) collects the second output.

[0328] An SEL 2 cavity (661) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit a second SEL port without a logic spring. Springless applications require complementary signals as inputs, but offer some useful possibilities as a means of implementing memory. An SEL 2 main (663) provides the main input to the SEL port. An auxiliary SEL 2 (662) provides the main denied input ((662) = (663)) to the SEL port. An input 1 SEL 2 (664) provides a first input to the SEL port. An output 1 SEL 2 (665) collects the first output. A 2 SEL 2 input (666) provides a second input to the SEL port. A 2 SEL 2 output (667) collects the second output. An SEL 2 output connection (668) is constructed by connecting outputs (665 and 667) to produce a combined output (668) = (665) v (667).

[0329] A SW cavity (669) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit a SW port. An auxiliary SW (670) connects the cavity to a base signal. A main SW (671) provides the switching signal to the SW port. A 1 SW input (672) provides the first input to the SW port. A 1 SW monitor (673) and a 1 SW output (674) are signals that will be connected or not to the 1 SW input (672), depending on the main SW (671). A 2 SW input (675) provides the second input to the SW port. A 2 SW monitor (676) and a 2 SW output (677) are signals that will be connected or not to the 2 SW input signal (675), depending on the main SW (671).

[0330] A depth sensor cavity (678) equipped with the necessary connections is sized to fit a depth detector and a depth sensor (see Figures 35 and 36). An external water pressure tube at depth (679) transmits the external pressure signal (x) to the edge of the depth sensor cavity (678). A least significant bit depth gnd (680) and a most significant bit depth gnd (683) are connected to the water at basic pressure and a high least significant bit depth pressure (681) and most significant bit depth pressure high (682) are connected to high pressure water. The slots in the depth sensor (not seen in Figure 34, see Figures 35 and 36) connect a low pressure source or a high pressure source to an external pressure bit least significant (x) (684) and the external pressure bit most significant (x) (685), depending on the position of the depth sensor.

[0331] Figure 35 shows several cavities with respective logic components in place and corresponding input and output connections described in Figure 34 that implement example logic functions. Wherever applicable, a logic spring (686a, 686b, 686c, 686d and 686e) or a long logic spring (687a and 687b) are used in association with input signals as a means of moving components to the desired position.

[0332] A depth sensor (689) is made from a plastic plate with the cross section of a rectangle with rounded edges at the gate so that it fits snugly within the cavity of the depth sensor (678). A depth finder inlet shield (691) is a bottleneck that allows water from an external water pressure tube (679) to enter the depth sensor cavity (678), even when the depth finder (689) ) is at the end of your route. The depth detector (689) has five compartments that allow the passage of fluids: 1) a high bit less significant depth pressure compartment 1 (692); 2) a gnd bin of least significant bit depth (693); 3) a compartment 2 of least significant high bit depth pressure (694); 4) a more significant high bit depth pressure compartment (695); 5) a more significant bit depth gnd bin (696). A depth detector rubber grid (690) surrounds all compartments and the main body of the depth detector (689) isolating each compartment so that fluid passing through one compartment does not leak into other compartments.

[0333] A depth sensor (688) is made from a flexible plastic bag containing air that has been sealed at atmospheric pressure. The depth sensor (688) has the same rectangular cross-section with rounded port edges as the depth sensor (689), so both fit snugly within the cavity of the depth sensor (678).

[0334] Figure 36 shows various cavities and corresponding input and output connections with respective logic components in place in a different position than seen in Figure 35 and from a different point of view to provide additional details about the implemented logic functions.

[0335] Figures 35 and 36 are further referred to in the operation section to explain the operation of the logic components, the depth sensor and the depth detector.

[0336] Figure 37 shows the first embodiment of the LFSR (linear feedback shift register) assembly (697) that allows each individual reactor node in the system to have its own unique address and to exchange information with a central monitoring system. The LFSR assembly (697) is surrounded by four plates or layers: an LFSR a layer (698), an LFSR b layer (699), an LFSR c layer (700) and an LFSR d layer (701). These layers have cuts of various shapes and sizes on their faces, so that when the layers are stacked, the cuts on the face of one layer coincide with the cuts on the adjacent face of the next layer, creating indentations that provide support and connectivity to a layer. series of components that implement the necessary functions. Each layer has an appropriate thickness that facilitates construction and allows components to be easily placed and removed. An LFSR gnd layer (702) is connected to the common base and interconnects all points that require a connection with a low-level logic signal ((702) = 0). An LFSR high pressure feeder (703) is connected to the common high pressure source and interconnects all points that require a connection with a high level logic signal ((703) = 1). The four layers create a series of LFSR cavities (704) where a set of components are installed and corresponding LFSR connections (705) allow the components to function as intended.

[0337] The LFSR assembly (697) implements the function of a seven-bit linear response shift register. The LFSR connections (705) provide the necessary paths to conduct signals to the appropriate points, so that the 2nd to 7th bit inputs are the values of the previous ones (n = n-1) and the 1st bit input is a response from the EXCLUSIVEOR function of the sixth and seventh bits of the shift register (1 = 6 x 7). Once initialized to an all bits high (1) state and driven by a periodic digital clock signal, this device passes through a defined cyclic sequence of 127 states.

[0338] Figure 92 shows the list of all states of a seven-bit linear response shift register (LFSR). Initial state 1 (1111111) is produced when the LFSR is activated, and each subsequent state is produced by an additional cycle of the clock signal. As seen in the table, after 127 clock cycles, the LFSR returns to state 1.

[0339] Figure 38 shows that the LFSR cavities are composed of: an mz cavity (706), a zk cavity (707), a zkm cavity (708), a zero cavity (709), seven registration cavities (710a, 710b, ..., 710g) and seven memory cavities (711a, 711b, ..., 711f, 711g). The mz cavity (706) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer which provides low pressure water supply through a free mz cavity (712) and an auxiliary mz cavity (713) ((712) = 0; (713) = 0) . The zk cavity (707) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer through a free zk cavity (714) and an auxiliary zk cavity 715 ((714) = 0; (715) = 0). The zkm cavity (708) is connected to the gnd LFSR layer through two free zkm cavities (716a and 716b) and an auxiliary zkm cavity (717) ((716) = 0; (717) = 0). The zero cavity (709) is connected to the gnd LFSR layer through seven free zero registers (732a, ..., 732g) and an auxiliary zero cavity (718) ((732a) = 0, ., (732g) = 0; (718) = 0).

[0340] A recording rail (726a) connected to the LFSR layer provides low pressure water supply to each recording cavity (710a, 710b, ., 710g) passing through each cavity and continuing to the next until it stops (726g) in the cavity register (710g) (726a = 726g = 0). Seven free y-registers (731a, ., 731g) connected to the LFSR gnd layer provide an additional low-pressure water supply ((731a) = 0, ., (731g) = 0) to each cavity (710a, 710b, ., 710g). A memory rail (727a) connected to the LFSR layer provides a low pressure water supply to each of the first 6 memory cavities (711a, 711b, ., 711f) passing through each cavity and continuing into the next until (727f) stops in the memory cavity (711f) ((727a) = (727f) = 0). A lower EXCLUSIVE OU input (728) connects the bottom of the sixth memory cavity (711f) in a dual bottom connection (742f) to the bottom of the seventh memory cavity (711g) in dual bottom connection (742g) ((742f) = (742g)). A top EXCLUSIVE OU input (729) connects the top of the sixth memory cavity (711f) in a dual top connection (743f) to the top of the seventh memory cavity (711g) in a dual top connection (743g) ((743f) = (743g)).

[0341] A clock signal in most significant bit (k) (719) is fed into cavity zk (707). A zero signal in most significant bit (z) (720) is fed into the mz cavity (706), the zk cavity (707), and the zero cavity (709). A master/slave signal in most significant bit (m) (721) is fed into the mz cavity (706). A register signal zk (722) conducts the signal zk = z A k from cavity zk (707) to cavity zkm (708). A register signal mz (723a) conducts the mz = maz signal from the mz cavity (706) to the zkm cavity (708), where it ends (723b).

[0342] A register signal kzm (725a) carries the signal kzm = k a z a m from cavity zkm (708) to memory cavity (711a), continues through each memory cavity, terminating (725f) in memory cavity (711f ). A register signal kzm (724a) which during the active states of normal operation of the LFSR set is the inverse of the register signal kzm ((724) = 25725) drives the signal kzm = k a z a m from the cavity zkm (708) to the cavity of the register (710a) (724b), continues through each register cavity until it passes the register cavity (710g) and is available for later use by additional logic (724c).

[0343] A ready unit (y) (730a) starts at the LFSR high pressure supply (703a), is routed (730b) to the registration cavity (710a), continues through each registration cavity until it passes the registration cavity (710g) and is available for additional use by additional logic (730c). The LFSR high pressure feeder (703a and 703b) also provides high pressure water supply to seven zero set registers (733a, ..., 733g) connected to the zero cavity (709).

[0344] A zero gate (734) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded gate edges having the same cross section as the OR gate, the AND gate, the SEL gate, the EXCLUSIVE OR gate and the SW gate, but longer in the axial direction to accommodate fifteen sections of zero port (736). Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, a hole through port zero (737) connects the front and back faces. In the second section, a zero port top hole (738) connects the top and front faces. The odd-numbered sections repeat the same connection arrangement as the first section and the even-numbered sections repeat the same connection arrangement as the second section. The top and bottom faces remain closed in odd-numbered sections and the back and bottom faces remain closed in even-numbered sections. A zero port (735) rubber grid surrounds all orifices and the main body of the zero port (734) isolating each orifice and each face so that fluid passing through one orifice does not leak into other orifices. A zero port (734) is installed in the zero cavity (709) (see Figures 41 to 48).

[0345] Figure 39 shows the LFSR cavities and some of the LFSR connections from a different angle which makes it easier to view these specific LFSR connections and also provides additional details of the mz register signal (723) that connects the mz cavity (706) and the zkm cavity (708) and the ready unit (y) (730a) which starts at the LFSR high pressure supply, is directed (730b) to the registration cavity (710a), continues through each registration cavity until passing the registration cavity register (710g) and is available (730c) for later use by additional logic, as already described in Figure 38.

[0346] A high EXCLUSIVE OUTPUT (739) is routed to a high transport output (744a) ((739) = (744a)) and a low EXCLUSIVE OUTPUT (740) is routed to a low transport output (745a) ( (740) = (745a)). The high transport output (744a) and the low transport output (745a) feed the first position of the zero cavity (709) and align with a high register input (746a) and a low register input (747a). respectively terminating at the ends of the first recording cavity (710a). A double low connection (742a) at the bottom of the first memory cavity (711a) is connected to a high transport output (744b) ((742a) = (744b)) and a double top connection (743a) at the top of the first memory cavity (711a) is connected to a low transport output (745b) ((743a) = (745b)). The high transport output (744b) and the low transport output (745b) feed the second position of the zero cavity (709) and align with a high register input (746b) and a low register input (747b). respectively terminating at the ends of the second register cavity (710b). The same pattern follows until a lower double connection (742f) at the bottom of the sixth memory cavity (711f) is connected to a high transport output (744g) passing through a lower OREXCLUSIVE input loop (741) ((742f) = (741) = (744g)) and a double top connection (743f) on the top of the sixth memory cavity (711f) is connected to a (745g) low load output ((743f) = (745g)). The high transport output (744g) and the low transport output (745g) feed the seventh and final position of the zero cavity (709) and align with a high register input (746g) and a low register input ( 747g) respectively that terminate at the ends of the seventh recording cavity (710g). The top EXCLUSIVE OU input (729) connects the top of the memory cavity (711g) to the top of the memory cavity (711f) starting at the dual top connection (743g) through the dual top connection (743f) and ending at the transport output low (745g) ((743f) = (743g) = (745g)). Likewise, the lower EXCLUSIVE OU input (728) connects the bottom of the memory cavity (711g) to the bottom of the memory cavity (711f) starting at the lower dual connection (742g), reaching the upper dual connection (743f), and continuing through the lower OREXCLUSIVE input ring (741) to the high transport outlet (744g) ((742f) = (742g) = (741) = (744g)).

[0347] The connections described in the previous paragraph produce an arrangement in which, when the zero port placed within the zero cavity (709) is in the active position ((734) θ 1), (see Figure 42) the signals coming from the memory n are directed to the ends of the register cavity n + 1 for n = 1 to 6 counted from left to right and at the same time the signals coming from the memory cavity 7 are directed to the ends of the register cavity 1 This arrangement allows the components within the n + 1 register cavity to be moved according to the position of the components within the n memory cavity for n = 1 to 6 and, at the same time, the components within the register cavity 1 must be moved according to the position of the components within the memory cavity 6 and memory cavity 7.

[0348] If (734) ± 1; then (742a) = (744b) = (746b); (743a) = (745b) = (747b) for memory cavity 1 and register cavity 2 and so on until (742f) = (744g) = (746g); (743f) = (745g) = (747g) for memory cavity 6 and register cavity 7. And (739) = (744a) = (746a); (740) = (745a) = (747a) for memory cavity 7 and register cavity 1.

[0349] Figure 39 also shows a memory port (748) that is placed within each memory cavity (see Figures 41 to 48). The memory gate (748) is composed of a body in the form of a parallelogram with rounded gate edges and three sections of the memory gate (750) with the same cross-section as the OR gate, the AND gate, the SEL gate, the XOR gate and the SW gate. Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. In the first section, a bottom hole through memory port (751a) and a bottom memory port hole (752a) connect the front, back and bottom faces. In the second section, a top hole through memory port (753) and a top memory port hole (752a) connect the front, back and top faces. The third section repeats the same connection arrangement as the first section (to avoid confusion only the memory port through the bottom hole (751b) is indicated in the third section). A rubber grid of the memory port (749) surrounds all holes and the main body of the memory port (748) isolating each hole and each face so that fluid passing through one hole does not leak into other holes.

[0350] The memory port (748) is constructed in such a way that signals entering the front face pass directly to the rear face and vice versa. Additionally, a signal entering the first or third section of the memory port will be branched and a signal entering the second section of the memory port will be branched.

[0351] Figure 40 shows the cavities of the LFSR and the other LFSR connections from a different angle that makes it easier to visualize these specific LFSR connections. Other connections have been omitted to avoid confusion. A high memory feed (757a) at the top of the first register cavity (710a) is connected to a high memory input (755a) at one end of the first memory cavity (711a) ((755a) = (757a)) and a low memory feed (758a) at the bottom of the first register cavity (710a) is connected to a low memory input (756a) at the other end of the first memory cavity (711a) ((756a) = (758a) ). A high memory feed (757b) at the top of the second register cavity (710b) is connected to a high memory input (755b) at one end of the second memory cavity (711b) ((755b) = (757b)) and a low memory feed (758b) at the bottom of the second register cavity (710b) is connected to a low memory input (756b) at the other end of the second memory cavity (711b) ((756b) = (758b) ). The same pattern follows until a high (757g) memory feed at the top of the seventh register cavity (710g) is connected to a high (755g) memory input at one end of the seventh memory cavity (711g) ( (755g) = (757g)) and a low memory feed of (758g) at the bottom of the seventh register cavity (710g) is connected to a low memory input of (756g) at the other end of the seventh memory cavity ( 711a) ((756g) = (758g)).

[0352] The connections described in the previous paragraph produce an arrangement in which signals from record cavity n are directed to the ends of memory cavity n, for n = 1 to 7 counted from left to right. This arrangement allows components within memory cavity n to be moved according to the position of components within record cavity n.

[0353] (755a) = (757a); (756a) = (758a) for register cavity 1 and memory 1 and so on until (755g) = (757g); (756g) = (758g) for register cavity 7 and memory cavity 7.

[0354] Figure 40 also shows a low registration port (759) which is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded port edges and five low registration port sections (761) with the same cross section as the port. from memory. Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. The first three sections of the low register gate (759) are identical to the first three sections of the memory gate. In the first section, a low hole through memory port (751a) and a memory port hole (752a) connect the front, back, and bottom faces. In the second section, a high hole through memory port (753a) and a memory hole (754a) connect the front, back and top faces. The third section repeats the same connection arrangement as the first section (to avoid confusion only the low hole through the memory port (751b) is indicated in the third section). In the fourth section, a top hole of the registration port (763a) connects the top face to the front face and in the fifth section, a hole through the registration port (762a) connects the front face to the back face. A rubber grid of the low registration port (760) surrounds all holes and the main body of the low registration port (759) isolating each hole and each face so that fluid passing through one hole does not leak into other holes

[0355] The low registration port (759) is constructed in such a way that signals entering the front face pass directly to the rear face and vice versa, with the exception of the fourth low section of the registration port, where a signal that entering the back face will be isolated and a signal entering the top face will be directed to the front face. Additionally, a signal entering the first or third section of the low register port will be branched and a signal entering the second section of the low register port will be branched.

[0356] A tall register port (764) is composed of a body in the shape of a parallelogram with rounded gate edges and five tall register port sections (766) with the same cross-section as the memory port. Each section has four faces that may or may not have a hole, creating a pattern of connections. The first three sections of the high register port (764) are identical to the first three sections of the memory port. In the first section, a bottom through memory port hole (751c) and a bottom memory port hole (752c) connect the front, back, and bottom faces. In the second section, a top memory port hole (753b) and a top memory port hole (754b) connect the front, back, and top faces. The third section repeats the same connection arrangement as the first section (to avoid confusion only the bottom hole through the memory port (751d) is indicated in the third section). In the fourth section, a hole through the registration port (762b) connects the front face to the back face and in the fifth section, an upper hole through the registration port (763) connects the top face to the front face. A high memory port rubber grid (765) surrounds all holes and the main body of the memory port (764) isolating each hole and each face so that fluid passing through one hole does not leak into other holes.

[0357] The high registration port (764) is constructed in such a way that signals entering the front face pass directly to the rear face and vice versa, with the exception of the fifth section of the low registration port, where a signal that entering the back face will be isolated and a signal entering the top face will be directed to the front face. Additionally, a signal entering the first or third section of the high register port will be branched and a signal entering the second section of the low register port will be branched.

[0358] A unique combination of zero to six low registration ports (759) and one to seven high registration ports (764), totaling up to seven components in total, is installed in seven registration cavities (see Figures 41 to 48). .

[0359] The components have not been drawn within their respective cavities in Figures 38, 39 and 40 to avoid confusion and, in doing so, facilitate understanding of the LFSR connections that interconnect the LFSR cavities.

[0360] In Figures 41 to 48, the LFSR connections are omitted and only the components are drawn with the LFSR layer a (698) as a reference to determine the position of each component within its cavity (the part of its cavity that is cut in the LFSR layer a (698)), relative to each other and to the LFSR connections, so that the construction and operation of the LFSR set can be explained.

[0361] The 7-bit combination produced by considering a 0 for each low register port and a 1 for each high register port installed in each register cavity according to the position from left to right, each of which is installed is called an address. A combination of two low register ports (759a and 759b) and five high register ports (764c, ..., 764g) producing the address 0011111 is illustrated in Figures 41 through 48. Any address beyond 0000000 is valid. The address 0011111 was chosen to explain the operation of the LFSR set for convenience. Seven identical memory ports (748a, 748b, ., 748g) are installed, one component in each memory cavity. Memory ports and register ports are in an active or high position (1) when they are at the top of their respective cavities (as seen in Figure 42) and in an inactive or low position (0) when they are at the bottom of their cavities. respective cavities. The seven register ports from left to right produce a 7-digit register position, and the seven memory ports from left to right produce a 7-digit memory position. A low registration port is said to be correctly aligned when it is in the low (0) position and a high registration port is said to be correctly aligned when it is in the high (1) position, so that when all seven registration ports are installed 7-bit address numbers are correctly aligned, the register position (7 digits) corresponds to the address (7 digits).

[0362] In Figures 41 to 48, port E (583a) has been installed in the normally open position so that the output register signal mz (723a) is high ((723a) = 1) when the master (m) /slave in the most significant bit (721) is low ((721) = 0) or the inverted E gate (583a) is in its idle position (~ (583a) θ 0) producing (723a) = -m A z as intended to a slave reactor node. For a master reactor node, the E port (583a) must be installed in the normally closed position so that the output register signal mz (723a) is high ((723a) = 1) when the (m) master/slave in the most significant bit (721) is high ((721) = 1) or the E gate (583a) is in its active position ((583a) θ 1) yielding (723a) = m A z. Using compact notation m/s = 1 if the master/slave signal (m) in most significant bit corresponds to the reactor node configuration (m = 1 if the reactor node is configured as master or m = 0 if the reactor node is reactor is configured as slave) and m/s = 0 otherwise for any reactor node (723a) = m/s to z.

[0363] Figures 41 to 48 are further referred to in the operation section to explain the operation of the LFSR assembly.

[0364] Figure 49 shows the module case (370) in ghost lines viewed from a rear angle above the left to illustrate the node core tubes routed to the module assembly through the module case. The CO2 body (367), the four CO2 body channels (368A, 368B, 368C and 368D) and the four corresponding CO2 valves (150A, 150B, 150C and 150D) are shown as a reference to better visualize the tubes coming from ports A, B, C and D.

[0365] To maintain consistency with Figures 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14, the CO2 valves (150A and 150D) are drawn in the closed position, interrupting the corresponding CO2 body channels (368A and 368D) and the CO2 valves (150B and 150C) are designed in the open position, allowing the flow of CO2 into the corresponding channels of the CO2 body (368B and 368C).

[0366] Tube ports A, B, C and D control the tubes: port opening tube (193), CO2 valve opening tube (194), door closing tube (drawn, but not suitable for avoid confusion, see Figures 13 and 14), CO2 valve shut-off tube (196), water sensor tube (197), water supply tube (198), CO2 sensor tube (199) and CO2 feed (200) terminate at the node core main control port (189). A capital letter (A, B, C, or D) is added to each tube numeral to indicate the tube port it belongs to.

[0367] The control tubes: CO2 sensor main tube (204), submergence control closing tube (206), submergence control opening tube (207), pump supply tube (208) ends at left node core auxiliary control port (191) and the control tubes: flag tube (201), air release opening tube (202), air release closing tube (203), main air release tube (203), CO2 supply (205) terminates at the right auxiliary control port of the node core (192). The pump exhaust pipe (209) discharges the water supplied to the water pump through the pump supply pipe (208) into the water body and does not direct it to the module assembly. It is drawn for reference.

[0368] The main CO2 sensor tube (204) senses the CO2 pressure inside the CO2 body (367) and the main CO2 supply tube (205) controls the CO2 pressure inside the CO2 body (367) by injecting additional amounts of CO2 if the CO2 pressure falls below the specified control. The CO2 sensor main tube (204) and the CO2 feed main tube (205) function to the CO2 body (367) in the same way as the CO2 sensor tube (199) and the CO2 feed tube ( 200) function for the CO2 body channels in the tube ports. During normal operation, the CO2 sensor main tube (204) and CO2 supply main tube (205) work together with the CO2 sensor tube (199) and CO2 supply tube (200) to regulate the CO2 pressure from open tube ports. In case all CO2 valves (150A, 150B, 150C and 150D) close the CO2 pressure inside the CO2 body (367) remains under control by the main CO2 sensor tube (204) and the main supply tube of CO2 (205).

[0369] The remaining signals arrive through the module's external opening (375) which transmits external pressure (x) and the module's base tube connector (378) which connects the module assembly to the body of water transmits base signals and allows the module assembly to monitor and control the base pressure in the water body.

[0370] Figure 50 shows the expansion unit assembly (388) and module case (370) assembled together viewed from the same angle as Figure 49. The module case (370) is shown in ghost lines to improve clarity. detail view. The expansion box (389) is secured to the module box (370) by attaching R-clamps to each of the fasteners (254) on the module box (370), securing the expansion box flange (390) to the module flange (371). The remaining fastener holes (253) that do not align with the fasteners (254) in the module flange (371) align with another set of fasteners in the node core, allowing the module assembly to be secured to the node core. at the.

[0371] The expansion layer (400), seen in its installed position, is inserted through the rear opening of the expansion box (392) and, when necessary, removed by inserting a long rod or other suitable tool into the front opening of the expansion box (392). expansion (391) to push it out. The diagnostic port (161), left signal port (163), and right signal port (164) that provide connections for external signals are located on the top of the expansion box (389). Since these signals are not yet used in the expansion unit assembly, they pass directly through the module case (370) and the expansion layer (400) to be available to other units in the module assembly. The expansion power tubes (212) coming from the I/O unit assembly pass through the module case (370) and terminate in the expansion layer (400), where they are available for future use.

[0372] Also seen in Figure 50 is the expansion box handle (393) that is used to hold and manipulate the module box (370) and the expansion box flag cutout (399) that accommodates the flag when it is in its lowered position.

[0373] Figure 51 shows the I/O unit assembly (403) mounted within the module case (370), viewed from the same angle as in Figures 49 and 50. The module case (370) is shown in rows ghosting to improve detail viewing. The fasteners (254) on the module flange (371) are used to secure the expansion unit assembly to the module case (370), and the fastener holes (253) on the module flange (371) are aligned with the fasteners on the node core that are used to secure the module assembly to the node core.

[0374] Signals passing through the diagnostic port (161), the left signal port (163) and the right signal port (164) are directed to the I/O unit assembly (403), as well as the external pressure (x) (213a) that provides an external water pressure reference to the I/O unit assembly (403). External pressure (x) (213b) continues into the expansion unit assembly at the middle position of the expansion supply tubes (212) available for possible future use.

[0375] The module box (370) ensures that the I/O layer a (419), I/O layer b (420) and I/O layer c (421) remain in their installed position within the box I/O (404). A pair of pullers (430a and 430b) are used to help install and remove the I/O unit assembly (403) into the module canister (370). The puller (430a) is first inserted into the I/O box puller hole (408) and then rotated 90 degrees (430b) to lock it.

[0376] Figure 52 shows the I/O box (404) and module box (370) drawn in ghost lines to illustrate the position of a set of I/O control tubes (424) that route signals arriving through the node core main control port, left node core auxiliary control port (191), and right node core auxiliary control port (192) at termination points within the I/O unit assembly. S (see Figure 49).

[0377] Figure 53 shows the I/O box (404) drawn in ghost lines to illustrate the position of a set of I/O component cavities (425) that contain the I/O components of the drive assembly of I/O.

[0378] Figure 54 shows the I/O box (404) drawn in ghost lines to illustrate the position of an I/O piping (426) that directs the signals necessary to operate the components within the I/O component cavities. /S (425) on the I/O unit assembly to their appropriate termination points.

[0379] Figure 55 shows the I/O component cavities (425) as a reference to illustrate the position of an I/O base plane (427) that provides base connection to all I/O components within of the I/O component cavities (425) in the I/O unit assembly allowing them to operate. The basic I/O plane (427) is connected to the basic tube (180) (gnd) to make a basic reference available to maintenance crews working on the reactor node (see Figure 76).

[0380] Figure 56 shows the cavities of the I/O components (425) as a reference to illustrate the position of an I/O high-pressure plane (428) that supplies high-pressure water to all I/O components. S within the cavities of the I/O components (425) in the I/O unit assembly, allowing them to operate. The high pressure I/O plane (428) is supplied with high pressure water through the inlet pipes: (w) right water refill (166), (v) submersion inlet (170), (r) inlet reset input (172), (h) help input (174), (k) clock input (179), (z) zero input (181), (m) master/slave input (183), (q) input query (185), and status input(s) (187) via a set of check valves (339a, ..., 339e, ..., 339i). Each inlet tube is connected to the I/O high-pressure plane (428) through a separate check valve (see Figure 60). As the reactor node consumes energy in the form of high-pressure water to operate, the pressure within the I/O high-pressure plane (428) drops until the pressure in one or more inlet pipes is greater than the pressure in the I/O high pressure plane (428). The affected check valves open, supplying additional water to the I/O high pressure plane (428), increasing its pressure until an equilibrium is reached and flow stops. Check valves prevent water from flowing in the opposite direction from the high pressure I/O plane (428) to an inlet pipe that is momentarily carrying a low signal (low pressure water).

[0381] Figure 57 shows the I/O box (404) drawn in ghost lines as a reference to illustrate the position of a cutout of the I/O layer (429) which is the sum of all cuts that must be made on a flat plate of material to produce the I/O layer (419).

[0382] Figure 58 is a left rear view of the I/O box (404) inside the module box (370) drawn in ghost lines as a reference to show the I/O layer (419) in its installed position , allowing a view of the cuts made on its upper face as a result of the process described in Figure 57.

[0383] Figure 59 is a left rear view of the I/O box (404) inside the module box (370) drawn in ghost lines as a reference to show the I/O layer (419) in its installed position , allowing a view of the cuts made on its lower face as a result of the process described in Figure 57.

[0384] Figure 60 is a left rear view of the I/O box (404) drawn in ghost lines as a reference to show the I/O layer b (420) in its installed position, allowing a view of the cuts made in its upper face as a result of a process similar to that described in Figure 57 using I/O layer b (420) instead of I/O layer a. The indentation that creates the I/O base plane (427) is the major feature of the I/O layer b (420). The check valves (339a, 339b, 339c, 339d, 339e, 339f, 339g, 339h, and 339i), which connect each inlet tube to the I/O high-pressure plane (see Figure 56), are seen in their positions installed.

[0385] Figure 61 is a left rear view of the I/O box (404) drawn in ghost lines as a reference to show the I/O layer c (420) in its installed position, allowing a view of the cuts made in its upper face as a result of a process similar to that described in Figure 57 using the I/O layer c (420) instead of the I/O layer a. The indentation that creates the high-pressure I/O plane (427) is the major feature of the I/O c-layer (421). Another feature of the I/O layer c (421) is a pair of extractor nut bases (431a and 431b) into which the extractors (430a and 430b) fit and rotate. The extractor (430a) is pulled into the inserted position and the extractor (430b) is pulled into the inserted position and rotated (locked).

[0386] Figures 62 and 63 show the I/O components from different points of view for better visualization and understanding. Figure 62 is an isometric view of the I/O components of the I/O unit assembly with the I/O component cavities (425) drawn in ghost lines for reference. Figure 63 is a top view of the I/O components of the I/O unit assembly, also showing the I/O layer a (419) that serves as a reference. Figures 62 and 63 are further referred to in the operation section to explain the digitization of the input signals and the generation of the output signals used in the reactor node.

[0387] Figure 64 shows the I/O box (404) in ghost lines to allow a better view of a set of logical signal connections (767) that run between the logical unit assembly (432) and the I/O unit. Some of the signals on the logic signal connections (767) transmit the digitized input signals produced within the I/O unit assembly by the controllers to the logic unit assembly (432), where these signals are used to implement control logic. required to operate the reactor node. Another set of signals in the logic signal connections (767) transmits logic signals generated within the logic unit assembly to the actuators in the I/O unit assembly to control the actuators and produce digital output signals. A maintenance job (j) (768) which is one of the signals of the logic signal connections (767) controls two diagnostic ports (609a and 609b) which are equipped with the logic springs (686a and 686b). If the maintenance work (j) (768) is low (j = 0), the logic springs (686a and 686b) push the diagnostic gates (609a and 609b) towards each other and the reactor node operates in mode normal. If the maintenance work (j) (768) is high (j = 1), it separates the diagnostic ports (609a and 609b) from each other and the reactor node operates in controlled mode. A direct router card (451), which, like other router cards, is installed just below the two diagnostic ports (609a and 609b), is visible drawn in dashed lines inside the I/O box (404).

[0388] Figure 65 shows the I/O box (404) in ghost lines to allow a better view of a set of diagnostic connections (769) that connect the logical drive assembly (432) passing through the drive assembly I/O module and expansion unit assembly on top of the module assembly where they are available to connect the diagnostic device. A direct router board (451) drawn in dashed lines can be seen in its installed position inside the I/O box (404). Within the I/O unit assembly, two diagnostic gates control whether the reactor node operates in normal mode or controlled mode (see Figures 65E and 76).

[0389] The detail in Figure 65E shows the upper part of the logic unit assembly, where a left control connector (440) of the logic box is located, consisting of 10 small connector inserts identical to the small connector inserts (384a and 384b ). To improve the clarity of Figure 65E and ease of explanation, the tubes passing through the small inserts (384a and 384b) of the logic box left control connector that can be seen in Figure 65 have not been drawn in detail in Figure 65E.

[0390] A diagnostic interface tube (770) is a tube of diagnostic connections that begins at the top of the diagnostic port, passes through the I/O unit assembly and expansion unit assembly, and ends at the top of the module assembly into the diagnostic port. A diagnostic control tube (771) is a tube of diagnostic connections that begins at the front of the diagnostic port and ends inside the I/O unit assembly. A diagnostic control tube (772) is a tube of diagnostic connections that begins at the bottom of the diagnostic port, passes through the I/O unit assembly, and ends inside the logical unit assembly. A router tube (773) is a tube that passes through the direct router card (451) or any other router card installed in place of the direct router card (451). All diagnostic logic tubes (772) are connected to the top of the corresponding router tubes (773). However, these connections are not drawn in Figure 65E to avoid confusion and better show the direct router plate (451) and router tubes (773). The detail of Figure 65E is further referred to in the operation section of this document.

[0391] Figure 66 shows the logical unit assembly (432) in its installed position within the module box (370). Two pullers (430a and 430b) are used to help install and remove the logical drive assembly (432). The puller (430a) is first inserted into the puller hole of the logic box (436) and then rotated 90 degrees (430b) to lock it. The module box (370) ensures that the logic layer a (444), the logic layer b (445), the logic layer c (446) and the logic layer d (447) remain in the installed position within the logic box.

[0392] Part of the node core main control port (189), part of the node core auxiliary control left port (191) and node core auxiliary control right port (192) which together route all pipes Signal and control signals from the node core to the module assembly can be seen on the bottom of the module case (370).

[0393] Figure 67 shows the direct router board (451) installed in the router board insertion compartment (448) on top of the logical layer c (446). Eight different types of router cards are available, but only one can be inserted at a time. To prevent the chosen router card from being placed incorrectly, two asymmetrically positioned router card insertion switches (449a and 449b) are located on the sides of the router card insertion compartment (448), allowing the selected router card fits only in the proper orientation.

[0394] The signals arriving at the router board are: (i) internal water pressure most significant bit (775A, 775B, 775C; 775D); (i) internal water pressure least significant bit (776A, 776B, 776C, 776D); (n) internal CO2 pressure least significant bit (777A, 777B, 777C, 777D, 777e); (O) door opening control (778A, 778B, 778C, 778D); (T) air ventilation control (779); (F) flag raising control (780); (P) water pump stop control (781); (IV) submersion control (782).

[0395] The signals closest to the edges of a router card: internal CO2 pressure least significant bit (777e), (T) ventilation air control (779), (F) flag raising control (780), (P) water pump stop control (781) and (IV) submersion control (782) are not redirected and are always advancing in the same position they entered. The 16 signals in the center of a router board marked with a capital letter: A, B, C, or D, depending on which pipe port they belong to, may or may not be rerouted according to the routing plan of each router board.

[0396] The 16 tube port signals are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the router board: to the left of the center line, the first 4 signals belong to tube port B and the next 4 signals belong to tube port B. tube A, making a total of 8 tube port signals to the left of the center line. To the right of the center line, the first 4 signals belong to tube port C and the next 4 signals belong to tube port D, making a total of 8 tube port signals to the right of the center line. An A-tube port signal like (775A) is placed in a symmetrical position with respect to its D-tube port counterpart (775D) and a B-tube port signal like (775B) is placed in a symmetrical position to its counterpart. counterpart in the C-tube port (775C). Additionally, tube port signals on each side: Signals A and B on the left side and tube port signals C and D on the right side are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line separating a tube port on each side. This double symmetry arrangement places the tube port signals in the following sequence, as seen in Figure 67: [775A 776A 777A 778A][ 778B 777B 776B 775B][ 775C 776C 777C 778C][ 778D 777D 776D 775D. The symbol ”][“ separates the tube ports and also indicates a line of symmetry: a signal located at a certain position to the left of a ][ symbol will have the same number as a signal located at the same distance to the right of the chosen symbol. This arrangement facilitates the redirection of signals from tube ports A, B, C, and D, simplifying the construction of the router boards (see Figure 68).

[0397] The direct router card (451) does not redirect signals from the tube port and simply forwards all signals in the same position they entered. The direct router card (451) is one of 8 router cards available. Also seen in Figure 67 is a set of I/O layer c slices (774) that are created in logical layer c (446) as a result of the process described in Figure 57 applied to the logical drive assembly rather than the logical drive assembly. of I/O.

[0398] Figure 68 shows the remaining 7 of the 8 types of router cards: 2) AB router card (452) which exchanges tube port A signals with tube port B signals and forwards the port signals C-tube port and D-tube port; 3) CD router card (453) that forwards tube port A and tube port B and exchanges tube port C signals with tube port D signals; 4) ABCD router board (454) that exchanges signals from tube port A with signals from tube port B and signals from tube port C with signals from tube port D; 5) ADBC router board (455) that exchanges signals from tube port A with signals from tube port D and signals from tube port B with signals from tube port C; 6) DBCA router board (456) which redirects signals from tube port A to tube port D, from tube port D to tube port B, from tube port B to tube port C, and from tube port C to tube port A; 7) CBDA router board (457) which redirects signals from tube port A to tube port C, from tube port C to tube port B, from tube port B to tube port D, and from tube port D to tube port A; 8) ACBD router board (458) which exchanges signals from tube port A with tube port C and exchanges signals from tube port B with signals from tube port D. The redirection introduced by the router cards is listed in the table of Figure 78. The configuration numbers in Figure 78 are the same as those used in the description above for ease of identification, with configuration 1 being the straight router card that does not redirect signals.

[0399] As seen in Figure 67, the signals closest to the edges of all router boards (indicated in Figure 68 only on the ACBD router board (458) to avoid confusion): (n) internal CO2 pressure bit minus significant (777e), (T) ventilation air control (779), (F) flag raising control (780), (P) water pump stop control (781), and (IV) submersion control ( 782) are not rerouted and are always ahead in the same position they entered.

[0400] The 16 signals in the center of a router card belong to the pipe ports and are redirected or not according to the routing plane of each router card. All router cards have tube port signals that originate in the same location at the top and terminate in different locations at the bottom, according to their routing plan. For convenience, the A and B tube port signals are indicated on the CD router board (453) and the C and D tube port signals are indicated on the AB router board (452). The same positions on other router cards have the same signals. The (i) internal water pressure most significant bit (775A, 775B, 775C; 775D); (i) internal water pressure least significant bit (776A, 776B, 776C, 776D); (n) internal CO2 pressure least significant bit (777A, 777B, 777C, 777D); (The) door opening control (778A, 778B, 778C, 778D) are given as reference to illustrate their double symmetry arrangement.

[0401] Figure 69 is an isometric view of the logic layer a (444) and the installed logic components. The logic layer serves as a reference to determine the relative positions of the logic components in their respective cavities. To facilitate understanding, logical components are divided into blocks that perform a certain function.

[0402] An LFSR logic block (783) described in Figures 37 to 48 and its operation explained in Figures 41 to 48 allows each reactor node to have its own address and respond to a periodic poll when selected. A signal response logic block (784) processes input signals and produces output signals suitable for communicating with adjacent reactor nodes and responding to periodic polling by using local signals when the reactor node address is selected and retransmitting the signals received when not selected. A signal leak alarm logic block (785) produces an alarm if a leak or other problem is detected in any part of the reactor node. As described in Figures 34, 35 and 36, the external pressure signal (x) is supplied through the external water pressure tube at depth (679) pushing the depth detector (689) against the depth sensor (688) producing the external pressure most significant bit and the (x) external pressure signal least significant bit which encode the current depth of the reactor node. A depth management logic block (786) uses the 2-bit depth code (x most significant bit, x least significant bit) to produce output signals suitable for controlling subsystems affected by the current depth of the reactor node.

[0403] A tube port management logic block (787) processes the input signals from each tube port and produces output signals to open or close each tube port, bypassing eventual failures and redirecting the water culture in the wet reactor according to the assigned priorities defined by the installed router board (see Figures 67 and 68). Additionally, the pipe port management logic block (787) produces the output signals to control the water pump, allowing it if the reactor node is operational and two pipe ports are open, despite eventual failures, and disabling the water pump if a valid combination of two pipe ports cannot be opened due to faults.

[0404] Figure 69 also shows a ground feed (789) which is a continuation of the base pressure supply outlet that injects high pressure regulated water produced in the base pressure controlling device into the water body to regulate the base pressure of the water, as explained in the description part of the base pressure controlling device in Figures 29, 30 and 31 and explanation of operation in Figure 32. A series of base tubes (790a, 790b and 790c) provide separate connections to the body of water to supply water at base pressure (reference pressure) to various components in the reactor node and produce the least significant bit base signal (g) in the base pressure controlling device. A high-pressure water supply (791) fed by two high-pressure water pipes that come from the I/O unit assembly provides high-pressure water to power the logic components.

[0405] Figure 70 is a top view of the logic layer a (444) and the installed logic components. Connections outside the logic layer a (444) that do not introduce excessive clutter have been drawn in dashed lines to facilitate visualization of the circuits. Connections that would make it difficult to identify or visualize components have not been drawn and are explained by other means in the text.

[0406] The depth detector (689) moving against the depth sensor (688) generates the (x) least significant bit external pressure (684) and the (x) most significant bit external pressure (685) producing a digital signal 2-bit code that encodes the current depth of the reactor node. The (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is connected to the main input on the left and the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is connected to the auxiliary input on the right of the E port (583l) which is not equipped with a logic spring. This arrangement causes the E port (583l) to move to the left (as drawn) if (x) least significant bit external pressure 684 is low and (x) most significant bit external pressure (685) is high and for to the right if (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is high and (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is low. If both the (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) and the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) are high or low, the E port (5831) remains stationary in its current position. A high-pressure source (792b) supplies high-pressure water to the other logic input of gate E (5831) and low-pressure water is fed from the free inlet at the top (not indicated in Figure 70; see Figures 34, 35, and 36 ). The output of the E gate (5831) is a maximum depth overshoot (OV) signal (804) which takes on a high value if the reactor node is at a depth greater than the predicted maximum depth encoded in the depth detector (689 ).

[0407] In the case of the E port (5831) the left side is defined as the inactive position (0), resulting in the following notation: (5831) θ 0 => (804) = 0 and (5831) θ 1 => ( 804) = 1.

[0408] The high pressure source (792a) supplies high pressure water to the side inlet of port E (583a). The output of the E port (583a) is then routed to the side input of the E port (583b) and to subsequent E ports, passing through the E port (583c), E port (583d), E port (583e), E port (583f ), E port (583g), and E port (583h) forming an E current (alarm current). The main input of the E port (583a) is connected to the maintenance work (j) (768) and the auxiliary input is connected to the (OV) maximum depth overshoot (804) (output of the E port (5831)).

[0409] If the reactor node is too deep for the maximum depth overshoot (OV) (804) to be high (1), the E gate (583a) moves to the inactive position and since no logic spring is installed , remains this way even after the submersion overshoot situation is overcome until the signal of (j) maintenance work (768) is high (1). This requires the intervention of a maintenance team who will inspect the reactor node for problems, as it should not reach a depth that would cause an oversubmergence situation under normal circumstances (see Figure 76).

[0410] Using the symbol f as "set to 1" and the symbol | as "reset to 0" (as in a defined reset register) by the condition given to the right of the symbol, the depth overshoot (OV) can be defined as: OV f x msb A x isb; OV ; j.

[0411] With the exception of the E port (583c) which is fed with the base least significant (g) bit (805) from the base pressure controller device, the remaining E ports located at the beginning of the alarm chain, between the E (583b) and port E (583d) are fed with the digitized least significant bit input signals produced by their respective signal pressure controller devices from the I/O unit assembly at their respective main inputs. From left to right, the signals provided at the main inputs of ports E (583b) and E (583d) are: (s) state input least significant bit, (q) query input least significant bit, (m) master input /slave least significant bit, (z) input zero least significant bit, (k) clock input least significant bit, (g) base input least significant bit (805), (w) water refill least significant bit, (u ) air replenishment least significant bit, (v) submersion input least significant bit, (r) reset input to least significant bit (801), (h) help input least significant bit.

[0412] The four E ports located at the end of the alarm chain (from right to left): E port (583h), E port (583g), E port (583f), and E port (583) are used to detect problems in tube ports A, B, C and D respectively (see description in Figure 71).

[0413] The alarm signal (AL) (798) is fed to the main input and a help input most significant bit (h) (795a) is fed to the side input of the E gate (583j) producing a help control output (H) with the logical function (803) = (798) A (795a) or replacing the numbers with the names of the signs: H = AL A h msb. This is used to produce a series link from the reactor nodes' alarm state to the current one.

[0414] The state input most significant bit(s) (794) digitized from the state input(s) received from the previous reactor node is fed into the first input and the help input most significant bit (h) (795b ) digitized from the help input (h) received from the previous reactor node is fed into the second input of the SEL port (589a). The first and second free inputs of the SEL port (589a) are not connected, allowing the first and second outputs to be joined together producing a single state control (S) output (796).

[0415] A most significant bit query input (q) (797) digitized from the query input (q) received from the previous reactor node is fed into the first input and the alarm (AL) (798) is fed into the second SEL port input (589b). The first and second free inputs of the SEL port (589b) are not connected, allowing the first and second outputs to be joined together producing a single query control (Q) output (799).

[0416] The ready unit (y) (730) is fed to the main input and the register signal -kzm (724) is fed to the side input of the E port (583i), producing as output a transmission signal (TX) ( 793). The transmit (TX) signal (793) is fed into the main inputs of the SEL port (589a) and the SEL port (589b).

[0417] Using compact notation m/s = 1 if the master/slave input signal most significant bit (m) matches the reactor node configuration (m = 1 if the reactor node is configured as master or m = 0 if the reactor node is configured as slave) and m/s = 0 otherwise the logical function produced is: (793) = (730) to (724) or by replacing the numbers with the signal names: TX = y a k msb a z msb at m/s

[0418] The transmission signal (TX) (793) is high ((793) = 1) if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied: a) m/s = 1 (the unit type is correct); b) (z) input zero most significant bit = 1 (counting is enabled); c) (y) unit ready = 1 (reactor node address is selected); d) (k) clock input most significant bit = 0 (low clock cycle).

[0419] If (793) = 0, the SEL port (589a) and the SEL port (589b) produce as output the chain signals coming from the previous reactor node fed into their first inputs forwarding the received messages. If (793) = 1, the SEL port (589a) and the SEL port (589b) produce as output the local information fed to the second inputs. The implemented logical functions are: = (-(793) v (794)) v ((793) A (795b)); (799) = (-(793) A (797)) v ((793) A (798)) or substituting the numbers for the signal names: S = (TX A s msb) v (TX a h msb); Q = (-TX a q msb) v (TX a AL).

[0420] The reset signal is active low and therefore must be tested for leaks to avoid false commands. A most significant bit (r) reset unit (800) is fed into the main input and a least significant bit (r) reset input (801) is fed into the E gate side input (583k) producing a reset control output (R) (802). The E port (583k) is installed inverted producing: (802) = -(800) to (801) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: R = -r msb to r lsb.

[0421] In case of leak (r lsb = 0), then R = 0. If there is no leak (r lsb = 1) and the reset signal is not active (r msb = 1), then -r msb = 0 and R = 0. If there is no leak (r lsb = 1) and the reset signal is active (r msb = 0), then r msb = 0 and R = 1. Reset control (R) is sent to the set of the I/O unit to control the normally closed mono actuator that allows reset signals within the reactor node. To regenerate the reset signal for the next reactor node, an additional NO function is required. This is achieved by rotating the mono actuator which produces the reset output (R) which is transmitted producing output R = -R = - (-r msb to r lsb) (see Figures 62 and 63).

[0422] The high pressure supply (792c) is fed into the first input and the (x) least significant bit external pressure (684) is piped to the second input of the SEL port (589c) which is installed inverted to introduce a NO function at the main input which is fed with the most significant bit (x) external pressure (685). A most significant bit submergence input signal (v) (806a), which is high in case the reactor node is commanded to submerge, is provided at the main input of the SEL port (589d). The first and second outputs of the SEL port (589c) are routed to the first and second inputs of the SEL port (589d), respectively, producing a complete submergence (pl) (807) at the first output and a flag activation control (FE ) (808) on the second output of the SEL port (589d). The logical functions produced are: (807) = (806a) A (685); (808) = -(806a) A (684) A (685) or replacing the numbers with the names of the signs: pl = v msb A -x msb; FE = -v msb a x lsb a x msb.

[0423] The beacon enable control (FE) (808) is powered at the side input of the E door (583o) which is installed inverted, introducing a NO function at its main input which is powered with the alarm (AL) (798 ). The resulting flag raising control (F) (780) has the logical function (780) = -(798) to (808) or by replacing the numbers with the signal names: F = -AL to FE. Flag raise control (F) (780) is low (flag remains stored) if alarm (AL) (798) is high (-(798) = 0) when there is no current active alarm or activation control flag (FE) (808) is low ((808) = 0) when the flag cannot be raised safely.

[0424] The flag activation control (FE) (808) is fed to the main input of the OR gate (579), the full submersion (pl) (807) is fed to the bottom input of the OR gate (579), and the supply high pressure (792d) is provided at the side inlet of port E (583m) producing an output from the submergence deactivation control (E) (809) which disables the movement of the cable winch with the following logic function: (809) = ((808) v (807)) A (792d) = ((808) v (807)) = (-(806a) A (684) A (685)) v ((806a) A (685)). Replacing the numbers with the names of the signs: E = FE v pl = (-v msb a x lsb a x msb) v (v msb A -x msb).

[0425] A different suffix letter is used to differentiate different relevant points of the same submergence input signal most significant bit (v) (806a), (806b) which originates at the signal pressure controller device that digitizes the submergence signal. submergence input (v) into the I/O unit assembly and continues into the logical unit assembly.

[0426] The external pressure most significant bit (x) (685) is fed to the main input and the submergence input most significant bit (806b) is fed to the side input of the E port (583n), producing submergence control as outputs (IV) (782) and the air ventilation control (T) (779). The logical function is: = (799) = (685) a (806b) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: IV = T = x msb a v msb.

[0427] A routed tube block (788) shows the arrival points of signals coming from the router card installed in the router card insertion compartment. For the sake of simplicity, the descriptions in Figures 70 and 71 are made assuming that a router card is installed directly and does not redirect signals. The description in case of a different router card installed would be the same, apart from changing the capital letters A, B, C and D of any indication containing these capital letters according to the redirection plan of the selected router card (see Figures 67 and 68).

[0428] Figure 71 is a top view of the lower portion of logic layer a (444) and the logic components installed with connections outside logic layer a (444) drawn in dashed lines to facilitate visualization of the logic block circuits of signal leak alarm and the tube port management logic block (see Figure 69). Other components, their connections, and other features in the logic layer a (444) that are not necessary for the explanation have been omitted to avoid confusion and to make room for the indication numbers. All components and connections drawn in Figure 71 are also drawn in Figure 70 which can be used as a reference if necessary.

[0429] The internal pressure CO2 least significant bit (n) (777A) is fed into the main inlet and the high pressure supply (792b) supplies high pressure water into the side inlet of port E (583k). The (i) least significant bit internal water pressure (776A), is fed into the main inlet and the output from port E (583k) is routed to the side inlet from port E (583j). The output of port E (583j) is triggered as a ppA alarm (811a) and routed to the side input of port E (583i) which is also fed with the internal water pressure most significant bit (i) (775A) at the input main that produces the tube port (pp) status output (810Aa). The implemented functions are: a = (777A) A (776A); (810Aa) = (777A) A (776A) A (775A) or using the signal names: alarm ppA = nA lsb A ÍA lsb; ppA = nA lsb, iA lsb, iA msb.

[0430] The internal pressure CO2 least significant bit (n) (777B) is fed into the main inlet and the high pressure supply (792b) supplies high pressure water into the side inlet of port E (583l). The internal water pressure least significant bit (i) (776B), is fed into the main inlet and the outlet from port E (583l) is routed to the side inlet from port E (583m). The output of port E (583m) is triggered as a ppB alarm (812) and routed to the side input of port E (583n) which is also fed with the internal water pressure most significant bit (i) (775B) at the input main that produces the pipe port (pp) status output (810B). The ppB alarm (812) is routed to the side input of port E (583o) which is also fed with the internal CO2 pressure least significant bit (n) (777e) at the main input producing a ppB A ne alarm (813a). The implemented functions are: (813a) = (777B) a (776B) a (777e); (810B) = (777B) to (776B) to (775B) or using the signal names: alarm ppB A ne = nB lsb a iB lsb a ne lsb; ppB = nB lsb, iB lsb, iB msb.

[0431] The internal pressure CO2 least significant bit (n) (777C) is fed into the main inlet and the high pressure supply (792d) supplies high pressure water into the side inlet of port E (583q). The internal water pressure least significant bit (i) (776C), is fed into the main input and the output from the E port (583q) is routed to the side input from the E port (583p) producing the tube port status output (pp) (810Ca). The implemented function is: (810Ca) = (777C) A (776C) or using the signal names: ppC = nC lsb A iC lsb.

[0432] The internal pressure CO2 least significant bit (n) (777D) is fed into the main inlet and the high pressure supply (792d) supplies high pressure water into the side inlet of port E (583r). The internal water pressure least significant bit (i) (776D), is fed into the main inlet and the E port output (583r) is routed to the E port side inlet (583p) producing the tube port status output (pp) (810Da). The implemented function is: Da = (777D) a (776D) or using the signal names: ppD = nD lsb a iD lsb.

[0433] The tube port state (pp) (810B) is fed to the main input and the tube port state (pp) (810Aa) is fed to the side input of the E port (583t) installed inverted producing an output BA (814). The implemented function is: = (810B) to (810Aa) or using the signal names: BA = ppB to ppA.

[0434] The BA (814) is fed into the main input and the tube port state (pp) (810Da) is fed into the E port side input (583u) producing a BAD output (815). The implemented function is: = (814) to (810Da) or using the signal names BAD = -ppB to ppA to ppD.

[0435] The state tube port (pp) (810Ca) is fed to the main input, the BAD (815) is powered to the first input, and the BA (814) is powered to the second input of the SEL gate (589a) which has the first and second outputs joined together to produce a single door opening control output (O) (778A). The implemented function is: (778A) = ((810Ca) A (815)) v ((810Ca) a (814)) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: OA = (ppC to ppB to ppA to ppD) v ( ppC appB to ppA).

[0436] The tube port (pp) state (810B) is fed into the main input and the tube port (pp) state (810Da) is fed into the E port side input (583u) producing a BAD output (815 ). The implemented function is: = (810B) A (8l0Da) or using the signal names: BD = -ppB A ppD.

[0437] The tube port state (pp) (810Ca) is fed to the main input, the BD (816) is fed to the first input, and the tube port state (pp) (810B) is fed to the second input of the SEL port (589b) that has the first and second outputs joined to produce a single door opening control output (O) (778B). The implemented function is: (778B) = (810Ca( A (816) v (810Ca) A (810B) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: OB = ( ppC A ppB A ppD) v (ppC A ppB).

[0438] The tube port state (pp) (810Ca) is fed to the main input and the tube port state (pp) (810Da) is fed to the side input of the E port (583w) installed inverted producing a CD output (817). The implemented function is: = (810Ca) to (810Da) or using the signal names: CD = ppC to ppD.

[0439] The CD (817) is fed into the main input and the tube port status (pp) (810Ab) is fed into the E port side input (583x), producing a CDA output (818). The implemented function is: = (817) to (810Ab) or using the signal names: CDA = -ppC to ppD to ppA.

[0440] The state tube port (pp) (810B) is fed to the main input, the CDA (818) is fed to the first input, and the CD (817) is fed to the second input of the SEL gate (589d) which has the first and second outputs joined together to produce a single door opening control output (O) (778D). The implemented function is: (778D) = ((810B) to (818)) v ((810B) to (817)) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: OD = (ppB to ppC to ppD to ppA) v ( ppB to ppC to ppD).

[0441] The tube port state (pp) (810Ca) is fed into the main input and the tube port state (pp) (810Aa) is fed into the E port side input (583y) producing an AC output (819 ). The implemented function is: = (810Ca) A (8l0Aa) or using the signal names: CA = ppC A ppA.

[0442] The tube port state (pp) (810B) is fed to the main input, the CA (819) is fed to the first input, and the tube port state (pp) (810Ca) is fed to the second input of the SEL port (589c) that has the first and second outputs joined to produce a single door open control output (O) (778C). The implemented function is: (778C) = ((810B) A (819)) v ((810B) A (810Ca)) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: OC = ( ppB A ppC A ppA) v (ppB A ppC).

[0443] The high pressure supply (792c) supplies high pressure water to the side inlet and the door opening control (O) (778C) is fed to the main inlet of door E (583za) which is installed inverted, introducing a function NOT on input. The output of the E door (583za) is routed to the side input and the door opening control (O) (778D) is fed to the main input of the E door (583zb) which is installed inverted, introducing a NO function at the input. The implemented logic function of the stop water pump control (P) (781) produced is: = (778C) to (778D) or by replacing the numbers with the signal names: P = OC to OD.

[0444] The (i) most significant bit internal water pressure (775C) and the (i) most significant bit internal water pressure (775D) are not used and terminate on the router board before reaching the logic circuits. The air ventilation control (T) (779), flag raising control (F) (780) and submersion control (IV) (782) signals are indicated to supplement the signals in the router tube block ( 788) (indicated in Figure 70).

[0445] The high pressure source (792a) supplies high pressure water to the side inlet of port E (583a). The output of the E port (583a) is then routed to the side input of the E port (583b) and to subsequent E ports, passing through the E port (583c), and E port (583d), the E port (583e), E port (583f), E port (583g), and E port (583h) forming an E current (alarm current). The main input of the E port (583a) is connected to the maintenance work (j) (768) and the auxiliary input is connected to the depth overshoot (OV) (804).

[0446] The eleven E ports located at the beginning of the alarm chain, between the E port (583b) and the E port (583d) (from left to right) are fed with the digitized least significant bit input signals produced by their respective signal pressure controlling devices (or basic pressure controlling device in case of port E (583c)) coming from the I/O unit assembly at their respective main inputs: (s) state input least significant bit, (q ) query input least significant bit, (m) master/slave input least significant bit, (z) zero input least significant bit, (k) clock input least significant bit, (g) base input least significant bit (805) , (w) water replenishment least significant bit, (u) air replenishment least significant bit, (v) submersion input least significant bit, (r) reset input to least significant bit (801), (h) least significant bit help.

[0447] The main input of port E (583h) is supplied with the ppA alarm (811b). The E port main input (583g) is fed with the ppB A ne alarm (813b). The main input of the E port (583f) is fed with the state of the tube (pp) port (810Cb). The E port main input (583e) is fed with tube port (pp) status (810Db).

[0448] The resulting alarm function is: AL = OV A s lsb A q lsb A m lsb A z lsb A k lsb A g lsb A w lsb A u lsb A v lsb A r lsb A h lsb A (nA lsb A iA lsb) A (nB lsb A iB lsb A ne lsb) A (nC lsb A iC lsb) A (nD lsb A iD lsb).

[0449] The alarm function produces AL = 1 in case there is no fault and AL = 0 if there is a leak in any input signal (the corresponding least significant bit signal is low), if the base pressure is too high, or if any tube port presents a problem.

[0450] Figures 70 and 71 are further referred to in the operation section of this document.

[0451] Figure 72 is a top view of a section of a reactor containing tubes and joints showing cutouts to allow viewing of the attachment of elements within the tubes and joints.

[0452] Four tube elements (100a, 100b, 100c and 100d) are drawn connected by joints. The tube elements (100a and 100b) are connected by the 90 degree joint (127). The tube member (100a) is fixed to the 90 degree joint (127) by the clamp (110a) and the tube member (100b) is fixed to the 90 degree joint (127) by the clamp (110b). The cutout shows the attachment of the inner tube (103a) of the tube member (100a) to the inner guide (116a) of the 90 degree joint (127) by the inner clamp (107a).

[0453] The tube element (100b) is fixed to the 180 degree joint (132) by the clamp (110c) and the tube element (100c) is fixed to the 180 degree joint (132) by the clamp (110d). The cutout shows the attachment of the inner tube (103b) of the tube member (100b) to the inner guide (116b) of the 180 degree joint (132) by the inner clamp (107b). The tube element (100c) is fixed to the straight joint (113) by the clamp (110e) and the tube element (100d) is fixed to the straight joint (113) by the clamp (110f). The cutout shows the attachment of the inner tube (103c) of the tube element (100c) to the inner guide (116c) of the straight joint (113) by the inner clamp (107c).

[0454] Figure 73 is an isometric view of a portion of a reactor node with an attached tube element showing a cutout to permit visualization of the attachment of tube elements to the tube ports of the reactor nodes.

[0455] The reactor node (214) is drawn with only the tube port (125B) and the tube port (125C) visible. The tube door (125C) has no tube element attached to it, so that the position of the tube door (125C) and the inner guide (116C) can be clearly visible. The tube element (100) is fixed to the tube port (125B) by the clamp (110) and the inner tube (103) is fixed to the inner guide (116B) by the clamp (107). All tube elements are attached to the tube ports of the reactor nodes in this way.

[0456] Figure 74 is an isometric view of a portion of the wet reactor with multiple reactor nodes and suitably connected pipe elements.

[0457] A short tube element (106a) that has the same cross-section as a regular tube element but a much shorter length so that adjacent reactor nodes are close together is shown connected to the reactor node (214b). Tube elements and short tube elements interconnect reactor nodes, creating multiple paths between two reactor nodes. The tube member (100a) connects the reactor node (214a) to the reactor node (214b) and the tube member (100b) connects the reactor node (214b) to the reactor node (214c), creating a flow path. reactor node (214a) to reactor node (214c) over reactor node (214b). A second path is provided by the short tube member (106b) which connects the reactor node (214a) to the reactor node (214c) directly.

[0458] Likewise, the tube member (100c) connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214d) and the tube member (100d) connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node ( 214d) creating a path from the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214e) over the reactor node (214d). A second path is provided by the short tube member 106d which connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214e) directly.

[0459] The tube element (100e) connects the reactor node (214e) to the reactor node (214f), the short tube element (106c) connects the reactor node (214b) to the reactor node (214d), the short tube element (106e) connects the reactor node (214d) to the reactor node (214f) and the short tube element (106f) connects the reactor node (214e) to the next reactor node and so on . This creates a structure in which water flows from one reactor node to the next in the long path provided by the tube elements, and in the event that a leak occurs in the long path, an alternative path can be found using one or more tube elements. short to keep the reactor in operation. In the event a leak is detected, the affected reactor node takes appropriate action by closing the tube port where the leak was detected and opening another tube port to allow operation to continue and raising the flag (307) to facilitate location. problem by maintenance teams.

[0460] The detail of Figure 74E shows the reactor node (214c) and its connections. One set of eleven signal hoses (820a) connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214b) and another set of eleven signal hoses (820b) connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214e ). Signal hoses provide a means of transmitting signals between consecutive reactor nodes, allowing the exchange of information and commands between reactor nodes and a central control unit. An oxygen hose (821a) connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214b) and another oxygen hose (821b) connects the reactor node (214c) to the reactor node (214e), providing a means for extract the oxygen that accumulates in the reactor over a period of time. If a leak occurs in one of the signal hoses or in one of the tube elements (100b and 100c) or short tube elements (106b and 106d), the flag (307) is raised to facilitate identification of problem units by service personnel. maintenance.

[0461] The detail of Figure 74F shows how the signal hoses are connected on the transmission side to keep the next reactor node in the same hierarchy as the current one. The signaling hoses are installed in parallel, each connected to its corresponding counterpart at the next reactor node. The ready unit (Y) (168) (fourth from right to left) is left unused and zero output (Z) (169) (fifth from right to left) is connected to zero input (z) ( the fifth from right to left) at the next reactor node (see Figure 74G).

[0462] The detail of Figure 74G shows how the signal hoses are connected on the receive side to all reactor nodes. All signal hoses are connected to their corresponding counterpart on the previous reactor node, except the base (gnd) (180) (unused fitting is drawn in dashed lines for easy identification) which is not connected and the zero input ( z) (181) which can be connected to the ready unit output (Y) (168) (fourth from right to left) or to zero output (Z) (169) (fifth from right to left) (see Figure 74F and 74H).

[0463] The detail of Figure 74H shows how the signal hoses are connected on the transmission side to keep the next reactor node a slave to the current reactor node. The unit ready output (Y) (168) (fourth from right to left) is connected to the zero input (z) on the next reactor node and the zero output (Z) (169) (fifth from right to left) is left unused (see Figure 74G).

[0464] Figure 75 shows a perspective view of a possible configuration of a reactor node that has one of its tube ports disabled (tube port D in this case). The body of water (365) is drawn in ghost lines as a reference to identify the position of other components.

[0465] The tube ports that have not been disabled (A, B, and C) are equipped with the standard components: the port plugs (137A, 137B, and 137C), the ports (139A, 139B, and 139C), and the port springs. ports, the CO2 valve connections (148A, 148B and 148C), the CO2 valves (150A, 150B and 150C) and the CO2 valve springs.

[0466] The deactivated tube port D is equipped with a port stub (146) that replaces the port connection, the port and port springs, and a CO2 valve stub (159) that replaces a CO2 valve connection. CO2, the CO2 valve and the CO2 valve springs. The port stub (146) has a port stub seal ring (147) similar to the port connection gasket on the port connection to help seal the port cavity. The CO2 valve stub (159) has a CO2 valve stub seal ring (160) similar to the CO2 valve connection seal ring on the CO2 valve connection that helps seal the CO2 valve cavity . The CO2 valve stub (159) is also used to isolate sections of the wet reactor to allow CO2 pressure to be controlled at different levels in each section to deal with algae growth, resulting in different levels of CO2 consumption at the same time. along the reactor.

[0467] Additionally, to disable the D-pipe port, some components assigned to the D-pipe port need to be replaced in the I/O unit assembly. A CO2 pressure stub (822) replaces the CO2 pressure controller device D to prevent CO2 from escaping into the environment through the CO2 sensing tube (199D) or CO2 supply tube (200D). A water pressure stub (823) replaces the water pressure controlling device D to prevent water from escaping into the environment through the water sensing tube (197D) or the water supply tube (198D). A dual actuator stub (824) replaces the dual actuator that controls the port and CO2 valve on the D-tube port to prevent water from escaping through the port opening tube (193D), the CO2 valve opening tube (194D), the door shut-off tube (195D), and the CO2 valve shut-off tube (196D).

[0468] Another tube port (provided that the two tube ports are not both inputs or outputs) can be disabled by replacing the corresponding components, as explained in the two paragraphs above.

[0469] Figure 76 shows a partial isometric view of a reactor node, showing the module assembly (369), the lower air release cover (258), the upper left air release cover (259) and the flag (307) installed on the node core (215). A diagnostic device (825) and a pneumatic tool (831) are seen attached to the module assembly (369).

[0470] The diagnostic device (825) is composed of a diagnostic device body (826), a diagnostic connector (827), a diagnostic strip (828), a diagnostic high pressure supply hose (829 ) and a basic diagnostic supply hose (830). The body of the diagnostic device (826) is a portable battery-operated device similar to a notepad that houses all components necessary to implement its functionalities and an LCD touch screen for displaying information and receiving user input. The diagnostic connector (827) connects to the diagnostic port on the module assembly (369) and is connected to the body of the diagnostic device (826) by the diagnostic strip (828) which is composed of 22 individual flexible hoses connected together . The high pressure diagnostic hose (829) is connected to the high pressure water supply (using the (W) right water refill (166) or the (W) left water refill (178)) to provide power hydraulic and the basic diagnostic hose (830) is connected to the (gnd) base (180) to close the hydraulic circuit.

[0471] An air supply hose (832) connects the air-driven tool (831) to compressed air (using either the (U) right air fill (165) or the (U) left air fill ( 177)). Pneumatic tools are the ideal tools to use at sea to make the work of maintenance crews easier: they are smaller, lighter and do not pose the threat of short circuits like electrical counterparts. The air supply hose (832) can also be used to supply air to a diver, supply air to fill a buoyancy bag to prevent hardware from sinking, and other uses.

[0472] Figure 77 shows four arrows indicating possible culture water flows in and out of the reactor node (214). The arrow orientation shows the tube port inlets and outlets open in a specific configuration, as listed in the table in Figure 78. The four forward configurations have the arrows as indicated, and the four reverse configurations have the arrows inverted.

[0473] Figure 78 shows the eight configurations that are produced by installing the different router cards and introducing the corresponding pipe port redirection. The letters in the “Sequence” column indicate the priorities assigned to the pipe port pairs, the first letter is the input pipe port and the second letter the output pipe port. Priorities are assigned from left to right from 1 to 4. For example, if the router direct board is installed, configuration 1 will be output with the first priority BC, which means that pipe port B is the input and the C tube port is the output. If failures occur that prevent the opening of the first BC priority, the second BD priority, the third AC priority or the fourth AD priority will be attempted in this order (see Table 3). If a router card other than the direct router card is installed, a different configuration will be produced. The logic in the logical unit assembly remains the same, however, because the installed router board redirects signals from the tube port according to its design to different places, the logical unit assembly behaves differently, producing a new sequence of priorities. For example, if the router direct board is installed, configuration 5 will be output with the first priority BC, which means that pipe port B is the input and pipe port C is the output. If failures occur that prevent the first priority CB from opening, the second priority CA, the third priority DB or the first priority DA will be attempted in that order (see Figures 67 and 68).

[0474] Figure 79 shows a top view of a barge assembly (833) that contains the equipment (dry components) necessary to operate the reactor. The barge assembly (833) is composed of a floating structure (843), a CO2 storage unit (834), a CO2 extraction unit (835), a control and materials storage room (836), a O2 storage unit (837), an engine room (838), a fuel storage unit (839), a pump room (840), an algae separation unit (841) and an O2 storage unit (841) algae (842).

[0475] The floating structure (843) provides space, support, and buoyancy to hold other equipment. The CO2 extraction unit (835) contains the equipment that extracts CO2 and O2 from seawater. The CO2 storage unit (834) and the O2 storage unit (837) provide space for storing CO2 and O2 extracted as primary and secondary products from the CO2 extraction unit (835). The materials control and storage room (836) provides a space to store spare parts and consumables and work space to support maintenance staff. The materials control and storage room (836) also houses the monitoring system, computer and other hardware responsible for controlling and monitoring the reactor. The engine room (838) contains the engine and electrical generator that provide power to drive the equipment in the barge assembly (833) and the reactor. The fuel storage unit (839) provides storage for the fuel used by the engine. The pump room (840) contains the pumps that supply pressurized water and pressurized air. The algae separation unit (841) is used to separate the algae produced from the water culture into a concentrated slurry that is stored in the algae storage unit (842).

[0476] Figure 80 shows a top view of a culture unit (862). The culture unit (862) is comprised of a barge assembly (833) connected to a functional wet reactor comprised of multiple tube elements and short tube elements interconnected to the reactor nodes, creating alternate paths so that if one path is interrupted, an alternative path can be established. To achieve this a plan is prepared and the reactor nodes are configured according to the position in which they will be in the culture. To increase resilience against leaks contours are created at regular intervals creating sections that can be isolated in case multiple leaks make it impossible to find an alternative path within a faulty section. The arrows predict the direction of water flow leaving and entering the barge assembly (833) for reference.

[0477] A reactor node in configuration 1 (844) is configured to connect tube port B to tube port C in first priority (forward flow) creating a (180) degree bend that can be bypassed from the right or to the left. A reactor node in configuration 5 (848) is configured to connect tube port C to tube port B in first priority (reverse flow) creating a (180) degree bend that can be bypassed from the left or to the right. right. Most reactor nodes in the culture unit (862) are configured as reactor node in configuration 1 (844) or reactor node in configuration 5 (848) to construct "zigzag" shaped paths that go from one reactor node to the next and back covering as much surface area as possible. The remaining reactor nodes are configured in one of the remaining configurations to implement other connections with specific functions, such as a free connection to the barge assembly, a contour to a section or group of sections, etc. Some reactor nodes can be installed with a disabled pipe port to implement the planned paths.

[0478] A reactor node in configuration 2 (845) is configured to connect pipe port A to pipe port C in first priority (forward flow) and is useful for creating 90-degree left turns that can be bypassed straight ahead or from a 180 degree turn. A reactor node in configuration 6 (849) is configured to connect tube port D to tube port B in first priority (reverse flow) and is useful for creating 90-degree right-hand bends that can be bypassed either forward or from a 180 degree turn. A reactor node in configuration 3 (846) is configured to connect tube port B to tube port D in first priority (forward flow) and is useful for creating 90-degree left turns that can be bypassed by the right or to turn 180 degrees. A reactor node in configuration 7 (850) is configured to connect tube port C to tube port A in first priority (reverse flow) and is useful for creating 90-degree turns to the right that can be bypassed to the left or to turn 180 degrees. A reactor node in configuration 4 (847) is configured to connect pipe port A to pipe port D in first priority (forward flow) and is useful for creating straight lines that can be bypassed from, or through, the left . A reactor node in configuration 8 (851) is configured to connect tube port D to tube port A in first priority (reverse flow) and is useful for creating straight lines that can be bypassed from, or through, the right .

[0479] Figure 80 shows a pipe element connected to the barge (856), a pipe element in normal operation (857), a pipe element in standby (858), and a section in normal operation. Normally operating pipe elements are represented in shaded form indicating the algae inside. Pipe elements operating in standby mode are shown in white to differentiate them from pipe elements operating normally. A service boat (874) comes at regular intervals to replenish consumables such as fuel and nutrients and to collect the concentrated algal slurry produced.

[0480] Figure 81 shows a top view of a culture unit (862) comprised of the barge assembly (833) connected to a reactor in which leaks have occurred causing the reactor nodes to change from first priority connections to first priority connections. lower priority by activating standby pipe elements as a means to open alternative paths to keep the culture running. Problematic components such as a leaking pipe element (859a, 859b, 859c) and multiple failed section (861) are shown in white to differentiate them from a normally operating pipe element (857) and a normally operating section (860), respectively.

[0481] Fault bypassing is done when a reactor node detects a leak in one of its tube ports and reacts by opening an alternative path. The reactor node switching from BC to BD (852) reacts to a leaky tube element (859) detected at its output C-tube port and opens standby D-tube ports. A reactor node switching from BC to AD (854) detects normal pressure at an inlet tube port A, but cannot open tube port C due to another leaky tube element (859b) detected, so it opens the D-tube port. A reactor node switching from BC to AC (853) senses the normal pressure at the inlet A-tube port and opens its C-tube port. A deactivated reactor node (855a and 855b) has detected a leakage at its inlet pipe port and does not participate in the construction of the alternative path. Further explanation of leak detection and fault bypassing via alternative paths will be provided in the operation section of this document.

[0482] Figure 82 shows an isometric view of a protective cage (863) designed for use in areas visited by large algae-feeding animals such as stingrays and whale sharks to prevent them from reaching a tube element waiting for a meal. The roll cage (863) is comprised of a series of roll cage posts (864) connected by roll cage frame bars (865a and 865b) creating an external structure. A series of smaller roll cage structural posts (866) interconnected by roll cage frame bars (867) connect to the outer frame at the roll cage posts (864) providing structural integrity to create a structure capable of withstanding to the tensions created by waves and possible impacts from animals. The protective cage (863) is enclosed by a protective cage net (869) that is large enough to allow most animals to pass through without problems, only preventing large herbivores from reaching the reactor. A series of protective cage attachment lines (868) are used to secure the protective cage (863) to reactor components.

[0483] Figure 83 is an isometric view of the basic roll cage structure showing roll cage posts (864) connected by roll cage frame bars (865a and 865b). The roll cage posts (864) are hollow and contain a water ballast (870) and air bubbles (871). The level of water ballast (870) and the resulting buoyancy of the roll cage can be adjusted by injecting or venting pressurized air into roll cage posts (864). In the event that a leak in one or more roll cage posts and/or an air compressor failure causes a roll cage to go too deep or be unable to surface, an independent emergency system comprised of an emergency air supply (872) connected to a sealed emergency flotation device (873) is capable of bringing the cage to the surface and preventing its loss.

[0484] Figure 84 shows an isometric view of the culture unit (862) equipped with the protective cage (863). The service boat must stop outside the protective cage (863) to avoid hitting it.

[0485] Figure 85 is a top view of a cultivation set (875) composed of a grid of cultivation units (862) that may or may not be equipped with protective cages separated by corridors to allow access to service boats ( 874). The cultivation set (875) can cover vast areas of the ocean in certain regions specified by authorities that do not affect navigation, fishing, recreation, etc. Authorities may also close a specific area to other uses to establish a cropping complex (875) to help remediate ocean acidification or coastal dead zones.

[0486] Figure 86 is a schematic view of the CO2 extraction unit comprised of a seawater inlet filter (876), a water degasser (877), a condensed water cleaner (878), a discharge water (879), an engine (880), a vaporizer (881), a CO2 extractor (882), a CO2 separator (883), and an oxygen extractor (884). The CO2 extraction unit also has seven heat exchangers that are used to increase the energy efficiency of the processes: a heat exchanger 1 (886), a heat exchanger 2 (887), a heat exchanger 3 (888), a heat exchanger 4 (889), a heat exchanger 5 (890), a heat exchanger 6 (891) and a heat exchanger vaporizer (892).

[0487] The seawater inlet filter (876) collects seawater from a seawater inlet (893), filters a large portion of it, and returns the rest to a seawater discharge (894) for transport living organisms and unwanted debris or suspended material. The incoming filtered seawater is supplied pre-heated to the water degasser (877) via three different paths: 1) through heat exchanger 1 (886) entering through a cold water inlet heat exchanger 1 (895) and leaving the water degasser (877) through a hot water inlet heat exchanger 1 (896); 2) through the heat exchanger 3 (888) entering through a cold water inlet heat exchanger 3 (897) and leaving the water degasser (877) through a hot water inlet heat exchanger 3 (898); 3) through the heat exchanger 4 (889) entering through a cold water inlet heat exchanger 4 (899) and leaving the water degasser (877) through a hot water inlet heat exchanger 4 (900). The volume flowing in each path is adjusted to recover the heat available in the corresponding heat exchangers by monitoring the temperature at the hot water outlet of each heat exchanger.

[0488] Seawater in the water degasser (877) circulates through the heat exchanger 5 (890) passing through a cold water inlet heat exchanger 5 (905) and returning through a cold water inlet heat exchanger 5 (905) hot water 5 (906). In the heat exchanger 5 (890) the seawater is heated again by exchanging heat with the exhaust gases coming from the engine (880) through a hot gas inlet heat exchanger 5 (903) and leaving through a heat exchanger 5 (903) cold gas inlet 5 (904). If necessary, an extra heat source (885) provides additional energy to heat the seawater to a point that causes the dissolved gases to boil and leave the water degasser (877) via an evaporated gas tube (907 ) joining engine exhaust gases that have been cooled in heat exchanger 5 (890) and continuing through a hot gas inlet heat exchanger 3 (908) of heat exchanger 3 (888).

[0489] Heat exchanger 1 (886) and heat exchanger 2 (887) are part of the oxygen extractor (884) designed to remove excess culture oxygen from the reactor water to prevent oxygen-induced growth impairment of algae culture. The oxygen-containing culture water comes from the reactor of a cold inlet heat exchanger 2 (923), passes through a heat exchanger 2 (887) where it exchanges heat with warm seawater that has had its dissolved gases removed and is being discharged from the water degasser (877) by a hot water inlet heat exchanger (912). The temperature of the culture water increases causing the oxygen-rich dissolved gases to evaporate and be removed from the oxygen extractor (884) by an evaporated oxygen tube (926) to be stored or used elsewhere. At the same time, the temperature of the discarded seawater decreases to as close to ambient as possible, to avoid wasted energy and allow the discarded seawater to be safely returned to the ocean. The culture water leaving heat exchanger 2 (887) continues in a hot link of heat exchangers 2 and 1 (924), passes through heat exchanger 1 (886) exchanging heat with the filtered seawater that comes of cold water inlet heat exchanger 1 (895). The reactor culture water is cooled back to near ambient temperature so that it can be returned to the reactor by a cold exit heat exchanger 1 (925) and the incoming filtered seawater is preheated and enters the reactor degasser. water (877) through the hot water outlet heat exchanger 1 (896).

[0490] Incoming filtered seawater passing through heat exchanger 4 (889) exchanges heat with engine cooling water (880) coming from a hot water inlet heat exchanger 4 (901) and returns to the engine (880) through a cold water outlet heat exchanger 4 (902). This recovers wasted heat from the engine to preheat the incoming seawater before it reaches the water degasser (877) and keeps the engine (880) cooled to its operating temperature.

[0491] Incoming filtered seawater passing through heat exchanger 3 (888) exchanges heat with engine exhaust gases combined with evaporated seawater gases from hot gas inlet heat exchanger 3 (908 ). The temperature of the gases reduces the condensation of water vapor contained in the engine exhaust gases and is removed by a condensate drain heat exchanger 3 (910), going to the condensed water cleaner (878) which removes the contaminants to that condensed water can be safely disposed of in the environment. A cleaner outlet (911) takes the clean condensed water to join the discarded seawater that has been cooled and exited the heat exchanger 2 (887) through a cold water outlet heat exchanger 2 (913). A water inlet aerator (914) takes waste water to the discharge water aerator (879), where oxygen-enriched air (915) extracted from the reactor culture water is injected to make it safe for life. marine, so that it can be returned to the environment by a discharge of aerated water (916).

[0492] The combined engine exhaust gases and evaporated seawater gases leave the heat exchanger 3 (888) cooled to near ambient temperature and continue through a cold gas outlet of the heat exchanger 3 (909) to the vaporizer (881), where they pass through the vaporizer heat exchanger (892). The heat exchange causes the solid CO2 stored in the vaporizer (881) to be sublimated and the exhaust and evaporated gases to be cooled to below ambient temperature. The gaseous CO2 is removed from the vaporizer (881) and sent to the reactor via a gaseous CO2 supply to the reactor (922). Exhaust and evaporated gases continue through a hot gas inlet from heat exchanger 6 (917) to heat exchanger 6 (891), where they exchange heat with the exhausted CO2 gases coming from the CO2 separator (883) through a cold gas inlet from heat exchanger 6 (919) at almost -32°C, the CO2 deposition temperature. The depleted CO2 gases are heated and discharged into the atmosphere through a hot gas outlet of heat exchanger 6 (920) and the exhaust and evaporated gases are pre-cooled to almost -32°C and pass through a cold gas outlet from heat exchanger 6 (918) to the CO2 extractor (882). Because the exhaust and evaporated gas inlet has been pre-cooled, the CO2 extractor (882) is able to operate and reach the CO2 deposition temperature using less energy. As the CO2 settles, it is collected by the CO2 separator (883) and a solid CO2 supplier to the vaporizer (921) delivers it to the vaporizer (881).

[0493] Figure 87 is a schematic view of the algae separation unit comprising a flow divider (927), a culture diluter (928), an algae separator (929), an algae storage unit (932) ) and a flow divider (933) integrated with the oxygen extractor (884).

[0494] A reactor culture (934) is divided in the flow divider (927) into two parts: a culture for the dilutor (935) which is sent to the culture dilutor (928) to be diluted and a culture for the separator (936) which is sent to the algae separator (929) which separates a culture water phase (930) from an algae slurry phase (931). The algae slurry phase (931) is sent via an algae slurry conduit (937) to the algae storage unit (932), where it remains until the service boat arrives to collect it.

[0495] The culture water phase (930) is sent to the oxygen extractor (884) through the cold inlet heat exchanger 2 (923). The removed oxygen is sent through the evaporated oxygen tube (926) to the discharge water aerator which injects oxygen-enriched air into the discharge seawater to make it safe for marine life. The water from the oxygen extractor (884) passes through the cold outlet of heat exchanger 1 (925) and goes to the flow divider (933) which separates it into two parts: water for the diluter (938) and water for add nutrients (940). The water for the diluter (938) is mixed in the culture diluter (928) with the culture for the diluter (935) received from the flow divider (927) producing a diluted water in the reactor (939) which is sent to refill the reactor . The water to add nutrients (940) is mixed with the nutrients (941), producing an enriched water (942) that is sent to the compressor to feed the reactor and disperse the nutrients.

[0496] Figure 88 is an isometric view and Figure 89 is a side view of the algae separator (929). Both figures show the same components to provide a better view of the algae separator (929) and its operation. Since both are the same, the description is only given once for brevity.

[0497] The algae separator (929) is composed of a separator box (943), a concentrator (944) and a helical pusher (945). The separator box (943) provides support for the other components and containment for the water culture being processed. The helical pusher (945) has a helical shaft (946) that allows it to rotate supported by an inlet support (947) and an outlet support (948) attached to the separator housing (943). As the helical pusher (945) rotates, it scrapes algae from the inner surface of the concentrator and forces the incoming water culture through a mud inlet (949) to an increasingly smaller volume pressing the culture against the concentrator (944 ) which is made of a porous metal sheet that has openings small enough for water to be allowed through the microalgae. As more and more water is forced out and collected in a water outlet (951), the culture is progressively concentrated into an algal slurry that eventually exits in the slurry outlet (950).

[0498] Figure 90 is a diagrammatic view of the control unit located within the materials control and storage room. The control unit consists of a local computer (953a, 953b, 953c) connected to one or more interfaces (958a, 958b, 958c, 958d etc.), a set of analog to digital converters (961) and two sets of solenoid valves (964a and 964b).

[0499] Each local computer (953a, 953b, 953c, etc.) is connected to its respective local antenna (955a, 955b, 955c, etc.), which allows information from the farm unit where the local computer is located to be exchanged with a central computer (952) connected to a central antenna (954) via a satellite link (956). The central computer (952) collects information from all unit farms that are under its responsibility, generates problem records for maintenance teams, sends commands to the unit farms, for example, commanding a dive in case of a storm, produces reports for evaluation of the operation by management and other functions.

[0500] The local computer (953a) is connected to its interfaces (958a and 958b) by a data connection (957) which may use a cable or wireless connection. Interfaces (958a and 958b) are equipped in sufficient quantity to provide the required number of input and output ports to perform all required functions. The interfaces (958a and 958b) are connected to an input bus (959) composed of a series of input lines (960), each connected to an analog-to-digital converter (961) that collects the digital input signals. The interfaces (958a and 958b) are also connected to a dual output bus (962a and 962b) consisting of a series of pairs of output lines (963a and 963b), each connected to a solenoid valve (964a and 964b).

[0501] A set of long hoses (969a, 969b, etc.), equipped with quick release fittings (971a, 971b, etc.), each connected to a corresponding self-locking fitting (970a, 970b, etc.), which stops fluid flow in case of excess flow caused by a leak or when not connected to a hose transmit inlet and outlet signals. Input signals come from the reactor to the corresponding analog-to-digital converter (961). The output signal is produced by the pair of solenoid valves (964a and 964b) working in opposition, so that when one valve is open, the other is closed. The solenoid valve (964a) allows water from a high pressure vessel (965) to flow through a short hose (967a) and reaches a T-joint (968), and the solenoid valve (964b) allows water from the T-joint (968) enters a low pressure sink (966) via a short hose (967b). At any time, a high-pressure water supply or a low-pressure water sink is available at the T-joint (968), providing the intended control signal to its corresponding point in the reactor.

[0502] The local computer (953a) also issues commands and collects relevant information from other equipment, such as the engine, CO2 extraction unit, etc., using electrical connections to control and monitor all operations on the farm unit, maintain things running smoothly and reporting problems to the central computer (952).

[0503] Figure 91 is a schematic view of the main input, output and control signals at the reactor node.

[0504] A remote interface (972) handles signals entering or leaving each reactor node. Analog input signals entering the remote interface (972) are digitized by components within the I/O unit assembly, producing their corresponding digital versions which may be a single-bit signal or a 2-bit signal, depending on the case. . A local interface (973) handles signals occurring locally at the reactor node, digitizing the analog signals into one- or two-bit signals, depending on the case, and producing internal control signals. The logic components in the logic unit assembly process the digital signals from the local interface and the remote interface and generate low-power digital control signals to operate the reactor node and perform necessary actions such as opening or closing doors, raising the flag, etc. . The low-power digital output signals are then used to drive the power actuators in the I/O unit assembly to produce the analog output signals that actually control the reactor node and the signals that are transmitted over the remote interface (972 ).

[0505] All signals shown in Figure 91 are listed in Table 4. Some signals listed in Table 4, such as redundant input service signals, output service signals, and signals used in intermediate logic functions used only in the logic unit assembly , are not represented in Figure 91.

[0506] Table 4 lists the signals described in this document and the logic functions for concise reference. In Table 4, the symbol S identifies an accessible service or signal that is produced by service personnel. The symbol = means that the signal mentioned in the table line is interconnected with the signal listed on the right. The ^ symbol means that the analog input signal is digitized into the digital input signals to the right of the symbol. The symbol ^ means that the analog output mentioned in the table line is produced by the digital signal to the right of the symbol. The expression (4x) A B C D indicates that a version of the signal mentioned in the table row is available for each tube port. The expression (5x) A B C D indicates that a version of the signal mentioned in the table row is available for each tube port. The m/s expression is high (m/s = 1) if the master/slave signal (m) in most significant bit matches the reactor node configuration (m = 1 if the reactor node is configured as master; or m = 0 if the reactor node is configured as slave) or low (m/s = 0) otherwise. The symbol f means "set to 1" and the symbol | means "reset to 0" by the condition given to the right of the symbol.

[0507] Signals resulting from the digitization of an analog input signal in the I/O unit assembly (see Figures 62 and 63) have no reference number if: 1) the digitized most significant bit that regenerates the analog input is not used in no logical function; or 2) the digitized least significant bit that is low if a leak is detected in the input analog signal is used only to produce the alarm signal (AL) (see Figures 70 and 71). Table 4: List of signals

[0508] Figure 92 lists the sequence of states of the 7-bit linear power shift register produced by the Linear Power Shift Register (LFSR) implemented in the logic unit assembly when driven by successive pulses of the clock signal.

[0509] Figure 93 is a graph of water pressures at a given point on a unit farm that shows unregenerated water signals traveling from left to right producing a straight water pressure (975) and from right to left producing a back water pressure (976). At certain water replenishment nodes (974a, 974b, 974c, etc.), water pressure is replenished by connecting a high pressure water source directly from the compressors on the barge. At these points (974a, 974b, 974c, etc.), the pressure of all signals reaches a maximum. As water signals travel from left to right and right to left, pressure drops due to losses and the use of high pressure water to power the reactor nodes. As one signal travels progressively closer to the next water refill, reaching a point of lower water pressure (979), the signal traveling in the opposite direction has traveled a shorter path and has a higher water pressure (978 ). There is a pressure node equal to water (977), where the pressures end up intersecting.

[0510] However, because each reactor node uses both types of signals to build its internal high-pressure water supply that regenerates left-to-right and right-to-left signals, a medium pressure (980) is produced at each node, allowing smaller pressure fluctuations and producing regenerating signals that can go further than non-regenerating signals.

[0511] The bottom of the graph in Figure 93 is expanded to better show the internal working pressure range within the tube elements divided into four regions: Leakage 00; Wait 01; Operation 11; Closed 10 with the respective values of the digitized internal water pressure signals (i most significant bit, i least significant bit) used for leak detection and automatic routing of culture water. The average pressure (980), which is the maximum pressure within the reactor node that powers the logic and the various logic signals produced and transmitted can be much greater than the maximum water pressure within the tube elements. Because the tube elements are connected across the body of water within the reactor node, the base pressure follows the pressure within the tube elements. If the base pressure becomes too high, close to the average pressure, it can affect the logic circuits and operation of the reactor node such that an alarm is generated if the base pressure exceeds a threshold.

[0512] The values of the basic signal least significant bit (g) are close to the water pressure axis on the left. If the base pressure is within the working range of the internal pressure within the pipe elements, the base pressure controlling device will output least significant g bit = 1 indicating normal operation. If the base pressure is greater than the working range of the internal pressure within the pipe elements, the base pressure controlling device will output g least significant bit = 0. If g least significant bit = 0, the alarm (AL) goes low (AL = 0) signaling a problem caused by the base pressure value being too high.

[0513] Figure 94 is a graph of the signals sent and received by the local computer when communicating with the reactor nodes in the wet reactor. A set of time points: timing point 1 (981), timing point 2 (982), timing point 3 (983), timing point 4 (984), timing point 5 (985), timing point 6 (986), timing point 7 (987), timing point 8 (988), timing point 9 (989), timing point 10 (990), timing point 11 (991), timing point 12 (992), timing point 13 (993), and timing point 14 (994) help explain the operation of polling reactor nodes, which is done in the operation section.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION - FIRST RUN MODE

[0514] The wet reactor is assembled using the required number of appropriately connected reactor nodes, pipe elements, straight joints, 90-degree joints, and 180-degree joints. The wet reactor is then connected to the barge assembly to create a farm unit (see Figures 72, 73, 74, and 80).

[0515] Each reactor node is equipped with a set of modules appropriately configured to match the position that the reactor node occupies, allowing the wet reactor to operate as intended.

[0516] Figure 25 shows an exploded view of the module assembly. The module assembly consists of the module case (370), the logical unit assembly (432), the I/O unit assembly (403), and the expansion unit assembly (388) which also functions as a cover which closes the module box (370). The module canister (370) and expansion unit assembly (388) can be locked together using R-clamps on the module canister fasteners that secure the contents of the module assembly. Thereafter, the closed module assembly can be secured to the node core using R-clamps on the node core fasteners.

[0517] The module assembly is installed pre-configured on the reactor node and can be replaced later, if necessary, by maintenance teams. The I/O unit assembly has nine possible configurations: a standard configuration with all tube ports used, four configurations with one tube port not equipped (pipe port A, B, C, or D canceled with stubs), and four configurations with two tube ports not equipped (AD, AC, BC or BD tube ports canceled with stumps). Pre-assembled and pre-tested units can be kept in stock as the main part for installation in a new module assembly on a streamlined production line and kept in reserve as spare parts to replace defective units detected in the field.

[0518] Unlike the I/O unit assembly which has a reduced number (9) of possible configurations, the logic unit assembly can have multiple configurations and is in fact tailored to each individual reactor node in a specific wet reactor. The unit configuration is simple and does not require changes to structural components. The different configurations are implemented by varying eight components that are a subset of the logic components to produce a unique 7+1 bit address for each unit (resulting in (127) possible addresses in two modes or (254) possible configurations) and selecting one of the 8 router cards available to install in the router card insertion slot. As a result, to be used as a single specific part for installation in a new module assembly on a streamlined production line, pre-assembled and pre-tested units need to be properly identified and linked to a specific module assembly that will be installed. at a given reactor node. As each unit has its own configuration, it is not practical to have pre-assembled parts in reserve. Instead, it is better to keep a pool of components in stock, which can be used to build units in any of the 254 x 8 = 2032 possible configurations to replace defective units detected in the field, replicating your specific configuration.

[0519] The possibility of replacing a complete module assembly facilitates the work of maintenance teams, who can prepare a spare module assembly to replace a defective one installed in a reactor node operating at sea. The spare unit can be prepared and tested in a controlled environment, for example within a workshop or in a suitable room on a maintenance boat, avoiding unnecessary difficulties of working with small parts whilst subject to wave motion, water spray and dirt or other contaminants that could enter unwanted locations unnoticed and later affect the proper functioning of the unit. Once on site, maintenance personnel remove only the R-clamps that secure the module assembly to the node core, but not the R-clamps that hold the expansion unit assembly and canister assembly closed. together) and then exchange the defective unit for the new one and reinstall the R-clamps that were removed. This possibility of quickly and simply exchanging a defective assembly for a new, pre-tested one simplifies and speeds up maintenance work, reducing downtime and the risk of accidents by reducing the time that the maintenance team needs to be at sea and the complexity of tasks that need to be performed under dangerous conditions. All of these factors, in turn, contribute to reducing operating costs.

[0520] Some or all of the reactor nodes may be connected to an anchor assembly to secure the wet reactor in place and allow it to be lowered to a safe depth if necessary (see Figures 5, 5H, and 6).

[0521] The anchor assembly is lowered to the water-filled seabed so that it sinks to the bottom and is brought to the bottom ground a few centimeters either by its own wait or by means of outside assistance. Once the anchor assembly is at the bottom, water is pumped out through the anchor valve (286), reducing the pressure within the anchor body, causing the anchor assembly to be further directed toward the bottom of the vessel. sea by the hydrostatic pressure of the sea. Once the anchor assembly is in place, the anchor valve is closed and any attempt to raise the anchor assembly will cause the pressure within the anchor body to decrease and the hydrostatic pressure of the seawater will generate a strong opposing force. join the movement. This type of anchor is suitable for a sandy or muddy seabed and is capable of providing a very strong, fixed anchor point. For seabeds of different constitution, other types of anchors need to be used.

[0522] Figure 24 shows the reactor node with a cutout in the node core (215) to show the anchoring system components in place. The submergence tube open control (207) and the submergence tube close control (206) control the movement of the pump impeller assembly (325). If pressurized water is continuously injected into the submergence tube closing control (206) while low pressure water is collected at the submergence tube opening control (207), the pump impeller assembly (325) rotates in the counterclockwise by turning the cable winch (292) in the same direction. The teeth of the cable winch grip the anchor cable (287) and wind it toward the anchor assembly (282), allowing the reactor node to rise toward the surface until the cable winch (292) stops rotating or the limiter (290a) reaches the node core (215). The length of the cable is adjusted so that at this point the reactor node is at the surface. If pressurized water is continuously injected into the submergence tube opening control (207) while low pressure water is collected at the submergence tube closing controls (206), the pump impeller assembly (325) rotates clockwise by rotating the cable winch (292) and pulling the anchor cable (287) against the anchor assembly (282) attached to the bottom, causing the reactor node to submerge while the limiter (290a) sinks until the cable winch (292 ) stops rotating or the limiter (290b) hits the node core (215). The position of the limiter (290b) is adjusted so that, at this point, the reactor node is at the maximum depth desired to escape a hazardous weather condition or other reasons that may require the reactor node to be submerged from time to time. . The limiter (290a) and limiter (290b) serve as end-of-switch safety guards that prevent the anchor cable (287) from coming loose or the knot core (215) from submerging too deep.

[0523] The culture water is completely contained within the wet reactor. If an element of the tube becomes damaged, causing a leak, the affected reactor nodes will be able to detect the problem and isolate the faulty unit from the rest of the wet reactor.

[0524] Detecting a leak is done by monitoring the culture water pressure and CO2 at each tube port. The water sensing tube (197) conducts water from the near edge of the water body channel (366) to the module assembly so that the water pressure in the water body channel can be controlled and water leaks detected . The water supply tube (198) supplies water to the water body channel, allowing control devices within the module assembly to control water pressure if no leaks are detected.

[0525] The CO2 sensing tube (199) conducts CO2 from the near edge of the CO2 body channel (368) to the module assembly so that the CO2 pressure in the CO2 body channel can be controlled and leaks detected. The CO2 supply tube delivers CO2 into the CO2 body channel, allowing control devices within the module assembly to control CO2 pressure if no leaks are detected (see Figures 12, 13, and 14).

[0526] If a culture water or CO2 leak is detected at a tube port, its corresponding port (139) and CO2 valve (150) will be closed. Control of the CO2 port and valve that closes a tube port is done by its corresponding dual actuator within the I/O unit assembly commanded by a control signal produced in the logic unit assembly. The control signal is a function of the state of the various input signals and the priorities assigned to the tube port. In case a leak is detected, the affected pipe port is automatically closed. A pipe port in which no leaks are detected can be opened or closed depending on the assigned priority and the operational state of the other pipe ports.

[0527] If high pressure water is injected into the door opening tube (193) when the door is closed, the door is pushed out of the door connection (137) and opens. If high pressure water is injected into the door closing tube (195) when the door is open, the door is pushed toward the door connection (137) and closes. Door springs (145a and 145b) are used to ensure that in the event of a power failure, the door closes automatically. If high pressure water is injected into the CO2 valve (194) opening tube when the CO2 valve (150) is closed, the CO2 valve will be pushed out of the CO2 valve (148) connection and open. If high-pressure water is injected into the CO2 valve shutoff tube (196) when the CO2 valve is open, the CO2 valve (150) will be pushed toward the CO2 valve (148) connection and close. The CO2 valve springs (158a and 158b) are used to ensure that in the event of a power failure, the CO2 valve closes automatically.

[0528] The port opening tube (193) and the CO2 valve opening tube (194) are connected to the same termination point on the control port section of the main node core (190) and the closing tube port (195) and the CO2 valve shutoff tube (196) are connected to another same termination point on the control port section of the main node core (190) so that the port and CO2 valve open and close together. The dual actuator ensures that when the water pressure in the door opening tube (193) and the CO2 valve opening tube (194) is high, the water pressure in the door closing tube (195) and the CO2 valve opening tube (195) is high. of the CO2 valve (196) is low and vice versa, so that a consistent pressure difference is generated to push the port and the CO2 valve in the desired direction. (see Figures 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14).

[0529] If a failure such as a leak occurs in the reactor node, a flag is raised to facilitate identification of the defective unit in the field by maintenance crews. As seen in Figures 16 and 17, high-pressure water injected through the flag tube (201) pushes the flag piston (311) in the direction of the straight arrow, causing the flag piston (311) to slide into the cavity from the flag port (302) through the flag port connection (300). When the flag piston (311) is pushed in the direction of the straight arrow, the flag lever moves and rotates, causing the flag to move in the direction of the curved arrow and be lowered. If the water pressure pushing the flag piston (311) is reduced or a power failure occurs, the flag spring (314) pushes the head of the flag piston (312) in the opposite direction of the straight arrow, causing the flag moves in the opposite direction of the curved arrow and grows. The superimposed components show the positions at the extremes of the movement, so that when the flag (307a) is in the horizontal or rest position, the flag lever (310a) and the flag piston head (312a) are in the indicated positions ( The). When, on the other hand, the flag (307c) is in the vertical or alarm position, the flag lever (310c) and the flag piston head (312c) are in the indicated positions (c).

[0530] Each reactor node has a water pump that allows the water culture to be gently pushed forward throughout the wet reactor. The water pump components, the pump rotor assembly (325a) and the propeller assembly assembly (347) can be seen in their assembled position in Figures 15 and 19.

[0531] The pump impeller fits within a portion of the water pump cavity (231) in the impeller cavity (233) which has a circular shape with the axis offset from the axis of the pump impeller, so that the impeller of the pump (326) touches one side of the impeller cavity (233) between the pump supply pipe (208) and the pump exhaust pipe (209). The two pump vanes (334a and 334b) forced by the vane spring extend toward the walls of the impeller cavity (233), creating separate compartments in a standard liquid vane pump configuration. The pump supply tube (208) injects high pressure water into the impeller cavity, producing a force on the pump vane (334a), forcing the pump impeller (326) to rotate about the pump impeller axis (327 ) clockwise. As the pump impeller rotates, water between the pump vane (334b) and the pump exhaust pipe opening (209) is forced out through the pump exhaust pipe (209) to the pump vane (334b) passes through the opening of the pump supply tube (208) and the cycle is repeated producing a continuous clockwise rotation of the pump impeller, as long as high pressure water is fed through the pump supply tube (208 ). Water flowing in the pump exhaust pipe (209) passes through a check valve (339) that prevents water from the body of water that contains algal cells that can stick together in groups from moving into the impeller cavity when the water pump is off, avoiding a potential cause of interference. The exhaust water then continues through the pump exhaust head pipe (210) and the pump exhaust discharge pipe (211) to reach the body of water within the reactor node where it is discharged (see Figures 19, 19E and 19F).

[0532] The check valve is installed in an appropriately sized cavity with grooves the same size and shape as the check valve body (340) and the check valve bracket (342) cut into the bottom so that the shaft of the pipe is aligned with the center of the check valve body and the check valve bracket (342) are embedded in the grooves, causing the flange of the check valve body (341) to rest on the edge of the pipe wall that creates a lip where the check valve rubber rests (see Figures 18I, and 24F).

[0533] When water flows in the permitted direction, as indicated by the arrow in Figure 18I, the momentum of the water flexes the check valve rubber away from the check valve bracket and the edge of the pipe wall, creating a space through from which water can flow. When water tries to flow in the opposite direction, the rubber check valve (345) is pressed against the check valve bracket and the edge of the pipe wall stops the flow.

[0534] The detail in Figure 19F shows the positioning of the two ratchet drives (360a and 360b) located in the space between the front propeller shaft support (223) and the rotor shaft support (225). A cutout is made in the rotor shaft bracket (225) to show the ratchet spring (363) in position located around the pump rotor shaft (329) and compressed between the pump rotor drive flange (332). and the ratchet unit (360a). A second cutout is made in a section of the ratchet unit (360a) to show the teeth of the ratchet unit (362) on the ratchet unit (360b). The ratchet spring (363) keeps the two ratchet units (360a and 360b) in contact pressed together, so that when the pump rotor shaft (329) is rotating (just rotates clockwise) driving the ratchet unit (360a), the ratchet teeth (362) lock and the movement is transmitted to the ratchet unit (360b) which is connected to a propeller shaft that drives a left propeller (349) (in the case of configuration 1 illustrated). The remaining propellers in the propeller assembly assembly are driven by the external gears. If the pump impeller shaft (329) stops or reduces rotational speed while the impellers continue to rotate, pushed by the water flow in the water body, causing the ratchet unit (360b) to rotate faster than the ratchet unit (360a), the teeth of the ratchet unit (362) slide against each other, compressing the ratchet spring (363) until the ratchet drive teeth (362) slide one tooth. The teeth will continue to slide as long as the ratchet drive (360b) rotates faster than the ratchet drive (360a), preventing damage to the pump rotor shaft if the pump rotor stops (see Figure 21N).

[0535] In Figure 22, the reactor node (214) is drawn in ghost lines to show the body of water (365), the four tube ports, one in each section: A, B, C and D, and the four channels (366A, 366B, 366C and 366D) of the water body, so that the water culture path can be seen clearly. The culture water enters the reactor node at a tube port and descends through the corresponding water body channel to the lowest level where the propeller assembly assembly (347) is located. The pump cover (315) and pump impeller assembly (325) are shown for reference. If activated, the pump impeller assembly (325) on the water pump rotates clockwise and transmits motion to the propeller assembly assembly (347). The propellers in the propeller assembly assembly can be assembled in configuration 1 (forward flow) in which water is pumped from pipe openings A or B to pipe openings C or D or in configuration 2 (reverse flow) in which the Water is pumped from piping openings C or D to channel ports A or B. The ports (not closed) open and close water channels that direct culture water according to operating conditions. The reactor node implements the highest priority arrangement that operating conditions allow according to a preconfigured priority sequence. For example, assuming that the reactor node is assembled with propellers in direct flow configuration and the primary arrangement is to pump water from port B to port C (BC), under normal operating conditions the primary arrangement is implemented: the pump impeller is activated, ports A and D are closed, and ports B and C are open so that the water culture can be pumped according to the BC first priority route as scheduled. Following example, if a problem such as a leak is detected in the C tube port, the C port is ordered to close to prevent the water culture from escaping and polluting the environment, as well as external living organisms from entering and contaminating the culture. and water gate D is ordered to open so that water flow can continue via an alternative second priority route BD. If a second problem, such as another leak this time at pipe port B, is detected, port B must close and port A must open, so that water flow can still continue through a third priority alternative route AD. If a third problem is detected or a second problem is detected such that both inlet or outlet ports are unavailable at the same time, making it impossible to flow water through the affected reactor node, the ports on the affected pipe ports will be closed and the pump impeller is off.

[0536] To avoid compromising the oxygen-induced growth of the algae culture, it is necessary to remove oxygen from the wet reactor. This is done in two steps: 1) allowing the oxygen-rich air that accumulates within the wet reactor to be collected at each reactor node and reach a point in the air release assembly where it can be removed, and 2) removing the oxygen dissolved from the water remaining after separation of algae in the oxygen extractor

[0537] In Figure 22, the reactor node (214) is drawn in ghost lines to show the body of water (365), the four tube ports, one in each section: A, B, C and D, and the four channels (366A, 366B, 366C and 366D) of the water body so that the path of the culture water can be seen clearly. As the culture water flows through the channels (366A, 366B, 366C, and 366D) of the water body and each tube port A, B, C, and D, respectively, bubbles made of a mixture of air and other gases (primarily oxygen) are captured by an air release cutout (271A, 271B, 271C and 271D) at the top of each respective tube port and channeled to the air release chamber (270) from where the air mixture accumulates. it can be extracted or, if necessary, allowed to escape into the environment.

[0538] The detail in Figure 22E shows the components of the air release system in more detail. Air bubbles present in the water body (365) eventually pass through the air release cutout (271D) reaching the float cavity (279D) where the float (280D) is installed. As long as there is air in the float cavity (279D), the float (280D) sinks, opening access to the check valve (339D). Air passes through the check valve (339D) and continues into the long air release channel (268D) until the air release passage (269D) reaches the air release chamber (270). The right air release fitting (265) connected to the air release chamber (270) by the air release passage (269D) allows air to be extracted through a hose. Likewise, air bubbles collected in the air release cutout (271C) reach the float cavity (279C) where the float (280C) is installed. As long as there is air in the float cavity (279C), the float (280C) sinks, opening access to the check valve (339C). Air escapes through the check valve (339C) and continues into the short air release channel (267C) until the air release passage (269C) reaches the air release chamber (270). As air escapes, the water level rises within the air release cutout (271C) and float cavity (279C), causing the float (280C) to rise until it seals access to the check valve (339C ) and the short air release channel (267C), preventing water from flowing into the air release chamber (270).

[0539] The air accumulated in the air release chamber (270) can be vented by moving the air vent valve (272) so that the air vent release notch (276) is unobstructed, opening access to the check valve (339e) which allows air to escape into the environment, but prevents water and air from the environment from entering and reaching the air release chamber (270).

[0540] As a means of detecting leaks, the water culture and all signs of water and air within the wet reactor are maintained at pressures higher than the external water pressure. When wet reactor components are submerged, external water pressure increases, requiring a controlled corresponding increase in water and signal pressures to maintain pressure differential and the ability to detect leaks. This is achieved by using multiple controllers and using external water pressure as a reference pressure signal.

[0541] Figure 32 shows a top view of the controllers and actuators with the input and output connections to clarify the interaction between the components and the connections and operation of these components.

[0542] An input signal connected to CO2 pressure input 1 (508) or CO2 pressure input 2 (509) injects CO2 under pressure into the right side of the CO2 pressure controller cavity (459) pushing the device CO2 pressure controller (460) against the controller spring (491a) towards the reference pressure tube (507) until equilibrium is achieved. Any changes in input signal pressure or external water pressure will cause the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) to move accordingly until a new equilibrium position is reached.

[0543] If an opening in the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) aligns with a specific input at the top, the signal at that input is passed to the output below. In the position drawn in Figure 32, the CO2 pressure reset port (462) allows CO2 to pass from the CO2 pressure reset inlet (510) to the CO2 pressure supply outlet (512) below. Conversely, if the CO2 pressure control port (463) is not aligned with the CO2 pressure regulation inlet (511), CO2 will not be allowed to pass to the CO2 pressure supply outlet (512 ) below. At this point, the edge of the low CO2 pressure least bit port (464) is aligned with the low CO2 pressure least bit port (513) which has a low pressure signal (0) and the high port minus significant bit. significant bit of CO2 pressure (465) is not aligned with the high input least significant bit of CO2 pressure (514) which has a high pressure signal (1). The output signal passed to the CO2 pressure least significant bit output (515) below is low (0). This means that the pressure inside the CO2 tube is too low, indicating a possible leak, or that the system is still pressurizing after a reset.

[0544] Each time the system is turned on, a reset signal is temporarily activated to allow internal pressures to rise to the designed operating range. During the time the reset signal is active, CO2 under pressure is available at the CO2 pressure reset inlet (510) and the CO2 pressure reset port (462) allows CO2 to pass to the CO2 pressure outlet (462). CO2 pressure supply (512) below. CO2 injected into the system causes the pressure in the CO2 pressure inlet 1 (508) or CO2 pressure inlet 2 (509) to increase and, as a result, the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) moves to to the left, compressing the controller spring (491a). Since the CO2 pressure control opening (463) is aligned with the CO2 pressure regulating inlet (511), CO2 is allowed to pass to the CO2 pressure supply outlet (512) below, even that the reset signal is off and the CO2 pressure continues to increase, causing the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) to move further to the left until the CO2 pressure control opening (463) moves further from the CO2 pressure regulation inlet (511) and the CO2 flow stops. The CO2 pressure control port (463) is tapered on the right side so that as the CO2 pressure increases and approaches the design value, the CO2 flow slowly decreases until it stops. As the CO2 penetrates through the walls of the inner tubes into the body of water where the algae culture consumes it, the CO2 pressure in the input signal slowly decreases, causing the CO2 pressure controlling device (460) to return. to the right to the CO2 taper, the pressure control port (463) aligns with the CO2 pressure regulation inlet (511), allowing some CO2 to flow and top up the CO2 in the system, regulating the CO2 pressure.

[0545] Once CO2 from the CO2 pressure regulation inlet (511) is allowed to pass through the CO2 pressure control port (463), the least significant bit low CO2 pressure port (464) has been in addition to the CO2 pressure less significant bit low input (513) which has a low pressure signal (0), while the CO2 pressure less significant bit high input (465) is now aligned with the CO2 pressure less significant bit high input of CO2 pressure (514) which has a high pressure signal (1). The output signal passed to the CO2 pressure least significant bit output (515) below is low (1). This means that the pressure inside the CO2 tube is in the operating range and no leaks are detected.

[0546] If there is a leak in the system, the CO2 pressure at CO2 pressure inlet 1 (508) or CO2 pressure inlet 2 (509) will drop too quickly to allow additional injected CO2 to compensate for the pressure loss and the CO2 pressure controller device (460) moves to the right until it touches the edge of the CO2 pressure controller cavity (459). Once the CO2 pressure control port (463) has surpassed the CO2 pressure regulation port (511), no CO2 will be injected into the system, the least significant CO2 pressure low bit port (464) aligns with the CO2 pressure least significant bit input low (513) and the output signal passed to the pressure least significant bit output (515) below will remain low (0) until the leak is corrected by maintenance crews.

[0547] The rubber grille of the CO2 pressure controller (461) surrounds all openings and the main body of the CO2 pressure controller device (460) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through an opening does not leak into other openings.

[0548] An input signal connected to water pressure input 1 (516) or water pressure input 2 (517) injects pressurized water into the right side of the water pressure controller cavity (466) pushing the device water pressure controller (467) against the controller spring (491b) toward the reference pressure tube (507) until equilibrium is achieved. Any changes in input signal pressure or external water pressure will cause the water pressure controlling device (467) to move accordingly until a new equilibrium position is reached. For additional detail, the spring portion of the controller (491b) within the water pressure controller device (467) reaching completely until the central extension (489) of the controller is drawn in dashed lines. To avoid clutter, only the visible parts of the other controller springs are shown.

[0549] If an opening in the water pressure controlling device (467) is aligned with a specific input at the top, the signal at that input is passed to the output below. In the position drawn in Figure 32, the tapered portion of the water pressure control opening (470) is aligned with the water pressure regulating inlet (519), allowing water to pass to the water pressure supply outlet. (520) below. Conversely, if the water pressure reset port (469) is not aligned with the water pressure reset port (518), no water can pass to the water pressure supply port (520) below. At this point, the water pressure high bit port (471) is aligned with the water pressure high bit input (521) which has a high pressure signal (1). The port low water pressure least significant bit 1 (472) and the port low water pressure least significant bit 2 (473) are not aligned with the water pressure input low bit least significant bit (522) which has a sign low pressure (0). The output signal transmitted to the water pressure least significant bit output (525) below is high (1). The water pressure low bit opening (474) is aligned with the water pressure low bit input (523) which has a low pressure signal (0). The water pressure high bit opening (475) is not aligned with the water pressure high bit input (524) which has a high pressure signal (1). The output signal passed to the most significant bit output (526) below is low (0). The digital water pressure signal encoded (most significant bit, least significant bit) at this position is 01.

[0550] The openings in the water pressure controlling device (467) are constructed so that as the water pressure controlling device (467) moves from right to left, starting at the edge of the water pressure controlling cavity water pressure (466) until the water pressure control opening (470) is still not aligned with the water pressure regulation inlet (519), the opening lowers the least significant bit of water pressure 1 (472) remains aligned with the low inlet least significant bit of water pressure (522) and the low inlet most significant bit of water pressure (474) remains aligned with the low inlet most significant bit of water pressure (523), causing that the encoded digital water pressure signal (most significant bit, least significant bit) is 00 indicating a leak or that the system is still pressurizing after a reset.

[0551] Each time the system is turned on, a reset signal is temporarily activated to allow internal pressures to rise to the designed operating range. During the time the reset signal is active, pressurized water is available at the water pressure reset inlet (518) and the water pressure reset opening (469) allows water to pass to the water outlet. water pressure supply (520) below. Water injected into the system causes the pressure in water pressure inlet 1 (516) or water pressure inlet 2 (517) to increase and, as a result, the water pressure controlling device (467) moves to on the left, compressing the controller spring (491b). Since the water pressure control opening (470) is aligned with the water pressure regulating inlet (519), water is allowed to pass to the water pressure supply outlet (520) below, even until the reset signal is off and the water pressure continues to increase, causing the water pressure controlling device (467) to move further to the left until the water pressure control opening (470) moves further water pressure regulation inlet (519) and the water flow stops. The water pressure control opening (470) is tapered on the right side so that as the water pressure increases and approaches the design value, the water flow slowly decreases until it stops.

[0552] Once the left part of the water pressure control port (470) is aligned with the water pressure regulation port (519), the least significant bit high water pressure port (471) aligns with the high input least significant water pressure bit (521) and the low input most significant water pressure bit (474) remains aligned with the low input most significant water pressure bit (523), making the signal coded water pressure digital (most significant bit, least significant bit) is 01, indicating that the water pressure is in the operating range, within the controlled water pressure (standby) range.

[0553] As the water pressure control device (467) moves further to the left, the tapered portion on the right side of the water pressure control opening (470) will eventually no longer align with the water pressure regulation inlet. water pressure (519). At this point, the opening high water pressure bit (475) aligns with the opening high water pressure bit (524), and the opening high water pressure bit (471) remains aligned with the water pressure least significant bit (521) high input, causing the encoded digital water pressure signal (most significant bit, least significant bit) to be 11, indicating that the water pressure is in the operating range, above of the controlled range of water pressure (operation).

[0554] As the water pressure controlling device (467) continues to move to the left, the low water pressure bit least port 2 (473) aligns with the low water pressure bit low inlet (522) and the input high most significant bit of water pressure (475) remains aligned with the input high most significant bit of water pressure (524), causing the digital water pressure signal to be encoded (most significant bit, least significant bit) is 10, indicating that the water pressure is outside the operating range, above the controlled (closed) water pressure range.

[0555] If there is a leak, the water pressure in water pressure inlet 1 (516) and/or water pressure inlet 2 (517) will drop too quickly to allow additional injected water to compensate for the pressure loss and The water pressure controller device (467) will move to the right until it touches the edge of the water pressure controller cavity (466). As soon as the water pressure control port (470) passes the water pressure regulation port (519), no water will be injected into the system, the water pressure control device (467) will move completely to the right and the encoded digital water pressure signal (most significant bit, least significant bit) will remain at 00 (leak) until the problem is corrected by maintenance crews.

[0556] The rubber grille of the water pressure controller (468) surrounds all openings and the main body of the water pressure controlling device (467) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through an opening does not leak into other openings.

[0557] An input signal connected to the base pressure input (527) injects water under base pressure into the right side of the base pressure controller cavity (476) pushing the base pressure controlling device (477) against the controller spring in towards the reference pressure tube (507) until equilibrium is reached. Any changes in input signal pressure or external water pressure will cause the basic pressure controlling device (477) to move accordingly until a new equilibrium position is reached.

[0558] If an opening in the base pressure controller device (477) aligns with a specific input at the top, the signal at that input is passed to the output below. When the reactor node is turned on, the pressure within the water body may be as low as the external water pressure, causing the base pressure controlling device (477) to move completely to the right. The base pressure control port (479) aligns with the base pressure regulation inlet (528) and water is injected into the base pressure regulation outlet (529) below, causing the base pressure to increase and the control device base pressure control port (477) moves to the left until the right edge of the tapered portion of the base pressure control opening (479) moves away from the base pressure regulation inlet (528) and water flow stops. The base pressure may increase further after the water flow at the base pressure regulation outlet stops, depending on the operational state of the reactor node. While the basic pressure least significant bit high opening (480) is aligned with the basic pressure high bit least significant bit input (530) which has a high pressure signal (1) and the basic pressure least significant bit low opening (481) is not aligned with the low least significant bit basic pressure input (531) which has a low pressure signal (0), the output signal that passes the least significant bit basic pressure output (532) below is high (1), which means the pressure is within the operating range. A base pressure above the operating range causes the base pressure output least significant bit (532) to be low (0).

[0559] The rubber grid of the base pressure controller (478) surrounds all openings and the main body of the base pressure controller device (477) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through one opening does not leak into other openings .

[0560] A signal pressure inlet (533) injects pressurized water into the right side of the signal input controller cavity by pushing the signal pressure controller device (483) against the controller spring toward the signal pressure tube. reference (507) until equilibrium is reached. Any changes in signal pressure or external water pressure will cause the signal pressure controlling device (483) to move accordingly until a new equilibrium position is reached.

[0561] If an opening in the signal pressure controller device (483) is aligned with a specific input at the top, the signal at that input is passed to the output below. In the position shown in Figure 32, the high least significant bit signal pressure port (485) is aligned with the high least significant bit pressure signal input (534) which has a high pressure signal (1). The low least significant bit signal pressure port (486) is not aligned with the low least significant bit signal pressure input (535) which has a low pressure signal (0). The output signal transmitted to the output signal pressure least significant bit (538) below is high (1). The signal pressure low bit port (487) is aligned with the signal pressure low bit input (536) which has a low pressure signal (0). The input high signal pressure most significant bit (488) is not aligned with the input high signal pressure most significant bit (537) which has a high pressure signal (1). The output signal transmitted to the output signal pressure most significant bit (539) below is low (0). The encoded signal pressure digital signal (most significant bit, least significant bit) at this position is 01.

[0562] As the signal pressure controller device (483) moves from right to left, the encoded signal pressure digital signal (most significant bit, least significant bit) changes from 00 to 01 and then 11. A 00 indicates that the pressure on the particular signal is too low and the signal is invalid (an appropriate action, such as triggering an alarm, can be taken). A 01 indicates that the signal pressure is valid and the signal is low (0) and 11 indicates that the signal pressure is valid and the signal is high (1).

[0563] The rubber grille of the signal pressure controller (484) surrounds all openings and the main body of the signal pressure controller device (483) isolating each opening so that fluid passing through an opening does not leak into other openings.

[0564] The normally open mono actuator (493) has two actuator openings (504c) located on the same line, on the side closest to the actuator spring (506c). The input signal connected to the top input 3 of the mono actuator 1 (544) injects water at high pressure (1) or base pressure (0) into the left side of the mono actuator cavity. Another tube, such as the top input 1 of the mono actuator 1 (542) on the right side, is connected to the base ((542) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as indicated in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal provided on top input 3 of mono actuator 1 (544) ((542) = (544)) if no actuator spring is installed.

[0565] If an actuator spring is not installed, when signal (544) is high (1) the actuator will be pushed to the right side of the cavity against the opposite polarity signal (542) injected on the other side (0). When signal (544) is low (0), the actuator will be pushed back to the left of the cavity by the opposite polarity signal (542) injected on the other side (1).

[0566] If an actuator spring is installed, the actuator is pushed against the actuator spring and slides toward the right side of the mono actuator cavity where the actuator spring is located whenever the signal is high. The basic connection provided by the top inlet 1 of the mono actuator 1 (542) on the right side provides an exit route for the displaced water so that the actuator can slide into the cavity. When the signal is low, the actuator spring pushes the actuator back to the left side of the mono actuator cavity and the displaced water exits into the upper inlet 3 of the mono actuator 1 (544).

[0567] When the upper inlet 3 of the mono actuator 1 (544) is supplied with water at basic pressure (0), the actuator spring (506c) extends to its maximum extension (inactive position), pushing the mono actuator normally open (493) completely to the left of the mono actuator cavity, causing both actuator openings (504c) to align with source 1 of mono actuator 1 (545) and source 2 of mono actuator 1 (546) and opening the passage to output 1 of mono actuator 1 (547) and output 2 of mono actuator 1 (548), respectively. When the upper inlet 3 of the mono actuator 1 (544) is filled with high pressure water (1), the normally open mono actuator (493) moves completely to the right of the mono actuator cavity, the actuator spring (506c) is at maximum compression (active position), both actuator openings (504c) move away from source 1 of mono actuator 1 (545) and source 2 of mono actuator 2 (546) closing the passage to output 1 of mono 1 of mono actuator 1 (547) and output 2 of mono actuator 1 (548), respectively.

[0568] At any time, the outputs (547 and 548) will be connected to a water supply and will have a significant logic value (high or low) or disconnected from a water supply and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state), depending on the position of the normally open mono actuator (493) in the mono actuator cavity.

[0569] The normally closed mono actuator (495) has two actuator openings (504d) located on the same line, on the side closest to the actuator spring (506d). For additional information, the actuator spring portion (506d) within the actuator spring hole is drawn in dashed lines. The input signal connected to side input 1 of the mono actuator 2 (550) injects water at high pressure (1) or base pressure (0) into the left side of the mono actuator cavity. Another tube, such as mono actuator 2 top input 1 (549) on the right side, is connected to the base ((549) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as indicated in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal provided at side inlet 1 of mono actuator 2 (550) ((549) = -(550)) if no actuator spring is installed.

[0570] When side inlet 1 of mono actuator 2 (550) is filled with high pressure water (1), the normally closed mono actuator (495) moves completely to the right of the mono actuator cavity, the actuator spring (506d) is at maximum compression (active position), both actuator openings (504d) align with source 1 of mono actuator 2 (551) and source 2 of mono actuator 2 (552) opening the passage to output 1 of mono actuator 2 (553) and output 2 of mono actuator 2 (554), respectively, as indicated in Figure 32. When side inlet 1 of mono actuator 2 (550) is supplied with water at basic pressure (0), the actuator spring (506d) extends to its maximum extension (inactive position), pushing the normally open mono actuator (495) completely to the left of the mono actuator cavity, causing both actuator openings (504d) to move away from source 1 of mono actuator 2 (551) and from source 2 of mono actuator 2 (552) closing the passage to output 1 of mono actuator 2 (554), respectively.

[0571] At any time, the outputs (553 and 554) will be connected to a water supply and will have a significant logic value (high or low) or disconnected from a water supply and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state), depending on the position of the normally open mono actuator (495) in the mono actuator cavity.

[0572] The mono actuator (497a) has two actuator openings (504a) located in alternate rows, one on the spring side of the actuator and one on the opposite spring side of the actuator. When the upper inlet 2 of the mono actuator 4 (564) is filled with high pressure water (1), the mono actuator (497a) moves fully to the right of the mono actuator cavity, compressing the actuator spring to its maximum compression (active position), the opening of the actuator (504a) aligns with the source 2 of the mono actuator 4 (566). When the upper inlet 2 of the mono actuator 4 (564) is supplied with water at base pressure (0), the actuator spring extends to its maximum extension (inactive position), pushing the mono actuator (497) completely to the left of the mono actuator cavity, causing the other actuator opening to align with source 1 of mono actuator 4 (565) as indicated in Figure 32.

[0573] The mono actuator 4 top input 1 (563) on the right side of the mono actuator cavity is connected to the base ((563) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as indicated in Figure 32) or the polarity opposite of the signal provided at the top input 2 of mono actuator 4 (564) ((563) = (564)) if no actuator spring is installed.

[0574] A single mono actuator 4 output 1 (567) located at the bottom of the mono actuator cavity combines the two inputs: mono actuator 4 source 1 (565) and mono actuator 4 source 2 (566) producing a single power output which is a logical function of the upper opening 2 of the mono actuator 4 (564), of the source 1 of the mono actuator 4 (565) and of a source 2 of the mono actuator 4 (566). The output result depends on the orientation of the mono actuator. If the mono actuator (497a) is installed as shown in Figure 32, the function is:

[0575] (567) = (-(564) A (565)) v ((564) A (566)).

[0576] If the mono actuator is installed facing around the axis of symmetry of the spring hole:

[0577] (567) = (-(564) A (565)) v ((564) A (566)).

[0578] The mono actuator (497b) is the same component as the mono actuator (497a), but it was installed inverted with respect to the axis of symmetry around the actuator spring hole when compared to the mono actuator (497a). For additional information, the portion of the actuator spring (506b) within the actuator spring hole is drawn in dashed lines.

[0579] The input signal connected to side input 4 of the mono actuator 3 (558) injects water at high pressure (1) or basic pressure (0) into the left side of the mono actuator cavity. Another tube, such as the top input 3 of mono actuator 3 (557) on the right side, is connected to the base ((549) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as indicated in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal provided on side inlet 4 of mono actuator 3 (558) ((557) = -(558)) if no actuator spring is installed.

[0580] Unlike the cavity containing mono actuator (497a) which has only one power output: output 1 of mono actuator 4 (567), the mono actuator cavity containing a mono actuator (497b) has two independent power outputs: output 1 of mono actuator 3 (561) and output 2 of mono actuator 2 (562) generating two switched power outputs.

[0581] With the mono actuator (497b) installed as shown in Figure 32, if side input 4 of mono actuator 3 (558) is low, output 2 of mono actuator 3 (562) will be connected to output 2 of the mono actuator 3 (560) and will have a logic of significant value (high or low) and output 1 of mono actuator 3 (561) will be disconnected from source 1 of mono actuator 3 (559) and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state). If side input 4 of mono actuator 3 4 (558) is high, output 1 of mono actuator 3 (561) will be connected to source 1 of mono actuator 3 (559) and will have a significant logic value (high or low) and output 2 of mono actuator 3 (562) will be disconnected from source 2 of mono actuator 3 (560) and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state).

[0582] In case the mono actuator (497b) is not installed as shown in Figure 32 but inverted around the spring symmetry axis hole, when the input (558) is low, the output (561) will be connected to the power supply (559) and will have a significant logic value (high or low) and the output (562) will be disconnected from the source (560) and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state) considering that, if the input (558) is high, the output (562) will be connected to the power supply (560) and will have a significant logic value (high or low) and the output (561) will be disconnected from the power supply (559) and will have an indeterminate logic value (third state).

[0583] The dual actuator (500) has three alternative actuator openings (504e) located on three lines perpendicular to the axis of symmetry, one on the side of the actuator spring (506e), one on the opposite side of the actuator spring (506e) and one in the middle of the double actuator (500) on the alternate side.

[0584] The input signal connected to the upper input 2 of the dual actuator (569) injects water at high pressure (1) or basic pressure (0) into the left side of the dual actuator cavity. Another tube, such as the top input 1 of the dual actuator (568) on the right side, is connected to the base ((568) = 0) if an actuator spring is installed (as indicated in Figure 32) or the opposite polarity of the signal provided at the upper input 2 of the dual actuator actuator (569) ((568) = -(569)) if no actuator spring is installed.

[0585] A double actuator top source 1 (570), a double actuator top source 2 (571), a double actuator top source 3 (572) and a double actuator top source 4 (573), located in the top of the dual actuator cavity (499), provide four input power signals to the actuator. Dual Actuator Output 1 (574) located at the bottom of the cavity combines the two inputs above: Dual Actuator Top Source 1 (570) and Dual Actuator Top Source 2 (571) and Dual Actuator Output 2 (574) 575) located at the bottom of the cavity combines the other two inputs above: the upper source 3 of the double actuator (572) and the upper source 4 of the double actuator (573).

[0586] When the upper inlet 2 of the double actuator (569) is supplied with water at basic pressure (0), the actuator spring (506e) extends to its maximum extension (inactive position), pushing the double actuator (500 ) completely to the left of the dual actuator cavity, causing the actuator openings (504e) to align with the upper source 1 of the dual actuator (570) and the upper source 4 of the dual actuator (573) as indicated in Figure 32 When the upper inlet 2 of the dual actuator (569) is filled with high pressure water (1), the dual actuator (500) moves completely to the right of the dual actuator cavity, the actuator spring (506e) is in maximum compression (active position) and actuator openings (504e) align with the top source 2 of the dual actuator (571) and the top source 3 of the dual actuator (572).

[0587] The logic functions produced depend on the orientation of the dual actuator. If dual actuator is installed as shown in Figure 32:

[0588] (574) = (-(569) A (570)) v ((569) A (571)); (575) = (-(569) A (573)) v ((569) A (572)).

[0589] If the dual actuator is installed facing around the axis of symmetry of the spring hole:

[0590] (574) = (-(569) to (570)) v ((569) to (571)); (575) = (-(569) to (572)) v ((569) to (573)).

[0591] Using a spring is an effective way to ensure that a component returns to an off (or home) position in the event of a power failure. It is also a way to reduce the required number of components (and complexity) in a design, since only the input signal must be produced and routed to the cavities (a connection to a base plane is generally much easier to make than which directs an additional signal from a specific location within a cavity).

[0592] In some applications, a component (actuator or logic component) may be used without a spring. In this case, unless an active state is present, the component remains motionless. An active state is when a signal (high or low) is injected into one side of the cavity and the opposite polarity of the signal (low or high, respectively) is injected into the other side of the cavity. An inactive state is when the same signal (low or high) is injected into both sides of the cavity. In case an active state is present, one input will have high pressure water (1) and the other will be connected to the base (0) and the component will be pushed to the side that has the low signal. Otherwise, the component will remain motionless. This is a way to implement a defined reset register (memory).

[0593] Figure 35 shows several cavities with respective logic components in place and corresponding input and output connections that implement example logic functions.

[0594] When the main E 1 (619) is low (0) the logic spring (686a) extends out of the E 1 gnd (618) and pushes the E gate (583) towards the edge of the E 1 cavity ( 617) causing the E gate (583a) to be in its inactive position ((583a)θ 0). The connections on the E port (583a) isolate the E 1 input (620) and connect the E 1 output (621) to the free E 1 (622) which is connected to the base (0). As in this case (619) = 0, then (621) = 0, regardless of the (620), as needed to implement the (621) = (619) A (620).

[0595] When the main E 2 (625) is low (0) the logic spring (686b) extends out of the auxiliary E 2 (624) and pushes the E gate (583) towards the edge of the E 2 cavity ( 623) causing the E port (583b), which was installed in an inverted position compared to the E port (583a), to be in its inactive position ((583b)θ 0). The connections on the E port (583b) isolate the free E 2 (628) and connect the E 2 input (626) to the E 2 output (627). In this example, (625) = 0, which causes the output to be (627) = (626), as needed to implement (627) = (625) TO (626).

[0596] The main E 3 (631) supplies the main input to the OR gate (579a). One of four options: input 1 AND 3 OR (632), input 2 AND 3 OR (633), input 3 AND 3 OR (634) or input 4 AND 3 OR (635) is required to provide the other logic input to the OR gate (579a). For simplicity, it is assumed that input 1 AND 3 OR (632) is the second input selected for the OR gate (579a). When both inputs (631 and 632) are low (0), the logic spring (686c) extends out of the auxiliary E3 (630) and pushes the AND gate (583c) to the OR gate (579a) to the OR (579a) touches the edge of the E 3 cavity (629) causing both the OR gate (579a) and the E gate (583c) to be in their inactive positions ((579a) θ 0 ; (583c) θ 0). The connections on the E port (583c) isolate the E 3 input (636) and connect the E 3 output (637) to the free E 3 (638) which is connected to the base (0). As in this example (631) = 0; (632) = 0 => (631) v (632) = 0, yielding (637) = 0, independently of (636), as necessary to implement the (637) = ((631) v (632)) A ( 636).

[0597] Main SEL 1 (641) supplies the main input to the OR gate (579b). One of four options: input 1 SEL 1 OR (642), input 2 SEL 1 OR (643), input 3 SEL 1 OR (644), input 4 SEL 1 OR (645) is required to provide the other logic input for the OR gate (579b). For simplicity, it is assumed that input 1 SEL 1 OR (642) is the second input selected for the OR gate (579b). When both inputs (641 and 642) are low (0), the logic spring (686d) extends out of the auxiliary SEL 1 (640) and pushes the SEL gate (589a) to the OR gate (579b) to the OR (579b) touches the edge of the SEL cavity 1 (639) causing both the OR gate (579b) and the SEL gate (589a) to be in their inactive positions ((579b) θ 0; (589a) θ 0). The connections on the SEL port (589a) isolate input 1 SEL 1 (646) and connect output 1 SEL 1 (647) to free SEL 1 1 (648) which is connected to the base (0). The connections on the SEL port (589a) isolate the free SEL 1 2 (651) and connect the 2 SEL 1 output (650) to the 2 SEL 1 input (649). In this case (641) = 0; (642) = 0 => (641) v (642) = 0 producing (647) = ((641) v (642)) A (646) = 0; (650) =((641) v (642)) A (649) = (649).

[0598] The EXCLUSIVE OR gate (596) is held in place by two long logic springs (687a and 687b). When the EXCLUSIVEOU signal 1 (653) and the EXCLUSIVEOU signal 2 (654) are equal (both low or both high) the EXCLUSIVEOU gate (596) remains in the center of the EXCLUSIVEOU cavity (652). The EXCLUSIVEOR port connections isolate input 1 EXCLUSIVEOR (655) which is connected to high (1) and connect output 1 EXCLUSIVEOR (656) to free EXCLUSIVEOR 1 (657) which is connected to base (0) implementing (656) = ( 653) symbol (654) = 0 (EXCLUSIVEOR function). The EXCLUSIVEOU port connections also isolate the free EXCLUSIVEOURO 2 (660) which is connected to base (1) and connect output 2 EXCLUSIVEOU (659) to input 2 EXCLUSIVEOU (658) which is connected to high (1) implementing (659) = (653) = (654) = 1 (equivalent function).

[0599] The concept of inactive and active positions can be extended to consider the EXCLUSIVE OR gate (596) having an inactive position to be ((596) θ 0) when the EXCLUSIVE OR gate (596) is in the center of its cavity as indicated in Figure 35 and two active positions: ((596) θ -1) and ((596) θ 1) when the EXCLUSIVE OR gate (596) is at either end of its cavity, depending on the polarities of the input signals signal 1 EXCLUSIVEOR (653) and sign 2 EXCLUSIVEOR (654) so that if (653) = 0; (654) = 1 => (596) θ -1 and if (653) = 1; (654) = 0 => (596) θ 1.

[0600] Since no spring is installed, appropriate connections must be in place to allow the SEL port (589b) to move. For this purpose, the auxiliary SEL 2 (662) is provided with the main input negated ((662) = (663)) so that, as indicated in Figure 35, when the main SEL 2 (663) is low (0) , auxiliary SEL 2 (662) is high (1). The SEL port (589b) is moved within the SEL cavity 2 (661) all the way towards the main SEL 2 (663) causing the SEL port (589b) to be in its inactive position ((589b) θ 0). The connections on the SEL port (589b) isolate SEL 2 (664) input 1 and SEL 2 (665) output 1 (as there are no connections on top of the SEL 2 (661) cavity). At the same time, connections on the SEL port (589b) connect input 2 SEL 2 (666) to output 2 SEL 2 (667). As at any time, regardless of the position of the SEL port (589b), one input is always isolated and there are no top connections that could cause a short circuit between a signal with different polarity and the other input through the SEL port connections (589b ), the SEL 2 output connection (668) can be constructed by connecting outputs (665 and 667) producing a combined output.

[0601] (668) = (-(663) A (666)) v ((663) A (664)).

[0602] If the entries (664 and 666) are made complementary ((666) = (664)),

[0603] (668) = (-(663) A (664)) v ((663) A (664)), or (668) = (663) s (664); (668) = (663) symbol (666).

[0604] When the main SW (671) is low (0) the logic spring (686e) extends out of the auxiliary SW (670) and pushes the SW gate (602) towards the edge of the SW cavity (669) making so that the SW port (602) remains in its inactive position ((602)θ 0). The connections on the SW port (602) connect input 1 SW (672) to monitor 1 SW (673) and output 1 SW (674). At the same time, the connections on the SW port (602) also connect the 2 SW input (675) to the 2 SW monitor (676) and the 2 SW output (677). In this position, the inputs at the back (672 and 675) are connected to the outputs below (674 and 677 respectively). The monitors at the top (673 and 676 respectively) are also connected, allowing the lines to be monitored.

[0605] The external depth water pressure tube (679) injects water at external pressure into the depth sensor cavity (678) pushing the depth detector (689) against the depth sensor (688) which compresses the air inside of the depth sensor (688) until balance is reached. Any changes in external water pressure will cause the depth finder (689) to move accordingly until a new equilibrium position is reached. If a slot in the depth detector (689) is aligned with a specific input at the top, the signal at that input is passed to the output below. The depth sensor inlet shield (691) allows water from the external water pressure tube (679) to enter the depth sensor cavity (678), even when the depth sensor (689) is at the end of your tour. The rubber grille of the depth detector (690) surrounds all slots and the main body of the depth detector (689) isolates each slot so that fluid passing through one slot does not leak into other slots.

[0606] In the position shown in Figure 32, the depth 1 least significant bit high pressure slot (692) is aligned with the depth least significant bit high pressure slot (534) which has a high pressure sign ((681) = 1). The least significant bit high pressure slot of depth 2 (694) is isolated and has no effect. The gnd least significant bit depth slot (693) is not aligned with the gnd least significant bit depth (680) which has a low pressure signal ((680) = 0). The output signal transmitted at (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is high ((684) = (681) = 1). The high pressure depth most significant bit slot (695) is aligned with the high pressure depth most significant bit (682) which has a high pressure sign ((682) = 1). The gnd most significant bit depth slot (696) is not aligned with the gnd most significant bit depth (683) which has a low pressure signal ((683) = 0). The output signal transmitted at the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is high ((685) = (682) = 1). The depth position is encoded (685), (684) = 11 (surface).

[0607] As the reactor node continues to submerge, water pressure increases, causing the depth sensor (689) to move and compress the depth sensor (688). The encoded depth position given by the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) and the (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) changes from (685, 684) = 11 (surface) to (685, 684) = 10 (submerged) and then to (685, 684) = 00 (at the defined depth) and to (685, 684) = 01 (very deep).

[0608] Figure 36 shows various cavities and corresponding input and output connections with respective logic components in place in a different position than seen in Figure 35 and from a different point of view to provide additional details about the implemented logic functions.

[0609] When the main E 1 (619) is high ((619) = 1), the E gate (583a) moves towards the edge of the E 1 cavity (617), compressing the logic spring (686a) in the E 1 auxiliary (618), causing the E port (583a) to be in its active position ((583a) θ 1). Connections at port E (583a) isolate free E 1 (622) and connect output E 1 (621) to input E 1 (620) ((621) = (620)). As in this case (619) = 1, then (621) = (620), as needed to implement (621) = (619) A (620).

[0610] When the main E 2 (625) is high ((625) = 1), the E gate (583b) moves towards the edge of the E 2 cavity (623), compressing the logic spring (686b) in the E 2 auxiliary (624), causing the E port (583b) to be in its active position ( ~(583b) θ 1). The E port (583b) is installed in an inverted position in relation to the E port (583a), in this position, the connections on the E port (583b) isolate the input E 2 (626) and connect the output E 2 (627) to the free E 2 (628) which is connected to the base ((627) = (628) = 0). In this example, (625) = 1, then (625) = 0, resulting in (627) = 0, regardless of (626) as needed to implement (627) = (625) A (626).

[0611] The main E 3 (631) supplies main input to the OR gate (579a). One of four options: input 1 AND 3 OR (632), input 2 AND 3 OR (633), input 3 AND 3 OR (634) or input 4 AND 3 OR (635) is required to provide the other logic input to the OR gate (579a). For simplicity, it is assumed that input 1 AND 3 OR (632) is the second input selected for the OR gate (579a). In this example, (631) = 1 and (632) = 0, the OR gate (579a) is pushed against the AND gate (583c), moving it toward the edge of the E 3 cavity (629) compressing the logic spring ( 686c) in the auxiliary E 3 (630) causing the OR gate (579a) and the AND gate (583c) to be in their active positions ((579a) θ 1; (583c) θ 1). Connections at port E (583c) isolate free E 4 (638) and connect output E 3 (637) to input E 3 (636) ((637) = (636)). Since in this example (631) = 1 and (632) = 0, then (631) v (632) = 1 producing (637) = ((631) v (632)) A (636) = (636).

[0612] Main SEL 1 (641) supplies the main input to the OR gate (579b). One of four options: input 1 SEL 1 OR (642), input 2 SEL 1 OR (643), input 3 SEL 1 OR (644), input 4 SEL 1 OR (645) is required to provide the other logic input for the OR gate (579b). For simplicity, it is assumed that input 1 SEL 1 OR (642) is the second input selected for the OR gate (579b). In this example, (641) = 0 and (642) = 1, as a result, the high pressure at the SEL 1 OR 1 inlet (642) pushes the OR gate (579b) and the SEL gate (589a) to opposite sides of the SEL cavity 1 (639). The OR gate (579b) moves to its rest position ((579b) θ 0) and the SEL gate (589a) moves to its active position ((589a) θ 1) compressing the logic spring (686d) in the auxiliary SEL 1 (640). The connections on the SEL port (589a) isolate the free SEL 1 1 (648) and connect the SEL 1 output 1 (647) to the SEL 1 input 1 (646) ((647) = (646)). The connections on the SEL port (589a) isolate input 2 SEL 1 (649) and connect output 2 SEL 1 (650) to free SEL 1 2 (651) which is connected to the base ((650) = (651) = 0 ). As in this example (641) = 0 and (642) = 1, (641) v (642) = 1. As a result, the outputs become: = ((641) v (642)) A (646) = ( 646); (650) = ((641) v (642)) A (649) = 0.

[0613] The EXCLUSIVE OR gate (596) is held in place by two long logic springs (687a and 687b). When signal 1 EXCLUSIVEOR (653) is low ((653) = 0) and signal 2 EXCLUSIVEOR (654) is high ((654) = 1) the EXCLUSIVEOR gate (596) moves to the edge of the EXCLUSIVEOR cavity ( 652) where the input signal is low (signal 1 OREXCLUSIVE (653)) ((596) θ -1). The EXCLUSIVEOU port connections isolate the free EXCLUSIVEOR 1 (657) which is connected to base ((657) = 0) and connect output 1 EXCLUSIVEOR (656) to input 1 EXCLUSIVEOR (655) which is connected to high ((656) = (655) = 1) producing (656) = (653) (654) = 1. The EXCLUSIVEOR port connections also isolate EXCLUSIVEOR input 2 (658) which is connected high ((658) = 1) and connect to output 2 EXCLUSIVEOU (659) to free EXCLUSIVEOU 2 (660) which is connected to the base ((659) = (660) = 0) producing (659) = (653) s (654) = 0. If signal 1 EXCLUSIVEOU ( 653) is high ((653) = 1) and signal 2 EXCLUSIVEOR (654) is low ((654) = 0), the EXCLUSIVEOR gate (596) will move to the other end of the EXCLUSIVEOR (652) cavity ((596 ) θ 1) aligning an equivalent set of connections to the inlet and outlet pipes that produce the same results: (656) = (653) (654) = 1; (659) = (653) s (654) = 0.

[0614] As no spring is installed, the appropriate connections must be in place for the auxiliary SEL 2 (662) to be provided with the main input denied ((662) = -(663)), so that, as indicated in Figure 36, when the main SEL 2 (663) is high ((663) = 1), the auxiliary SEL 2 (662) is low ((662) = 0). The SEL port (589b) is moved within the SEL cavity 2 (661) completely towards the main SEL 2 (663) causing the SEL port (589b) to be in its inactive position ((589b) θ 1). The connections on the SEL port (589b) connect input 1 SEL 2 (664) to output 1 SEL 2 (665) ((664) = (665)). At the same time, connections on the SEL port (589b) isolate input 2 SEL 2 (666) and output 2 SEL 2 (667) (as there are no connections on top of the SEL 2 cavity (661)). As at any time, regardless of the position of the SEL (589b) port, one input is always isolated and there are no overhead connections that could cause a short circuit between a signal with different polarity and the other input through the SEL (589b) port connections. , the SEL 2 output connection (668) can be constructed by connecting outputs (665 and 667) producing a combined output.

[0615] (668) = (-(663) A (666)) v ((663) A (664)).

[0616] If inputs (664) and (666) are made complementary ((666) = (664)),

[0617] (668) = (-(663) A (664)) v ((663) A (664)), or (668) = (663) = (664); (668) = (663) symbol (666).

[0618] When the main SW (671) is high ((671) = 1), the SW gate (602) is pushed toward the edge of the SW cavity (669), compressing the logic spring (686e) in the auxiliary SW ( 670), causing the SW port (602) to be in its active position ((602) θ 1). Connections on port SW (602) connect input 1 SW (672) to monitor 1 SW (673) ((672) = (673)) and isolate output 1 SW (674). At the same time, the connections on the SW port (602) also connect input 2 SW (675) to monitor 2 SW (676) ((675) = (676)) and isolate output 2 SW (677). In this position, the monitors at the top (673 and 676) remain connected and can exchange information with the inputs (672 and 675 respectively) without interfering with outputs (674 and 677 respectively) which are isolated.

[0619] The external depth water pressure tube (679) injects water at external pressure into the depth sensor cavity (678) pushing the depth detector (689) against the depth sensor (688) which compresses the air inside of the depth sensor (688) until balance is reached. Any changes in external water pressure will cause the depth finder (689) to move accordingly until a new equilibrium position is reached. If a slot in the depth detector (689) is aligned with a specific input at the top, the signal at that input is passed to the output below. The depth sensor inlet shield (691) allows water from the external water pressure tube (679) to enter the depth sensor cavity (678), even when the depth sensor (689) is at the end of your tour. The rubber grille of the depth detector (690) surrounds all slots and the main body of the depth detector (689) isolates each slot so that fluid passing through one slot does not leak into other slots.

[0620] In the position drawn in Figure 36, the high pressure depth least significant bit slot 1 (692) is not aligned with the high pressure depth least significant bit (681) which has a high pressure signal ((681) = 1). The least significant bit high pressure slot of depth 2 (694) is isolated and has no effect. The gnd least significant bit depth slot (693) is aligned with the gnd least significant bit depth (680) which has a low pressure signal ((680) = 0). The output signal passed to the (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is low ((684) = (680) = 0). The high pressure depth most significant bit slot (695) is aligned with the high pressure depth most significant bit (682) which has a high pressure sign ((682) = 1). The gnd most significant bit depth slot (696) is not aligned with the gnd most significant bit depth (683) which has a low pressure signal ((683) = 0). The output signal transmitted at the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is high ((685) = (682) = 1). The depth position is encoded (685, 684) = 10 (submerged).

[0621] As the reactor node continues to submerge, water pressure increases, causing the depth sensor (689) to move and compress the depth sensor (688). The encoded depth position given by (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) and (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) changes from (685, 684) = 11 (surface) to (685, 684) = 10 (submerged) and then to (685, 684) = 00 (at the defined depth) and to (685, 684) = 01 (very deep).

[0622] Figures 41 to 48 refer to the operation of the LFSR set.

[0623] Figure 41 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the deactivated state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved.

[0624] The (z) least significant zero bit input (720) is low ((720) = 0) causing: 1) the logic spring (686b) to extend and push the E gate (583b) to its inactive position (( 583b) θ 0) connecting the register signal zk (722) to the base ((722) = 0) through the free cavity zk and isolating the clock input most significant bit (k) (719); 2) the logic spring (686d) to extend and push the zero gate (734) to its inactive position ((734) θ 0).

[0625] The (m) most significant bit master/slave input (721) is high ((721) = 1) pushing the E gate (583a) to its active position (~ (583a) θ 1) compressing the logic spring ( 686a) and connecting the mz register signal (723a) to the base ((723a) = 0) through the free cavity mz, causing the other end of the mz register signal (723b) to feed a low pressure signal (0) on both inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0626] In its inactive position, the zero port (734) connects each set of zero registers (733a, ..., 733g) that are all connected to the LFSR high pressure supply (703) to the corresponding register high input high ( 746a, ., 746g), making everything loud ((746a) = (733a) = 1, ., (746g) = (733g) = 1). Furthermore, in the rest position, each zero port upper hole (738a, ., 738g) of the zero port (734) connects the corresponding free zero register which are all connected to the LFSR gnd layer to the corresponding low register input (747a, ., 738g). ., 747g) causing everything to be low ((747a) = 0, ., (747g) = 0) (see Figure 38). As a result, all register ports are pushed up to the initial register position 1111111, regardless of the memory port position (arbitrarily plotted at memory position 1000011).

[0627] As (722) = 0, the logic spring (686c) pushes the SEL gate (589) to its inactive position ((589) θ 0) connecting: 1) The free cavity zkm to the signal register kzm (725 ) ((725) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = 0 => (724b) = (724a) = 0, a low value (0) is given to the low register port (759a) and all other register ports until it exceeds the high register capacity (764g) and made available for further use by additional logic ((724c) = (724b) = (724a) = 0).

[0628] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register gates at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all memory ports up to the memory port (748f) at all times.

[0629] Counting from left to right, for n = 1 to 6, register port n forwards register signal kzm (724b) and register rail gnd (726) to register port n + 1.

[0630] For n = 1 to 7, register port n branches the signal passing through the -kzm register signal (724b) to the high memory supply if in the high position (1) or to the low memory supply if it is in the low position (0). At the same time, register port n branches the low pressure signal passing through register rail (726) to its low memory feeder if it is in the high position (1) or to its high memory feeder if it is in the high position (1). low (0).

[0631] For n = 1 to 7, the high memory supply n is connected to the high memory input n that terminates at the bottom of memory cavity n and the low memory supply n is connected to the low memory input n that terminates at the upper part of memory cavity n (see Figure 40). A register port n in the high position (1) directs (724b) to the high memory input n and directs (726) = 0 to the low memory input n and a register port n in the low position (0) directs (724b) to the low memory input and directs (726) = 0 to the high memory input n.

[0632] Since (724b) = 0, the signals directed to each high memory input and each low memory input are low and the memory ports (748a, ..., 748g) remain stationary.

[0633] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1), but not all seven register ports of address 7 Installed bits (0011111) are aligned correctly: the high register port (764c, ., 764g) is aligned correctly, but the low register port (759a) and the low register gate (759b) are not aligned correctly. The high power line is interrupted and the ready unit (y) (730b) is connected to the base ((730b) = 0) via the low register port (759b).

[0634] Both outputs of the LFSR set are low ((724c) = 0; (730b) = 0) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0635] The summary of Figure 41 is:

[0636] (721) = 1 => ~ (583a) θ 1

[0637] (720) = 0 => (583b) θ 0; (734) θ 0; (589) θ 0

[0638] Unchanged memory location: 1000011

[0639] Registration position set to: 1111111

[0640] (724c) = 0; (730b) = 0 => Tx deactivated.

[0641] Figure 42 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the zero state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved.

[0642] The (z) input zero least significant bit (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be pushed to its active position ((583b) θ 1) compressing the logic spring (686b) and connecting the register signal zk (722) to the most significant bit clock input (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1) compressing the logic spring (686d).

[0643] The master/slave input most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the logic spring (686a) to extend and push the E gate (583a) to its rest position (~(583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to the input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ((723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0644] In its active position, the zero port (734) connects each low register input (747a, ..., 747g) to the respective low transport output (745a, ..., 745g) producing the connections ((747a ) = (745a), ..., 747g) = (745g)). Furthermore, in the active position, each upper hole of the zero port (738a, ., 738g) of the zero port (734) connects the corresponding high register input (746a, ., 746g) to the respective high transport output producing the connections ( (746a) = (744a, ., 746g) = (744g)) (see Figure 39).

[0645] The most significant bit (k) clock input (719) is low ((719) = 0) resulting in (722) = (719) = 0, allowing the logic spring (686c) to push the SEL gate ( 589) to its inactive position ((589) θ 0) connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = 1 => (724b) = (724a) = 1, a high value (1) is given to the low register port (759a) and all other register ports until it exceeds the register port high (764g) and made available for further use by additional logic ((724c) = (724b) = (724a) = 1).

[0646] The gnd register rail (726) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register gates at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all memory ports up to the memory port (748f) at all times.

[0647] Counting from left to right, for n = 1 to 6, register port n forwards register signal kzm (724b) and register rail gnd (726) to register port n + 1.

[0648] For n = 1 to 7, register port n branches the signal passing through the -kzm register signal (724b) to the high memory supply if in the high position (1) or to the low memory supply if it is in the low position (0). At the same time, register port n branches the low pressure signal passing through register rail (726) to its low memory feeder if it is in the high position (1) or to its high memory feeder if it is in the high position (1). low (0).

[0649] For n = 1 to 7, the high memory supply n is connected to the high memory input n that terminates at the bottom of memory cavity n and the low memory supply n is connected to the low memory input n that terminates at the upper part of memory cavity n (see Figure 40). A register port n in the high position (1) directs (724b) to the high memory input n and directs (726) = 0 to the low memory input n and a register port n in the low position (0) directs (724b) to the low memory input and directs (726) = 0 to the high memory input n.

[0650] Since (724b) = 1, an n register port in the high position (1) forces the n memory port up to the high position (1) and an n register port in the low position (0) forces the n register port up to the high position (1) memory n descending to the low position (0). The 7-bit register position is copied to the 7-bit memory position. As in Figure 42 the register position is 1111111, the memory position is set to 1111111 (memory ports (748a, ..., 748g) go to the top of their cavities).

[0651] Since (725) = 0, the signals routed to each high register input and each low register input are low and the register ports remain stationary.

[0652] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1), but not all seven register ports of address 7 Installed bits (0011111) are aligned correctly: the high register port 7(64c, ..., 764g) is aligned correctly, but the low register port (759a) and the low register gate (759b) are not aligned correctly . The high power line is interrupted and the ready unit (y) (730b) is connected to the base ((730b) = 0) via the low register port (759b).

[0653] One of the outputs of the LFSR set is low ((724c) = 1; (730b) = 0) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0654] The summary of Figure 42 is:

[0655] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0656] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0657] (719) = 0 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 0

[0658] Memory position set to: 1111111

[0659] Registration position unchanged: 1111111

[0660] (724c) = 1; (730b) = 0 => Tx deactivated.

[0661] Figure 43 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the normal operating state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved.

[0662] The (z) input zero least significant bit (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be pushed to its active position ((583b) θ 1) compressing the logic spring (686b) and connecting the zk register signal (722) to the most significant bit clock input (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1) compressing the logic spring (686d).

[0663] The master/slave input most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the logic spring (686a) to extend and push the E gate (583a) to its rest position (~ (583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to the input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ((723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0664] In its active position, the zero port (734) connects each low register input (747a, ..., 747g) to the respective low transport output (745a, ..., 745g) producing the connections ((747a ) = (745a, ..., 747g) = (745g)). Furthermore, in the active position, each zero port (738a, ..., 738g) upper hole of the zero port (734) connects the corresponding high register input (746a, ., 746g) to the respective high transport output producing the connections ((746a) = (744a, ., 746g) = (744g)) (see Figure 39).

[0665] The most significant bit (k) clock input (719) is high ((719) = 1) resulting in (722) = (719) = 1, pushing the SEL port (589) to its active position (( 589) θ 1) compressing the logic spring (686c) and connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (724b) = (724c) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = (720) = 1 => (725) = 1, a high value (1) is given for the memory ports (748a, ..., 748f).

[0666] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register gates at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all memory ports (748a, ..., 748f) at all times.

[0667] Counting from left to right, for n = 1 to 5, memory port n forwards register signal kzm (725) and memory rail gnd (727) to memory port n + 1.

[0668] For n = 1 to 6, memory port n branches the signal passing through register signal kzm (725) to its double lower connection if it is in the high position (1) or to its double upper connection if it is in the low position (0). At the same time, memory port n branches the signal passing through the memory rail (727) to its double upper connection if it is in the high position (1) or to its double lower connection if it is in the low position (0).

[0669] For n = 1 to 6, the double bottom connection n is connected to take the n + 1 high output and then through the zero port to the n + 1 register high input which terminates at the bottom of the cavity n+1 register cavity and the double n upper connection is connected to take the n+1 low output and then through the zero port to n+1 register low input which terminates at the top of the n+1 register cavity (see Figure 39).

[0670] For n = 1 to 6, a memory port n in the high position (1) directs (725) to the high register input n + 1 and directs (727) = 0 to the low register input n + 1 and a memory port n in the low position (0) directs (725) to the low register input n + 1 and directs (727) = 0 to the high register input n + 1. Since (725) = 1, a A memory port n in the high position (1) forces the register port n+1 to move up to the high position (1), and a memory port n in the low position (0) forces the register port n+1 to move down to the low position (0) by copying the first 6 bits of the 7-bit memory position to the last 6 bits of the 7-bit register position.

[0671] The first bit of the 7-bit register position is determined by a 6-bit EXCLUSIVE-OR function of the 7-bit memory position (1 = 6 7). The upper OREXCLUSIVE input connects the double upper connection 6 to the double upper connection 7 and the lower OREXCLUSIVE input connects the double lower connection 6 to the double lower connection 7 (see Figure 39).

[0672] In Figure 43, since the memory port (748f) (memory port 6) is in the high position (1), the low pressure coming from the gnd memory rail (727) passes to the upper OUEXCLUSIVE input through the port of the memory port (754f) and then as the memory port (748g) (memory port 7) is also in the high position (1), the signal coming from the gnd memory rail (727) continues through the gnd input hole. memory (754g) to high output OUEXCLUSIVE (739) producing ((739) = (727) = 0). Likewise, because the memory port (748f) (memory port 6) is in the high position (1), the high pressure signal from the kzm register signal (725) passes to the lower OREXCLUSIVE input and as the port memory (748g) (memory port 7) is also in the high position (1), the signal ends at the low EXCLUSIVE OUTPUT (740) producing ((740) = (725) = 1).

[0673] The EXCLUSIVE OR output high (739) is connected to the transport output high 1 and then through the zero port in the top hole of the zero port (738a) to the register high input 1 which terminates at the bottom of the cavity from register. The EXCLUSIVE OU output low (740) is connected to the transport output low 1 (745a) and then through port zero to register low input 1 which terminates at the top of register cavity 1.

[0674] Since (740) = 1 and (739) = 0, the register low port (759a) is moved down to the low position (0). Memory location 1111111 produces register position 0111111.

[0675] As register signal kzm (724b) = 0, the signals directed from the register ports to each high memory input and each low memory input are low and the memory ports remain stationary.

[0676] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1), but not all seven register ports of address 7 Installed bits (0011111) are aligned correctly: the low register port (759a) and the high register port (764c, ..., 764g) are aligned correctly, but the low register port (759b) is not aligned correctly. The high power line is interrupted and the ready unit (y) (730b) is connected to the base ((730b) = 0) via the low register port (759b).

[0677] Both outputs of the LFSR set are low ((724c) = 0; (730b) = 0) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0678] The summary of Figure 43 is:

[0679] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0680] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0681] (719) = 1 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 1

[0682] Unchanged memory location 1111111

[0683] Registration position set to 011111

[0684] (724c) = 0; (730b) = 0 => Tx deactivated.

[0685] Figure 44 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the normal operating state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved. Figures 44 and 42 differ in memory position and register position.

[0686] The (z) most significant zero bit input (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be pushed to its active position ((583b) θ 1) connecting the register signal zk (722) to the clock input most significant bit (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1).

[0687] The master/slave input most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the E port (583a) to be in its inactive position (~ (583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ((723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0688] The clock input most significant bit (k) (719) is low ((719) = 0), causing (722) = (719) = 0, causing the SEL port (589) to be in its position inactive ((589) θ 0) connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = (720) = 1 => (724b) = (724a) = 1, a high value (1) is given to the low register port (759a) and all other register ports. register until it exceeds the register port high (764g) and made available for further use by additional logic ((724c) = (724b) = (724a) = 1).

[0689] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register ports at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to the memory ports (748a, ..., 748f) at all times.

[0690] Since (724b) = 1, an n register port in the high position (1) forces the n memory port up to the high position (1) and an n register port in the low position (0) forces the n register port up to the high position (1) memory n descending to the low position (0). The 7-bit register position is copied to the 7-bit memory position. As in Figure 44, the register position is 0111111, the memory position is set to 0111111.

[0691] Since (725) = 0, the signals directed to each high register input and each low register input are low and the register gates remain stationary.

[0692] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1), but not all seven register ports of address 7 Installed bits (0011111) are aligned correctly: the low register port (759a) and the high register port (764c, ..., 764g) are aligned correctly, but the low register port (759b) is not aligned correctly. The high power line is interrupted and the ready unit (y) (730b) is connected to the base ((730b) = 0) via the low register port (759b).

[0693] One of the outputs of the LFSR set is low ((724c) = 1; (730b) = 0) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0694] The summary of Figure 44 is:

[0695] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0696] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0697] (719) = 0 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 0

[0698] Memory position set to: 0111111

[0699] Registration position unchanged: 0111111

[0700] (724c) = 1; (730b) = 0 => LSFR disabled.

[0701] Figure 45 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the normal operating state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved. Figures 45 and 43 differ in memory position and register position.

[0702] The (z) most significant zero bit input (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be in its active position ((583b) θ 1) connecting the register signal zk (722) to clock input most significant bit (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1).

[0703] The input master/slave most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the E port (583a) to be in its inactive position (~ (583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ( (723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0704] The most significant bit (k) clock input (719) is high ((719) = 1) resulting in (722) = (719) = 1, pushing the SEL port (589) to its active position (( 589) θ 1) and connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (724b) = (724c) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = (720) = 1 => (725) = 1, a high value (1) is given for the memory ports (748a, ..., 748f).

[0705] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd (726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register ports at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all memory ports (748a, ..., 748f) at all times.

[0706] For n = 1 to 6, a memory port n in the high position (1) forces the register port n + 1 up to the high position (1) and a memory port n in the low position (0) forces the n+1 register port to move to the low position (0), copying the first 6 bits of the 7-bit memory position to the last 6 bits of the 7-bit register position.

[0707] The first bit of the 7-bit register position is determined by a 6-bit and 7-bit EXCLUSIVE-OR function of the 7-bit memory position (1 = 6 x 7). The memory port (748f) (memory port 6) is in the high position (1), the low pressure signal from the memory rail (727) passes to the upper EXCLUSIVE OR input through the upper hole of the memory port (754f ) and then as memory port (748g) (memory port 7) is also in the high position (1), the signal coming from the memory gnd rail (727) continues through the memory port hole to the high OUEXCLUSIVE output ( 739) producing ((739) = (727) = 0). Likewise, because the memory port (748f) (memory port 6) is in the high position (1), the high pressure signal from the kzm register signal (725) passes to the lower OREXCLUSIVE input and as the port memory (748g) (memory port 7) is in the high position (1), the signal ends at the low EXCLUSIVE OUTPUT (740) producing ((740) = (725) = 1).

[0708] Since (740) = 1 and (739) = 0, the register low port (759a) is moved down to the low position (0). Memory location 0111111 produces register location 0011111.

[0709] As register signal kzm (724b) = 0, the signals directed to each memory high input and each memory low input are low and the memory ports remain stationary.

[0710] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1). Since all seven register ports of the installed 7-bit address (0011111) are correctly aligned, the high power line is uninterrupted through the low register port (759a, 759b) and the high register port (764c, ... , 764g) and the ready unit (y) (730b) remains high ((730b) = 1).

[0711] One of the outputs of the LFSR set is low ((724c) = 0; (730b) = 1) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0712] The summary of Figure 45 is:

[0713] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0714] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0715] (719) = 1 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 1

[0716] Memory location unchanged 0111111

[0717] Registration position set to 0011111

[0718] (724c) = 0; (730b) = 1 => Tx deactivated.

[0719] Figure 46 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the normal operating state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved. Figures 46, 44 and 42 differ in memory position and register position.

[0720] The input zero most significant bit (z) (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be pushed to its active position ((583b) θ 1) connecting the register signal zk (722) to the clock input most significant bit (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1).

[0721] The input master/slave most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the E port (583a) to be in its inactive position (~ (583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ((723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0722] The clock input most significant bit (k) (719) is low ((719) = 0), causing (722) = (719) = 0, causing the SEL port (589) to be in its position inactive ((589) θ 0) connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = (720) = 1 => (724b) = (724a) = 1, a high value (1) is given to the low register port (759a) and all other register ports. register until it exceeds the register port high (764g) and made available for further use by additional logic ((724c) = (724b) = (724a) = 1).

[0723] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register ports at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to the memory ports (748a, ..., 748f) at all times.

[0724] Since (724b) = 1, an n register port in the high position (1) forces the n memory port up to the high position (1) and an n register port in the low position (0) forces the n register port up to the high position (1) memory n descending to the low position (0). The 7-bit register position is copied to the 7-bit memory position. As in Figure 46, the register position is 0011111, the memory position is set to 0011111.

[0725] Since (725) = 0, the signals directed to each high register input and each low register input are low and the register gates remain stationary.

[0726] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1). Since all seven register ports of the installed 7-bit address (0011111) are correctly aligned, the high power line is uninterrupted through the low register port (759a, 759b) and the high register port (764c, ... , 764g) and the ready unit (y) (730b) remains high ((730b) = 1).

[0727] Both outputs of the LFSR set are high ((724c) = 1; (730b) = 1) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0728] The summary of Figure 46 is:

[0729] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0730] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0731] (719) = 0 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 0

[0732] Memory location set to 011111

[0733] Registration position unchanged 0011111

[0734] (724c) = 1; (730b) = 1 => Tx deactivated.

[0735] Figure 47 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the normal operating state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved. Figures 47, 46, 44 and 42 differ in memory position and register position.

[0736] Figure 47 is provided to illustrate the progression of the linear feedback shift register sequence to the point that will produce 1 instead of 0 for the next register update.

[0737] The input zero most significant bit (z) (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be pushed to its active position ((583b) θ 1) connecting the register signal zk (722) to the clock input most significant bit (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1).

[0738] The master/slave input most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the E port (583a) to be in its inactive position (~ (583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ((723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0739] The most significant bit (k) clock input (719) is low ((719) = 0), causing (722) = (719) = 0, causing the SEL port (589) to be in its position inactive ((589) θ 0) connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = (720) = 1 => (724b) = (724a) = 1, a high value (1) is given to the low register port (759a) and all other register ports. register until it exceeds the register port high (764g) and made available for further use by additional logic ((724c) = (724b) = (724a) = 1).

[0740] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register ports at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to the memory ports (748a, ..., 748f) at all times.

[0741] Since (724b) = 1, an n register port in the high position (1) forces the n memory port up to the high position (1) and an n register port in the low position (0) forces the n register port up to the high position (1) memory n descending to the low position (0). The 7-bit register position is copied to the 7-bit memory position. As in Figure 47, the register position is 0000001, the memory position is set to 0000001.

[0742] Since (725) = 0, the signals directed to each high register input and each low register input are low and the register gates remain stationary.

[0743] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1), but not all seven register ports of address 7 Installed bits (0011111) are aligned correctly resulting in a drive ready (y) (730b) being low ((730b) = 0).

[0744] One of the outputs of the LFSR set is low ((724c) = 1; (730b) = 0) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0745] The summary of Figure 47 is:

[0746] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0747] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0748] (719) = 0 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 0

[0749] Memory location set to 011111

[0750] Registration position unchanged 0000001

[0751] (724c) = 1; (730b) = 0 => Tx deactivated.

[0752] Figure 48 shows the components of the LFSR assembly in the normal operating state. The LFSR layer a (698) is represented as a reference for determining the relative position of the various components involved. Figures 48, 45 and 43 differ in memory position and register position.

[0753] Figure 48 is provided to illustrate the progression of the linear feedback shift register sequence to the point where it produces a 1 instead of a 0 to update the position of the low register port (759a) as a result of the function EXCLUSIVE OR made by memory port (748f) and memory port (748g).

[0754] The input zero most significant bit (z) (720) is high ((720) = 1) causing: 1) the E gate (583b) to be pushed to its active position ((583b) θ 1) connecting the register signal zk (722) to the clock input most significant bit (k) (719) ((722) = (719)); 2) the zero gate (734) moves to its active position ((734) θ 1).

[0755] The input master/slave most significant bit (m) (721) is low ((721) = 0) causing the E port (583a) to be in its inactive position (~ (583a) θ 0) connecting the register signal mz (723a) to input zero most significant bit (z) (720) ((723a) = (720) = 1). The other end of the mz register signal (723b) feeds a high value (1) into the two inputs of the SEL port (589).

[0756] The most significant bit (k) clock input (719) is high ((719) = 1) resulting in (722) = (719) = 1, pushing the SEL port (589) to its active position (( 589) θ 1) and connecting: 1) the free cavity zkm to the register signal kzm (724a) ((724a) = (724b) = (724c) = 0); 2) the register signal mz (723b) to the register signal kzm (725) ((725) = (723b)). Since (723b) = (723a) = (720) = 1 => (725) = 1, a high value (1) is given for the memory ports (748a, ..., 748f).

[0757] The register rail gnd (726) is connected to the LFSR layer gnd ((726) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all register ports at all times. The gnd memory rail (727) is connected to the LFSR gnd layer ((727) = 0) and provides a low signal (0) to all memory ports (748a, ..., 748f) at all times.

[0758] For n = 1 to 6, a memory port n in the high position (1) forces the register port n + 1 up to the high position (1) and a memory port n in the low position (0) forces the n+1 register port to move to the low position (0), copying the first 6 bits of the 7-bit memory position to the last 6 bits of the 7-bit register position.

[0759] The first bit of the 7-bit register position is determined by a 6-bit EXCLUSIVE-OR function of the 7-bit memory position (1 = 6 7). The memory port (748f) (memory port 6) is in the low position (0), the high pressure signal coming from the kzm register signal (725) passes to the upper OUEXCLUSIVE input through the hole of the memory port (754f ) and then as memory port (748g) (memory gate 7) is in the high position (1), the signal coming from the kzm register signal (725) continues through the memory port hole (754g) to the high output EXCLUSIVE OR (739) producing ((739) = (725) = 1). Likewise, because the memory port (748f) (memory port 6) is in the low (0) position, the low pressure signal coming from the memory gnd rail (727) passes to the lower EXCLUSIVE OU input and as the memory port (727) memory (748g) (memory port 7) is in the high position (1), the signal terminates at the low OUEXCLUSIVE output (740) producing ((740) = (727) = 0).

[0760] As (740) = 0 and (739) = 1, the low register port (759a) is moved up to the high position (1). Memory location 0000001 produces register location 1000000.

[0761] As register signal kzm (724b) = 0, the signals directed to each memory high input and each memory low input are low and the memory ports remain stationary.

[0762] The ready unit (y) (730a) that powers the first register port, the low register port (759a) is high ((730a) = 1), but of all seven register ports the address of 7 bits installed (0011111), only the low register port (759b) is aligned correctly. The low register port (759a) is at the top of its cavity and the high register ports (764c and 764g) are all at the bottom of their respective cavities, resulting in the ready unit (y) (730b) being low ((730b) = 0).

[0763] Both outputs of the LFSR set are low ((724c) = 0; (730b) = 0) and transmission of the unit's current alarm condition back to central monitoring is disabled.

[0764] The summary of Figure 48 is:

[0765] (721) = 0 => ~ (583a) θ 0

[0766] (720) = 1 => (583b) θ 1; (734) θ 1

[0767] (719) = 1 => (720) = 1 => (589) θ 1

[0768] Memory location unchanged 0000001

[0769] Registration position set to 1000000

[0770] (724c) = 0; (730b) = 0 => Tx deactivated.

[0771] Figures 62 and 63 show the I/O components from different points of view for better visualization and understanding of the operation of the I/O unit assembly. Figure 62 is an isometric view of the I/O components of the I/O unit assembly with the I/O component cavities (425) drawn in ghost lines for reference. Figure 63 is a top view of the I/O components of the I/O unit assembly, also showing the I/O layer a (419) that serves as a reference.

[0772] The only difference, besides the point of view, is that Figure 62 shows the cavities of the I/O components (425) as a reference and Figure 63 shows the I/O layer a (419). For brevity, the explanation is given once for both figures.

[0773] The CO2 pressure controller device (460A) controls and digitizes the CO2 pressure within the CO2 body channel A producing the least significant bit CO2 internal pressure signal (n) A. The CO2 pressure controller device (460A) CO2 (460B) controls and digitizes the CO2 pressure within the CO2 body channel B producing the least significant bit CO2 internal pressure signal (n) B. The CO2 pressure controller device (460C) controls and digitizes the pressure of CO2 inside CO2 body channel C producing the least significant bit CO2 internal pressure signal (n) C. The CO2 pressure controller device (460D) controls and digitizes the CO2 pressure inside the CO2 body channel D producing the least significant bit CO2 internal pressure signal (n) D. The CO2 pressure controller device (460e) controls and digitizes the CO2 pressure within the CO2 body producing the bit CO2 internal pressure signal (n) less significant e. CO2 is supplied by the (l) right CO2 refill and the (L) left CO2 refill that are interconnected within the I/O unit assembly.

[0774] The water pressure controller device (467A) controls and digitizes the water pressure within the channel of the water body A producing the signals (i) of internal water pressure most significant bit A and (i) of internal pressure of water least significant bit A. The water pressure controlling device (467B) controls and digitizes the water pressure within channel B of the water body producing signals (i) of internal water pressure most significant bit B and (i ) internal water pressure least significant bit significant C and (i) internal water pressure least significant bit C. The water pressure controller device (467D) controls and digitizes the water pressure within channel D of the water body producing the (i) internal pressure signals of the water most significant bit D and (i) internal pressure of the water least significant bit D. The basic pressure controller device (477) controls and digitizes the basic pressure within the body of water producing the signal (g) basic least significant bit.

[0775] The signal pressure controller device (483a) is used to digitize the clock input (k) signal into producing the clock input (k) most significant bit and clock input (k) least significant bit signals . The clock input (k) most significant bit is used to control the mono actuator (497a) producing the clock output (K) output signal that regenerates the clock input (k). The signal pressure controller device (483b) is used to digitize the zero (z) input signal into producing the zero (z) most significant bit input and zero (z) least significant bit input signals. The zero input (z) most significant bit is used to control the mono actuator (497b) producing the zero output (Z) output signal that regenerates the zero input (z). The signal pressure controller device (483c) is used to digitize the master/slave input (m) signal into producing the master/slave input (m) most significant bit and master/slave input (m) least significant bit signals. . The master/slave input (m) most significant bit is used to control the mono actuator (497c) producing the output signal from the master/slave output (M) which regenerates the master/slave input (m).

[0776] The signal pressure controller device (483d) is used to digitize the query input (q) signal in producing the query input (q) most significant bit and query input (q) least significant bit signals . The mono actuator (497d) is controlled by the (Q) query control which is a function of the query input (q) most significant bit and other variables that are generated in the logic unit assembly producing the query output output signal ( Q). The signal pressure controller device (483e) is used to digitize the state input signal(s) into producing the most significant bit state(s) input and least significant bit state(s) input signals. The mono actuator (497e) is controlled by the state control(S) which is a function of the state input most significant bit(s) and other variables that are generated in the logic unit assembly producing the state output digital output signal. (S). The signal pressure controller device (483f) is used to digitize the help input (h) signal into producing the help input (h) most significant bit and help input (h) least significant bit signals. The mono actuator (497f) is controlled by the (H) help control which is a function of the help input (h) most significant bit and other variables that are generated in the logic unit assembly producing the help output digital output signal (H) (see Figure 70).

[0777] The signal pressure controller device (483g) is used to digitize the reset input (r) signal in producing the reset input (r) most significant bit and reset input (r) least significant bit signals . The mono actuator (497g) is controlled by the (R) reset control which is a function of the reset input (r) most significant bit and the reset input (r) least significant bit generated in the logic unit assembly. The mono actuator (497g) is installed inverted, introducing an additional NO function to complete the logic function that produces the reset of the reset control (R) output signal (R) generated in the logic unit assembly R output = -R = - (-r msb A r lsb) (see Figure 70).

[0778] The signal pressure controller device (483h) is used to digitize the signal from the submergence input (v) in producing the submergence input (v) most significant bit and submergence input (v) least significant bit signals . The submergence input (v) most significant bit is used to control the mono actuator (497h) producing the submergence output (V) output signal that regenerates the submergence input (v). The signal pressure controller device (483i) is used to digitize the air pressure in the (U) right air replenishment and (U) left air replenishment tubes that are interconnected within the I/O unit assembly producing the signals (u) most significant bit air replenishment and (u) least significant bit air replenishment. The signal pressure controller device (483j) is used to digitize the water pressure in the (W) right water refill and (W) left water refill pipes that are interconnected within the I/O unit assembly producing the signs of (w) most significant bit water replenishment and (w) least significant bit water replenishment. The mono actuator (497i) is controlled by the ready unit (y) which is generated in the logic unit assembly producing the digital output signal from the ready unit output (Y) (see Figure 70).

[0779] The mono actuators (497a, ..., 497f, 497h, 497i) are installed in such a way that, when they are in the active position ((497x) θ 1; x = a, ..., f, h, i ), compress the actuator spring and produce a correspondingly high output signal (1) and when they are in the inactive position ((497x) θ 0; x = a, ., f, h, i) produce a low output signal ( 0) corresponding. The mono actuator (497g) is installed inverted, so that when it is in the active position (~ (497g) θ 1), it compresses the actuator spring and produces a low output signal (0) and when it is in the inactive position ( ~ (497g) θ 0) produces a high output signal (1).

[0780] The mono actuator (497j) is installed inverted, introducing an additional NO function to complete the logic function that controls the flag. The mono actuator (497j) is controlled by the flag raise control (F) generated in the logic unit assembly, producing a lower flag output (LF) signal LF = F that controls the flag through the flag tube. When the mono actuator (497j) is in its inactive position (~ (497j) θ 0) as designed, it produces a high output signal (1) which causes the flag to lower and when it is in an active position (~ (497j ) θ 1), it compresses the actuator spring and produces a low (0) output signal that causes the flag to rise (see Figure 70).

[0781] The mono actuator (497k) is installed inverted, introducing an additional NO function to complete the logic function that controls the water pump. The mono actuator (497k) is controlled by the water pump stop control (P) which is generated in the logic unit assembly which produces a water pump run output signal (RP) RP = P which controls the water pump. water through the pump supply pipe. When the mono actuator (497k) is in its inactive position (~ (497k) θ 0) as designed, it produces a high output signal (1) that allows it to pump water and when it is in the active position (~ (497k) θ 1) compresses the spring actuator and produces a low output signal (0) that stops water pumping (see Figure 71).

[0782] The dual actuator (500A) is controlled by the door opening control A (O) which is generated in the logic unit assembly producing the output control signals to open or close the door and the CO2 valve on the port of the tube A. The dual actuator (500B) is controlled by the door opening control B (O) which is generated in the logic unit assembly producing the output control signals to open or close the door and the CO2 valve on the port. tube B. The dual actuator (500C) is controlled by the port opening control C (O) which is generated in the logic unit assembly producing the output control signals to open or close the port and the CO2 valve on the port. tube C. The dual actuator (500D) is controlled by the door opening control D (O) which is generated in the logic unit assembly that produces the output control signals to open or close the door and the CO2 valve on the door D. Dual actuators in active positions ((500B) θ 1, (500C) θ 1) compress their actuator springs and cause their respective CO2 ports and valves to open and dual actuators in inactive positions ((500A) θ 0, (500D) θ 0) cause the respective CO2 ports and valves to close (see Figure 71).

[0783] The dual actuator (500e) is controlled by the submergence input most significant bit (v), producing the output signals that supply power to the pump rotor assembly in the anchoring system, causing the cable winch to rotate in the clockwise or counterclockwise. When the double actuator (500e) is in its inactive position ((500e) θ 0) as designed, it causes the cable winch to rotate counterclockwise, allowing the reactor node to go to the surface. When the double actuator (500e) is in its active position ((500e) θ 1), it compresses the actuator spring and causes the cable winch to rotate clockwise, forcing the reactor node to submerge. The dual actuator (500f) is controlled by the submergence input most significant bit (v), producing the output signals to open or close the air vent valve through the air release opening tube and the air release closing tube. air. When the dual actuator (500f) is in its inactive position ((500f) θ 0) as designed, it causes the air vent valve to close. When the dual actuator (500f) is in its active position ((500f) θ 1), it compresses the actuator spring and opens the ventilation valve, allowing air to vent into the environment to facilitate submersion of the reactor node ( see Figure 70).

[0784] The normally open single actuator (493) is controlled by the submergence deactivation control (E) that is generated in the logic unit assembly, activating or deactivating the control signals that supply the dual actuator (500e) which, in turn, time, commands the cable winch to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. When the normally open mono actuator (493) is in its active position ((493) θ 1) as designed, it compresses the actuator spring and disables the control signals that stop the cable winch and when the normally open mono actuator (493 ) is in its inactive position ((493) θ 0), enables the control signals, allowing the cable winch to rotate (see Figures 15 and 70).

[0785] The normally closed mono actuator (495) is controlled by the reset control (R) that is generated in the logic unit assembly. When the normally closed mono actuator (495) is in its inactive position ((495) θ 0) as designed, it disables the water pressure reset input and the CO2 pressure reset input as designed for normal reactor operation . When the normally closed mono actuator (495) is in its active position ((495) θ 1), it compresses the actuator spring and allows the water pressure reset input and the CO2 pressure reset input, allowing the water pressure and CO2 pressure build up in the reactor during a restart command (see Figure 70).

[0786] A set of controller springs (491a, 491b, 491c, etc.) is used to ensure that the CO2 pressure control devices, the water pressure control devices, the base pressure control device, and the signal pressure control devices return to their idle positions in the event of a power failure. A set of actuator springs (506a, 506b, etc.) is used to ensure that the mono actuators, dual actuators, normally open mono actuator, and normally closed mono actuator return to their idle positions in the event of a power failure. This ensures that the reactor node goes into safe mode in the event of a power outage. Two logic springs (686a and 686a) are used, one in each diagnostic port (609a and 609b), respectively, in conjunction with an enable signal to control whether the reactor node operates in normal mode or in controlled mode using the device diagnostics (see Figures 64, 65, 65E and 76).

[0787] The detail in Figure 65E shows the upper part of the logic unit assembly, where a left logic box control connector (440) is located, consisting of 10 small connector inserts identical to the small connector inserts (384a and 384b ). To improve the clarity of Figure 65E and ease of explanation, the tubes passing through the small connector inserts (384a and 384b) of the logic box left control connector that can be seen in Figure 65 have not been drawn in detail in Figure 65E.

[0788] The diagnostic port 1 face hole (612) and the diagnostic port 1 side hole (613) are connected, creating a 90-degree connection that joins the diagnostic interface tube (770) and the corresponding diagnostic control tube (771) and isolates the corresponding diagnostic logic tubes (772) if they are aligned to that position. The through hole of the diagnostic port (614) and the side hole of the diagnostic port 2 (615) are connected, creating a three-way connection that joins the diagnostic interface tube (770), the diagnostic control tube ( 771) and the corresponding diagnostic logic tube (772), if they are aligned to that position. The diagnostic port (609a) is constructed in such a way that it has an odd number (21) of diagnostic port (611) sections and all odd positions counted from either end have a 90 degree connection and all even positions have a three-way connection (see Figure 33).

[0789] If the maintenance work signal (j) (768) is low (j = 0) as plotted, the logic spring 686a pushes the diagnostic port (609a) to the left in the opposite direction indicated by the arrow causing all diagnostic interface tubes (770), diagnostic control tubes (771), and diagnostic logic tubes (772) to align with a position of the diagnostic port (609a) that has a three-way connection. This causes the I/O drive assembly to operate normally, receiving logic signals generated within the logical drive assembly that are also available to be monitored at the diagnostic port.

[0790] If the maintenance work signal (j) (768) is high (j = 1), it pushes the diagnostic port (609a) to the right in the direction indicated by the arrow which compresses the logic spring (686a) and causes all diagnostic interface tubes (770), diagnostic control tubes (771), and diagnostic logic tubes (772) to align with a position of the diagnostic port (609a) that has a 90-degree connection that isolates all diagnostic logic tubes (772). This causes the I/O unit assembly to operate in controlled mode, receiving logic signals generated by the diagnostic device connected to the diagnostic port.

[0791] Figure 76 shows the diagnostic device (825) connected to a reactor node. The diagnostic device (825) uses the high-pressure water supplied by the diagnostic high-pressure supply hose (829) and the low-pressure water supplied by the diagnostic basic supply hose (830) to generate the signals to perform its functions. functions. A series of solenoid valves within the body of the diagnostic device (826) allow the high-pressure water or low-pressure water in each of the 22 individual flexible hoses of the diagnostic strip (828) to generate the digital signals that pass to the diagnostic port through the diagnostic connector (827) to collect data, monitor and control the reactor node.

[0792] Figure 70 is a top view of the logic layer a (444) and the installed logic components. The depth detector (689) moving against the depth sensor (688) generates the (x) least significant bit external pressure (684) and the (x) most significant bit external pressure (685) producing a 2-bit digital signal which encodes the current depth of the reactor node. The (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is connected to the main input on the left and the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is connected to the auxiliary input on the right of the E port (583l) which is not equipped with a logic spring. This arrangement causes the E port (583l) to move to the left (as drawn) if (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is low and (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is high and to the right if (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) is high and (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) is low. If both the (x) external pressure least significant bit (684) and the (x) external pressure most significant bit (685) are high or low, the E port (5831) remains stationary in its current position. The output of the E gate (5831) is a maximum depth overshoot (OV) signal (804) which takes on a high value if the reactor node is at a depth greater than the predicted maximum depth encoded in the depth detector (689 ).

[0793] The main input of the E port (583a) is connected to the maintenance work (j) (768) and the auxiliary input is connected to the (OV) maximum depth overshoot (804) (output of the E port (5831)) .

[0794] If the reactor node is too deep for the maximum depth overshoot (OV) (804) to be high (1), the E gate (583a) moves to the inactive position and since no logic spring is installed , remains this way even after the submersion overshoot situation is overcome until the signal of (j) maintenance work (768) is high (1). This requires the intervention of a maintenance team who will inspect the reactor node for problems, as it should not reach a depth that would cause an oversubmergence situation under normal circumstances (see Figure 76).

[0795] Using the symbol f as "set to 1" and the symbol | as "reset to 0" (as in a defined reset register) by the condition given to the right of the symbol, the depth overshoot (OV) can be defined as: OV f x msb A x isb; OV ; j.

[0796] With the exception of the E port (583c) which is fed with the base least significant (g) bit (805) from the base pressure controller device, the remaining E ports located at the beginning of the alarm chain, between the E (583b) and port E (583d) are fed with the digitized least significant bit input signals produced by their respective signal pressure controller devices from the I/O unit assembly at their respective main inputs. From left to right, the signals provided at the main inputs of ports E (583b) and E (583d) are: (s) state input least significant bit, (q) query input least significant bit, (m) master input /slave least significant bit, (z) input zero least significant bit, (k) clock input least significant bit, (g) base input least significant bit (805), (w) water refill least significant bit, (u ) air replenishment least significant bit, (v) submersion input least significant bit, (r) reset input to least significant bit (801), (h) help input least significant bit.

[0797] The scanning rule incorporated in the signal pressure controller device produces a low least significant bit in case of a leak and a high least significant bit if no leak is detected. The base pressure controller device produces a high least significant bit in case the base pressure is in a normal range and low least significant bit if the base pressure exceeds the maximum pressure operating range (see Figure 32).

[0798] The four E ports located at the end of the alarm chain (from right to left): E port (583h), E port (583g), E port (583f), and E port (583) are used to detect problems in tube ports A, B, C and D respectively (see description in Figure 71).

[0799] All input signals are fed to the E ports installed in the normal position. If an input signal is low (indicating a problem with a tube port, a leak in a signal, or that the base pressure exceeds the operating range), the corresponding E port moves to its rest position and produces a low output that propagates through the current. The final output of the array is an alarm signal (AL) (798) which is high (1) if all E ports are in the active position as drawn and low (0) if any of the E ports move to their rest position . AL = 1 means that the reactor node is operating normally and AL = 0 indicates that at least one problem is present.

[0800] The alarm signal (AL) (798) is fed to the main input and a help input most significant bit (h) (795a) is fed to the side input of the E port (583j) producing a help control output (H) with the logical function (803) = (798) A (795a) or replacing the numbers with the names of the signs: H = AL A h msb. This is used to produce a series link from the reactor nodes' alarm state to the current one. Each reactor node receives the help input (h) from the previous reactor node in the chain and digitizes it into the most significant bit help input (h). The E gate (583j) produces the help control (H) which is used to generate the help output (H) which is transmitted to the next reactor node. An initial high input is fed into the first reactor node and propagates along the chain until a reactor node has a problem, causing the alarm (AL) to be low and resulting in a help control (H) low. Subsequent reactor nodes receive a low most significant bit (h) help input, resulting in a low help (H) control regardless of the local alarm (AL).

[0801] The state input most significant bit (s) (794) digitized from the state input (s) received from the previous reactor node is fed into the first input and the help input most significant bit (h) (795b ) digitized from the help input (h) received from the previous reactor node is fed into the second input of the SEL port (589a). The first and second free inputs of the SEL port (589a) are not connected, allowing the first and second outputs to be joined together producing a single state control (S) output (796).

[0802] A most significant bit query input (q) (797) digitized from the query input (q) received from the previous reactor node is fed into the first input and the alarm (AL) (798) is fed into the second SEL port input (589b). The first and second free inputs of the SEL port (589b) are not connected, allowing the first and second outputs to be joined together producing a single query control (Q) output (799).

[0803] The ready unit (y) (730) is fed to the main input and the registration signal kzm (724) is fed to the side input of the E port (583i), producing as output the transmission signal (TX) (793 ). The transmit (TX) signal (793) is fed into the main inputs of the SEL port (589a) and the SEL port (589b).

[0804] Using compact notation m/s = 1 if the master/slave input signal most significant bit (m) matches the reactor node configuration (m = 1 if the reactor node is configured as master or m = 0 if the reactor node is configured as slave) and m/s = 0 otherwise the logical function produced is: (793) = (730) A (724) or by replacing the numbers with the signal names: TX = y A -k msb A z msb A m/s

[0805] The transmission signal (TX) (793) is high ((793) = 1) if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied: a) m/s = 1 (the unit type is correct); b) (z) input zero most significant bit = 1 (counting is enabled); c) (y) unit ready = 1 (reactor node address is selected); d) (k) clock input most significant bit = 0 (low clock cycle).

[0806] If (793) = 0, the SEL port (589a) and the SEL port (589b) produce as output the chain signals coming from the previous reactor node fed into their first inputs forwarding the received messages. If (793) = 1, the SEL port (589a) and the SEL port (589b) produce as output the local information fed to the second inputs. The implemented logical functions are: = (-(793) A (794)) v ((793) A (795b)); (799) = (-(793) A (797)) v ((793) A (798)) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: S = (TX A s msb) v (TX a h msb); Q = (-TX a q msb) v (TX a AL).

[0807] The status control (S) (796) and query control (Q) (799) signals encode the status of the currently selected reactor node as follows: S,Q = 1.1 => no problem ; S,Q = 1.0 => alarm at the selected reactor node (local alarm); S,Q = 0.1 => alarm on one or more reactor nodes linked to the reactor node selected by the helpline chain (remote alarm); S,Q = 0.0 => local and remote alarm.

[0808] This is used as a means of speeding up the research of reactor nodes on a farm. Each reactor node configured as a master is connected to the end of a link chain that contains the reactor nodes configured as slaves. When a master reactor node responds to the probe, if no alarm is present, the monitoring system can proceed to the next master reactor node. If a remote alarm is present at the reactor node (master or slave), the monitoring system will check the next reactor node in the chain (the first slave in the case of a master or the next address in the case of a slave) to identify the problematic unit. If a local alarm (but not remote alarm) is present at the reactor node (master or slave), the monitoring system identifies the faulty unit and checks the next reactor node in the chain to see if the alarm at the affected reactor node has prevented remote alarms from additional units from being detected.

[0809] If no alarm is present, only the reactor master nodes need to be selected, requiring a maximum of 127 addresses instead of a maximum of 16129 (up to 127 slaves can be connected to each of the 127 masters). In case an alarm is present, only the affected masters and master slaves need to be selected, or a maximum of 127 + 127 = 258 addresses in the worst case (see Figure 94).

[0810] The reset signal is active low and therefore must be tested for leaks to avoid false commands. A most significant bit (r) reset unit (800) is fed into the main input and a least significant bit (r) reset input (801) is fed into the E gate side input (583k) producing a reset control output (R) (802). The E port (583k) is installed inverted producing: (802) = -(800) A (801) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: R = -r msb A r lsb.

[0811] In case of leak (r lsb = 0), then R = 0. If there is no leak (r lsb = 1) and the reset signal is not active (r msb = 1), then -r msb = 0 and R = 0. If there is no leak (r lsb = 1) and the reset signal is active (r msb = 0), then r msb = 0 and R = 1. Reset control (R) is sent to the set of the I/O unit to control the normally closed mono actuator that allows reset signals within the reactor node. To regenerate the reset signal for the next reactor node, an additional NO function is required. This is achieved by rotating the mono actuator which produces the reset output (R) which is transmitted producing output R = -R = - (-r msb A r lsb) (see Figures 62 and 63).

[0812] The high pressure supply (792c) is fed into the first input and the (x) least significant bit external pressure (684) is piped to the second input of the SEL port (589c) which is installed inverted to introduce a NO function at the main input which is fed with the external pressure most significant bit (x) (685). A most significant bit submergence input signal (v) (806a), which is high if the reactor node is commanded to submerge, is provided at the main input of the SEL port (589d). The first and second outputs of the SEL port (589c) are routed to the first and second inputs of the SEL port (589d), respectively, producing a complete submergence (pl) (807) at the first output and a flag activation control (FE ) (808) on the second output of the SEL port (589d). The logical functions produced are: (807) = (806a) to (685); (808) = -(806a) a (684) a (685) or replacing the numbers with the names of the signs: pl = v msb a -x msb; FE = -v msb a x lsb a x msb.

[0813] Complete submergence (pl) (807) is high if the reactor node has been commanded to submerge ((806a) = 1) and the reactor node has reached or exceeded the submergence depth ((685) = 1) . The flag activation control (FE) (808) is high if the reactor node is commanded to remain on the surface ((806a) = 1) and is currently on the surface ((684, 685) = 11). The flag activation control (FE) 808 is used to allow the flag to be raised only at the surface, protecting it from damage that could occur in the event that the failure occurs while the reactor node is submerged, causing the flag is raised and exposed to the movement of water (currents).

[0814] The flag activation control (FE) (808) is fed into the side input of the E door (583o) which is installed inverted, introducing a NO function into its main input which is fed with the alarm (AL) (798 ). The resulting flag raising control (F) (780) has the logical function (780) = -(798) A (808) or by replacing the numbers with the signal names: F = -AL A FE. Flag raising control (F) (780) is low (flag remains stored) if alarm (AL) (798) is high ((798) = 0) when there is no current active alarm or flag raising control flag (FE) (808) is low ((808) = 0) then the flag cannot be raised safely.

[0815] The flag activation control (FE) (808) is fed to the main input of the OR gate (579), the full submersion (pl) (807) is fed to the bottom input of the OR gate (579), and the supply high pressure (792d) is provided at the side inlet of port E (583m) producing an output from the submergence deactivation control (E) (809) which disables the movement of the cable winch with the following logic function: (809) = ((808) v (807)) A (792d) = ((808) v (807)) = ((806a) A (684) A (685)) v ((806a) A (685)). Replacing the numbers with the names of the signals: E = FE v pl = (-v msb a x lsb a x msb) v (v msb a -x msb).

[0816] Submersion disable control (E) (809) is sent to the I/O unit assembly to control the normally open mono actuator that stops the cable winch. The submersion disable control (E) (809) is high ((809) = 1), causing the normally open mono actuator to move to its active position, stopping the cable winch if the reactor node has been instructed to submerge and reach or exceed the submergence depth ((806a) - -(685) = 1) or the reactor node is ordered to remain at the surface and is at the surface (-(806a) to (684) to (685) = 1). Otherwise, the dive disable control (E) (809) is low ((809) = 0), causing the normally open mono actuator to move to its inactive position, allowing the cable winch to move and submerge at the reactor node if the submergence input most significant bit (v) = 1 or allow it to return to the surface if the submergence input most significant bit (v) = 0 (see Figures 62 and 63).

[0817] A different suffix letter is used to differentiate different relevant points of the same submergence input signal most significant bit (v) (806a, 806b) that originates at the signal pressure controller device that digitizes the submergence input signal. submersion (v) into the I/O unit assembly and continues into the logical unit assembly.

[0818] The external pressure most significant bit (x) (685) is fed into the main input and the submergence input most significant bit (v) (806b) is fed into the side input of the E port (583n), producing as outputs the submersion control (IV) (782) and air ventilation control (T) (779). The logical function is: (782) = (779) = (685) A (806b) or replacing the numbers with the signal names: IV = T = x msb A v msb. The external pressure most significant bit (x) (685) is combined with the input submergence most significant bit (v) (806b) as a back-up strategy to avoid a submergence overshoot. If the submergence input most significant bit (v) (806b) = 1 commanding a submergence and the external pressure most significant bit (x) (685) = 1 indicating that the reactor node is at the surface or has not yet reached the designated depth , the submersion control (IV) (782) and the ventilation air control (T) (779) are high (782) = (779) = 1. This causes the cable winch to rotate clockwise, increasing the depth, and that the air vent valve is opened, allowing air accumulated in the reactor node to be vented to the environment to facilitate operation. When the designated depth is reached the external pressure most significant bit (x) (685) = 0 causes the submersion control (IV) (782) and ventilation air control (T) (779) to be low (782 ) = (779) = 0. At this point, the submersion disable control (E) (809) becomes high, causing the normally open mono actuator to move to its active position, stopping rotation of the cable winch and placing the reactor node at the designated depth. As support, at the designated depth (782) = (779) = 0, causing the cable winch to change rotation counterclockwise and the air vent valve to close, preventing more air from escaping into the room. The support strategy prevents the reactor node from submerging further than intended, in case a failure interferes with the depth control system and the limiter placed on the anchor cable becomes loose (see Figures 62 and 63).

[0819] Figure 71 is a top view of the lower portion of the logic layer a (444) and the logic components installed with connections outside the logic layer a (444) drawn in dashed lines to facilitate visualization of the logic block circuits of signal leak alarm and the tube port management logic block (see Figure 69). All components and connections drawn in Figure 71 are also drawn in Figure 70 which can be used as a reference if necessary.

[0820] The output of the E port (583j) is the ppA alarm (811a) and the output of the E port (583i) is the status output of the tube port (pp) (810Aa). The implemented functions are: a = (777A) A (776A); (810Aa) = (777A) A (776A) A (775A) or using the signal names: alarm ppA = nA lsb A ÍA lsb; ppA = nA lsb, ÍA lsb, iA msb.

[0821] The output of the E port (583m) is the ppB alarm (812), the output of the E port (583n) is the status output of the tube port (pp) (810B), and the output of the E port (583o) is the ppB A ne alarm (813a). The implemented functions are: (813a) = (777B) A (776B) a (777e); (810B) = (777B) to (776B) to (775B) or using the signal names: alarm ppB A ne = nB lsb a iB lsb a ne lsb; ppB = nB lsb, iB lsb, iB msb.

[0822] The output of the E port (583p) is the status of the tube (pp) port (810Ca). The implemented function is: (810Ca) = (777C) to (776C) or using the signal names: ppC = nC lsb to iC lsb.

[0823] The output of the E port (583s) is the status of the tube (pp) port (810Da). The implemented function is: Da = (777D) a (776D) or using the signal names: ppD = nD lsb a iD lsb.

[0824] The door opening control (O) (778A) has the following logical function: (778A) = ((810Ca) A (815)) v ((810Ca) A (814)) or replacing the numbers with names of signals: OA = (-ppC A ppB A ppA A ppD) v (ppC AppB a ppA).

[0825] The door opening control (O) (778B) has the following logical function: (778B) = ((810Ca) to (816)) v ((810Ca) to (810B)) or replacing the numbers with names of signals: OB = (ppC to ppB to ppD) v (ppC to ppB).

[0826] The door opening control (O) (778D) has the following logical function: (778D) = ((810B) to (818)) v ((810B) to (817)) or replacing the numbers with names of signals: OD = (ppB to ppC to ppD to ppA) v (ppB to ppC to ppD).

[0827] The door opening control (O) (778C) has the following logical function: (778C) = ((810B) to (819)) v ((810B) to (810Ca)) or replacing the numbers with names of signals: OC = (ppB to ppC to ppA) v (ppB to ppC).

[0828] The outputs of port E (583za) and port E (583zb) are combined producing water pump stop control (P) (781) with logic function: (781) = -(778C) A (778D ) or replacing the numbers with the names of the signals: P = OC to OD.

[0829] These functions implement the redirection strategy for the reactor node by opening or closing the appropriate tube port doors and activating or deactivating the water pump depending on current conditions. Tube port A or B functions as input and tube port C or D functions as output. The tube port where leak was detected becomes unavailable. At least one input and one output must be available to allow the operation, otherwise all others will close. If operation is possible, the doors open and close according to the priority embedded in the functions and available tube doors that are not in use remain on standby. In case the operation is not possible (failure), available input pipe ports that cannot be connected to an output pipe port are blocked.

[0830] Table 3 summarizes the results of the implemented output functions OA OB OC OD P for each combination of ppA ppB ppC ppD input functions and the resulting operational status in each case. Table 3: Truth Table for implemented logical functions and resulting operational states

[0831] As seen in Table 3 above, any combination of inlet and outlet pipe port states will produce an operational state, with two pipe ports open and a water pump running. If enough problems occur to prevent normal operation, all tube ports close and the water pump stops.

[0832] The eleven E ports located at the beginning of the alarm chain, between the E port (583b) and the E port (583d) (from left to right) are fed with the digitized least significant bit input signals produced by their respective signal pressure controlling devices (or basic pressure controlling device in case of port E (583) c) coming from the I/O unit assembly at their respective main inputs: (s) state input least significant bit, ( q) query input least significant bit, (m) master/slave input least significant bit, (z) zero input least significant bit, (k) clock input least significant bit, (g) base input least significant bit (805 ), (w) water replenishment least significant bit, (u) air replenishment least significant bit, (v) submergence input least significant bit, (r) reset input to least significant bit (801), (h) input least significant bit help.

[0833] The main input of port E (583h) is supplied with the ppA alarm (811b). The E port main input (583g) is fed with the ppB A ne alarm (813b). The main input of the E port (583f) is fed with the state of the tube (pp) port (810Cb). The E port main input (583e) is fed with tube port (pp) state (810Db).

[0834] The resulting alarm function is: AL = OV A s lsb A q lsb A m lsb A z lsb A k lsb A g lsb A w lsb A u lsb A v lsb A r lsb A h lsb A (nA lsb A iA lsb) A (nB lsb A iB lsb A ne Isb) A (nC Isb A iC Isb) A (nD Isb A iD Isb).

[0835] The alarm function produces AL = 1 if there is no fault and AL = 0 if there is a leak in any input signal (the corresponding least significant bit signal is low), if the base pressure is too high, or if Any tube port presents a problem. While central monitoring passes through the reactor node polling in the wet reactor, eventual alarms present in the affected reactor nodes are communicated via the transmitted SQ signals.

[0836] Figure 81 shows a top view of a culture unit (862) comprised of the barge assembly (833) connected to a reactor in which leaks have occurred causing the reactor nodes to change from first priority connections to first priority connections. lower priority by activating standby tube elements as a means to open alternative paths to keep culture running. Problematic components such as a leaking pipe element (859a, 859b, 859c) and section with multiple failures (861) are shown in white to differentiate them from the normally operating pipe element (857) and the normally operating section ( 860), respectively.

[0837] The system operates with four different pressure levels that the water pressure controller devices at each reactor node detect within the tube elements: leaking, inactive, operating and closed (see Figure 93). A leaky pipe element (859a, 859b and 859c) has an internal pressure equal to or tending to the pressure of the external environment. An inactive tube element (858) has a stable internal pressure at a detectable level greater than ambient pressure. A normally operating tube element (857) is pressurized by the pumps in the barge assembly (833) and the water pumps at each of the reactor nodes that maintain the internal pressure under dynamic control within the normal level, above the level of waiting and below the closed pressure level. The closed pressure level is produced when a reactor node detects leaks in both of its outlet tube ports and closes them, causing the incoming water flow to enter a blocked path. A reactor node will only open one inlet pipe port if its pressure is normal, and it will only open one outlet pipe port if it detects normal or standby pressure inside.

[0838] The water pressure controller devices at each reactor node are designed to inject water into the tube elements connected to their respective tube ports until the pressure reaches the standby pressure unless a leak is detected, in which case in which case they interrupt the water injection. If the pressure is higher than the standby pressure, the water pressure controller devices do not remove it and simply stop the water injection. As a result, if no source of additional water pressure is available, all pipe elements that do not have leaks will be maintained at standby pressure by the reactor nodes.

[0839] When water flow into the wet reactor begins, the first tube element is supplied with water at normal pressure from the barge. As water arrives at the inlet tube port of the first reactor node, it senses the normal pressure in the inlet tube port and opens it in conjunction with its first priority outlet tube port (or the second priority outlet tube port if the first is unavailable) directing the water flow to the next reactor node. The next reactor node does the same and the water flows continue along the path that is constructed according to the priorities assigned to each reactor node and available tube elements (those at standby pressure) until it returns to the barge.

[0840] If a leak is detected in a pipe element, the affected reactor nodes close the pipe ports leading to them. The reactor node that closed its inlet tube port is left with only standby pressure in its other inlet tube port and remains disabled with all tube ports closed. The reactor node that has closed its outlet tube port still has water arriving at normal pressure, and if the other outlet tube port is available (idle), it opens and sends water at normal pressure to the tube element. attached starting a new path. The reactor node attached to this pipe element senses the pressure rising from the standby to normal state and opens the inlet pipe port and its first priority output pipe port (or second priority if the first is unavailable). The process continues to create an alternative path that bypasses the leak.

[0841] If the water flow arrives at a reactor node that has its two outlet tube ports disabled, the water flow is blocked and the pressure increases until it reaches the closing limit. A reactor node that senses a closing pressure at a tube port is closed, creating a closing pressure wave that eventually reaches a reactor node that has a waiting tube port that can be opened creating a new path for water flow.

[0842] This process is illustrated in Figure 81, where the reactor node switching from BC to BD (852) reacts to a leaky pipe element (859) detected at its outlet pipe port C and opens pipe ports D in standby state, raising the pressure inside the tube element from standby to normal. The reactor node switching from BC to AD (854) detects normal pressure in an inlet tube port A, but cannot open its tube port C due to another leaky tube element (859b) detected as soon as it opens the D tube port. The reactor node switching from BC to AC (853a) senses the normal pressure in the A inlet tube port and opens its C tube port to bypass the leak. The decommissioned reactor node (855a, 855b) has detected a leak in its inlet pipe port and does not participate in the construction of the alternative path.

[0843] If another leaky tube element (859c) is detected in the same section of the wet reactor, the reactor node switching from BC to BD (852b) reacts to a leaky tube element (859a) detected at its port. outlet tube C and opens inactive tube D ports, raising the pressure inside the tube element from standby to normal. A reactor node that switches from BC to AC (853b) senses the normal pressure at port A of the inlet tube and opens its tube port C bypassing the leak. The decommissioned reactor node (855c) does not participate in the construction of the alternative path.

[0844] However, in the event that the reactor node switching from BC to BD (852b) loses its second tube port A outlet, it would be unable to direct water flow and become disabled with both tube ports closed. The pressure would increase and the reactor node in configuration 5 (848) (reverse flow) would feel a closing pressure at its exit from the previously open tube port B and close it. Since the reactor node in configuration 5 (848) would still have outlet port A pipe available, it would open it and the disabled reactor node (855c) would again have inlet water at normal pressure and return to operation.

[0845] A properly designed wet reactor has multiple accesses to the barge and a structure of hierarchical bypasses placed at regular intervals, allowing it to withstand multiple cascading failures. A tube element leak (859c) will affect two reactor nodes and cause a single tube element circuit to bypass. A second and even a third leaky pipe element (859a, 859b) will be treated in the same way, unless it affects the same reactor nodes already affected by the first failure, causing them to be unable to find another path. Even if a double failure produces a blocked path, it is still possible to find another path within the section that reopens a path through one of the previously disabled reactor nodes as explained above, allowing a section to withstand multiple failures.

[0846] Disabling a section requires at least an unfortunate triple failure, if three pipe elements leak, one connecting two consecutive reactor nodes facing each other in the zigzag pattern, one pipe element blocking the second node exit of the reactor node that lost its first outlet due to the first leak and the third pipe element blocking the second inlet of the reactor node that lost its first inlet due to the first leak, making both sides of the switchback unavailable. Because the two reactor nodes are located on opposite sides of the zigzag, separated by a long tube element, it is unlikely that one event would affect them all such that they both have faulty tube elements at their other alternative tube port. . If this happens, a section bypass will isolate the section where the triple fault occurred and the reactor will remain operational with the multi-fault section (861) disabled.

[0847] A fourth failure will only create a more serious problem if it affects the reactor node that disabled the section in which the triple failure occurred. Because the section-bypass reactor node is likely located some distance from the other reactor nodes affected by the triple fault and is reacting to a leak in a pipe element not directly connected to it, it is unlikely that the event that generated the section fault has any effect on it, so another unrelated event must occur at the exact unfortunate point to disable a group of sections. If this unfortunate second event occurs, an even higher order bypass may find an alternative path that will disrupt a group of sections but keep most of the reactor operational, and so on through even higher hierarchies. In the extreme case, the higher deviation will disable half of the reactor to keep the other half operational if an extremely unlikely combination of multiple cascading failures occurs.

[0848] Single and double faults with minor impact on reactor operation can be corrected by service boat staff (874) visiting the farm unit (862) at regular intervals. Only more serious issues that would significantly impact productivity will require unscheduled intervention from a dedicated maintenance team.

[0849] Figure 90 shows a diagrammatic view of the control unit located within the materials control and storage room that monitors the wet reactor, collects alarms and sends relevant information to the central computer (952).

[0850] The local computer (953a) uses its interfaces (958a, 958b, etc.) to access the analog-to-digital converters (961) and solenoid valves (964a and 964b). Solenoid valves convert electrical signals originating from the local computer into water pressure output signals entering the wet reactor, and analog-to-digital converters convert water pressure signals exiting the wet reactor into electrical digital signals that the local computer can process. The signals are generated in the appropriate way, respecting the time and particular rules to be able to communicate effectively with the hydraulic logic in the wet reactor nodes.

[0851] The local computer sends commands to its interfaces to produce, using the corresponding solenoid valves, clock output (K), master/slave output (M) and zero output (Z) signals that are transmitted to all the reactor nodes. The reactor nodes respond back and the interfaces transmit to the local computer the received query input (q) and state input (s) signals which the corresponding analog-to-digital converters transform into digital electrical signals that the local computer can process . Each reactor node has a unique combination of an address and a master/slave bit, so at any given time only one reactor node is selected. The reactor node that has its address selected generates the message and the other reactor nodes that are not selected forward the message they receive. The next clock pulse selects the next reactor node and the process repeats. The timing of these signals is illustrated in Figure 94.

[0852] Timing point 1 (981) marks the point at which the Zero signal increases, allowing the LFSR registers to be counted. The state of the K and M signals before sync point 1 (981) is irrelevant, as the low Zero signal causes all registers to move to the high position (1111111) and forces all reactor nodes to forward only the received messages. It is important, however, to have K = 0 and M = 1 at the moment Z = 1 to receive the response from the reactor node configured as master and with address 1 (1111111) which will be automatically selected as soon as Z = 1. The response arrives after a short delay and, in the case of Figure 94, it is q, s = 1.1, indicating that there is no problem in the unit and its slaves.

[0853] The next increase in the clock signal at timing point 2 (982) selects the next master with address 2 (0111111) and a short delay after the clock signal is lowered at timing point 3 (983), the response q, s = 0.1 is received, indicating a problem with the unit. At time point 4 (984) M is reset to slave (M = 0) to query the first slave of the previously selected master (0111111) to see if the alarm prevented the master from reporting a problem on one of its slaves. The slave with address 1 (1111111) is automatically selected as soon as M is reset to 0, so the response arrives just after M = 0 and in this case it is q, s = 1.1 indicating that the first slave and all subsequent slaves are ok.

[0854] M is set back to master (M = 1) and the clock is increased to 1 at timing point 5 (985) to continue and move to the next master with address 3 (0011111). A short delay after the clock is lowered at time point 6 (986), the response q, s = 1.0 is received indicating a problem with one of the slaves. At timing point 7 (987) M is reset to slave (M = 0) to query the first slave of the previously selected master (0011111) to check its status. The slave with address 1 (1111111) is automatically selected as soon as M is reset to 0, so the response arrives just after M = 0 and in this case it is q, s = 1.0 indicating that the first slave is ok, But another slave in the chain has a problem.

[0855] The next clock signal increase at timing point 8 (988) selects the next slave with address 2 (0111111) and a short delay after the clock signal decreases response q, s = 0.0 is received , indicating problems in the unit and further down the chain. The next increase in the clock signal at timing point 9 (989) selects the next slave with address 3 (0011111) and a short delay after the clock signal decreases, the response q, s = 0.1 is received indicating a problem in the unit, but not further down the chain. The next increase in the clock signal at timing point 10 (990) selects the next slave with address 4 (0001111) to check whether the alarm on the previous slave prevented it from reporting a problem on another slave further down the chain. The response q, s = 1.1 arrives a little late after the clock signal drops, indicating that this unit and all subsequent units are ok.

[0856] M is set back to master (M = 1) and the clock is increased to 1 at timing point 11 (991) to continue and move to the next master with address 4 (0001111). A short delay after the clock is reduced, the response q, s = 1.1 is received, indicating that the unit and all its slaves are ok.

[0857] At timing point 12 (992), the Zero signal is reset to 0 to restart the count, and as it is set back to 1 at timing point 13 (993), the first master with address 1 (1111111) is selected automatically. The response q, s = 1.1 arrives after a short delay, indicating that there is no problem. The clock signal is increased at timing point 14 (994) by selecting the master with address 2 (0111111) and the process continues.

[0858] The CO2 extraction unit operates based on the temperature-dependent solubility of gases in seawater. As the water temperature increases, fewer gases can remain dissolved and the excess evaporates. The system uses the waste heat produced by the engine that generates energy to drive pumps, generators, etc., to heat seawater to such an extent that gases can be collected and uses a series of heat exchangers to increase the energy efficiency of the process. The evaporated gases are mixed with the engine exhaust stream and the CO2 is separated by reducing the temperature below its deposition temperature of -32°C. Another set of heat exchangers is used to improve the energy efficiency of the deposition process. of CO2 and its sublimation to be used in the wet reactor (see Figure 86).

[0859] The seawater inlet filter (876) takes seawater from the seawater inlet (893) filters a large portion of it and returns the remainder to the seawater discharge (894) to transport organisms live and unwanted debris or suspended material. The incoming filtered seawater is supplied pre-heated to the water degasser (877) via three different routes: 1) through heat exchanger 1 (886); 2) through heat exchanger 3 (888); 3) through heat exchanger 4 (889). The volume flowing in each path is adjusted to recover the heat available in the corresponding heat exchangers by monitoring the temperature at the hot water outlet of each heat exchanger.

[0860] The seawater in the water degasser (877) circulates through the heat exchanger 5 (890) to further heat the seawater by exchanging heat with the exhaust gases coming from the engine (880). If necessary, an extra heat source (885) provides additional energy to heat the seawater to a point that causes the dissolved gases to boil and leave the water degasser (877) via an evaporated gas tube (907 ) joining the engine exhaust gases that were cooled in heat exchanger 5 (890) and continuing through heat exchanger 3 (888).

[0861] Heat exchanger 1 (886) and heat exchanger 2 (887) are part of the oxygen extractor (884) designed to remove excess oxygen from reactor culture water to prevent oxygen-induced growth impairment of algae culture. The oxygen-containing culture water comes from the reactor and passes through heat exchanger 2 (887), where it exchanges heat with hot seawater that has had its dissolved gases removed and is being discharged from the water degasser (877). The temperature of the culture water increases, causing the oxygen-rich dissolved gases to boil and be removed from the oxygen extractor (884) through the evaporated oxygen tube (926), to be stored or used elsewhere. At the same time, the temperature of the discarded seawater decreases to as close to ambient as possible, to avoid wasted energy and allow the discarded seawater to be safely returned to the ocean. The water culture leaving heat exchanger 2 (887) passes through heat exchanger 1 (886) exchanging heat with the incoming filtered seawater. The reactor culture water is cooled to near ambient temperature so that it can be returned to the reactor and the incoming filtered seawater is preheated to enter the water degasser (877).

[0862] The filtered seawater passing through heat exchanger 4 (889) exchanges heat with the engine cooling water (880). This recovers wasted heat from the engine to preheat the incoming seawater before it reaches the water degasser (877) and keeps the engine (880) cooled to its operating temperature.

[0863] The incoming filtered seawater passing through heat exchanger 3 (888) exchanges heat with the engine exhaust gases combined with the evaporated seawater gases. The temperature of the gases reduces the condensation of water vapor contained in the engine exhaust gases and is removed by the condensate drain heat exchanger 3 (910), going to the condensate water cleaner (878) which removes the contaminants so that condensed water can be safely disposed of in the environment. The discharge water aerator (879) injects oxygen-enriched air (915) extracted from the reactor culture water into all process water that will be discharged to make it safe for marine life before returning to the environment.

[0864] The combined engine exhaust gases and evaporated seawater gases leave heat exchanger 3 (888) cooled to room temperature and continue into the vaporizer (881), where they pass through the vaporizer heat exchanger (892 ). The heat exchange causes the solid CO2 stored in the vaporizer (881) to be sublimated and the exhaust and evaporated gases to be cooled to below ambient temperature. The gaseous CO2 is removed from the vaporizer (881) and sent to the reactor to feed the algae culture. The exhaust and evaporated gases continue in heat exchanger 6 (891) and exchange heat with the depleted CO2 gases coming from the CO2 separator (883) at almost -32 °C, the CO2 deposition temperature. The depleted CO2 gases are heated and discharged into the atmosphere, and the exhaust and evaporated gases are pre-cooled to almost -32 T and go to the CO2 extractor (882). Because the exhaust and evaporated gas inlet has been pre-cooled, the CO2 extractor (882) is able to operate and reach the CO2 deposition temperature using less energy. As the CO2 settles, it is collected by the CO2 separator (883) and sent to the vaporizer (881).

[0865] The algae separation unit shown in Figure 87 works integrated with the wet reactor, producing, as a by-product of algae collection, the compressed water used to feed the wet reactor. A reactor culture (934) is divided in the flow divider (927) into two parts: a culture for the dilutor (935) which is sent to the culture dilutor (928) to be diluted and a culture for the separator (936 ) which is sent to the algae separator (929) which separates a culture water phase (930) from an algae slurry phase (931). The algae slurry phase (931) is sent to the algae storage unit (932), where it remains until the service boat arrives to collect it.

[0866] The culture water phase (930) is sent to the oxygen extractor (884). The removed oxygen is sent to the discharge water aerator, which injects oxygen-enriched air into the discharged seawater to make it safe for marine life. The water from the oxygen extractor (884) goes to the flow divider (933) which separates it into two parts: the water for the diluter (938) and the water to add nutrients (940). The water for the diluter (938) is mixed in the culture diluter (928) with the culture for the diluter (935) received from the flow divider (927) producing the diluted water in the reactor (939) which is sent to refill the reactor . The water to add nutrients (940) is mixed with the nutrients (941), producing enriched water (942) which is sent to the compressor to feed the reactor and disperse the nutrients.

[0867] The algae separator (929) is composed of the separator box (943), the concentrator (944) and the helical pusher (945). The separator box (943) provides support for the other components and containment for the water culture being processed. As the helical pusher (945) rotates, it forces the culture water passing through the slurry inlet (949) into a smaller and smaller volume pressing the culture against the concentrator (944) which is made of a porous metal sheet that has openings small enough to allow water to pass through, but not microalgae. The mechanical action of the helical pusher (945) prevents algae from clogging the pores of the concentrator (944) by gently pushing the algae forward. As more and more water is forced out and collected in the water outlet (951), the culture is progressively concentrated into an algal slurry that eventually comes out in the slurry outlet (950).

DETAILED DESCRIPTION - ALTERNATIVE RUN MODE

[0868] Figure 95 shows an alternative module assembly (995) that uses electronic components instead of the hydraulic and pneumatic components used to process input and output signals and implement control logic in the first embodiment of the module assembly. Electronic components are sealed within the alternate module assembly (995) to reduce the risk of electrical short circuit. A hole (996) located on the top of the alternative module assembly (995) allows a cable carrying power and input/output signals to reach the electronics (see Figures 97 and 97E).

[0869] Since all signals are transmitted over an electrical cable, the alternate module assembly (995) has only eight hose fittings on top, four on each side to provide pressurized water, pressurized air, and pressurized CO2 necessary for operation of the reactor node and provide access to base pressure for maintenance crews. The four attachments on the right side are: (u) air refill right (165), (w) water refill right (166), (l) CO2 refill right (176), (gnd) base (180a ). The four attachments on the left side are: (U) left air refill (177), (W) left water refill (178), (L) left CO2 refill (188), (gnd) base (180b ).

[0870] Other than the module assembly being replaced by the alternative module assembly (995), the reactor node and other components of the wet reactor remain the same and hydraulic power remains the main source of power. The doors, water pump, cable winch, flag and other active components are still powered by pressurized water, but control is by electronics in the alternate module assembly (995), which is also responsible for the logic and communications, requiring low energy to operate. The alternative module assembly (995) has the same shape and connections on the bottom of the module assembly so that it can fit perfectly within the module compartment and interact seamlessly with the reactor node, providing all control signals in their appropriate locations .

[0871] Figure 96 shows a schematic view of the electronic components used within the alternative module assembly. The equipment is the same used in the control unit located inside the materials control and storage room (see Figure 90). An appropriate number of interfaces (958) control a set of analog to digital converters (961a, 961b, etc.), which convert incoming water pressure and CO2 signals into electrical digital signals, and a dual set of solenoid valves (964a) and (964b, 964c and 964d etc.) arranged in pairs that control the injection of water and CO2 to regulate the pressure of the tube ports and generate output pressure signals to open and close the CO2 ports and valves, drive the pump of water, turn the cable winch, raise the flag, etc. perform all functions necessary for the proper operation of the reactor node.

[0872] Figure 97 shows an isometric view of a portion of the wet reactor using the alternative module assembly (995) in the reactor node (214) in an arrangement similar to that shown in Figures 74 and 74E. A signal and power supply cable (998) provides power and communications to the alternate module assembly (995), and a supply hose assembly (997) provides pressurized water, pressurized CO2, and pressurized air necessary for operation of the node. reactor (214). The flag (307), as well as other active components of the reactor node (214), is controlled by the alternative module assembly (995) using pressurized water supplied by the supply hoses (997). The oxygen hose (821) is used to remove oxygen-rich air from the reactor nodes as in the first run mode.

[0873] The detail in Figure 97E shows the connection of the supply hoses to the hose fittings. The (U) right air refill (165), (w) right water refill (166), (l) right CO2 refill (176) and (gnd) base (180a) are located on the right side and (U) left air refill (177), (W) left water refill (178), (L) left CO2 refill (188) and (gnd) the base (180b) are located on the side left. The base fittings on both sides are not connected to the hoses and must be used by maintenance crews.

[0874] The signal and power supply cable (998) provides power and communication to each alternate module assembly through a series of cable taps (999).

OPERATION - ALTERNATIVE RUN MODE

[0875] The operation of the alternative wet reactor modality is basically the same as the first modality, with the exception that communications are carried out much easier and faster through electronic circuits. Each reactor node is configured with its own electronic address. As more addresses can be easily provided, the master/slave structure can be maintained or not, depending on each case. The survey response can carry more information, including the status of all alarms and the status of each pipe port, improving the information available to maintenance and management teams. Depending on the selected electronics vendor, communication may be via a wired or wireless connection and follow standard protocols or a custom protocol provided by the manufacturer.

[0876] The disadvantage of the alternative modality is that all the benefits of electronic control come at a cost. The simple plastic parts used in the first embodiment of the module assembly are expected to be cheaper to manufacture and maintain and to be more reliable than their electronic counterparts used in the alternative module assembly.

[0877] The flexibility and additional power offered by the electronic version may still justify its use in selected or most applications, as high volume orders cause the price of parts to fall and satisfactory isolation from the marine environment is required. developed, allowing parts to reach an acceptable level of reliability.

CONCLUSION

[0878] A new integrated system is proposed to cultivate microalgae in terrestrial or marine environments. The system consists of a reactor and associated equipment working together to reduce energy requirements and improve productivity. The reactor is primarily composed of injected and extruded plastic parts that are inexpensive to manufacture and maintain, resistant to the harsh environmental conditions the reactor is expected to be exposed to, and easily scalable.

[0879] The reactor features distributed pumping and distributed dispensing of nutrients using high-pressure water produced as a byproduct of the algae extraction process, precise control of CO2 concentration in individual sections throughout the reactor, oxygen removal and temperature stability are factors that contribute to greater productivity. One of the main advantages of the system is the ability to extract the necessary CO2 from seawater, using mainly energy from other processes.

[0880] The reactor is capable of autonomous, unattended operation for long periods of time, automatically detecting faults and isolating affected sections to prevent contamination of the environment or culture medium in the event of leaks and taking appropriate measures to overcome problems and continue operating in the best possible condition. The reactor can be submerged in storms to prevent damage and is capable of reporting problems to a central monitoring system.

Claims (2)

01. An integrated system for the production and harvesting of microalgae, characterized by comprising: a reactor having a plurality of reactor nodes (214) and a plurality of tube elements (100), the plurality of reactor nodes (214) and the plurality of tube elements (100) configured to create an isolated water culture suitable for algal growth; an algae separation unit (841), comprising: a concentrator (944); a helical impeller (945); an algae storage unit (932); a CO2 extraction unit (835) comprising: a water degasser (877); a plurality of pumps configured to supply water to the water degasser (877); a motor (880) configured to energize the plurality of water pumps and heat water in the water degasser (877); a heat exchanger (890) configured to heat water from the water degasser (877) and recirculate the heated water to the water degasser (877); an evaporator (881) fed with exhaust gases from the engine (880) and evaporated gases from the water degasser (877), the evaporator (881) configured to use the evaporated gases to sublimate solid CO2; a CO2 extractor (882) powered by pre-cooled evaporated gases from the evaporator; a CO2 separator (883) configured to supply solid CO2 to the evaporator (881); and a heat exchanger (891) configured to heat waste gases from the CO2 separator (883) and vent the heated waste gases to the atmosphere; an oxygen extractor (884) configured to extract oxygen from the water culture supplied by the reactor; a condensed water purifier (878); a discharge water aerator (879) fed with water from the condensed water purifier (878) and oxygen from the oxygen extractor (884); a heat exchanger (887) configured to heat the water culture coming from the reactor entering the oxygen extractor (884); a heat exchanger (886) configured to recover heat from the water exiting the oxygen extractor (884); a heat exchanger (888) configured to exchange heat between the engine exhaust gases and the evaporated gases from the water degasser (877) to condense the water vapor contained in the engine exhaust gases and the evaporated gases from the water degasser in condensed water; wherein each tube member (100) has an inner tube (103) configured to permeate CO2 to feed the algal culture; and wherein each reactor node (214) comprises: tube ports (215) configured to open and close the tube elements (100) connected to the reactor node (214); a propeller pump (347) configured to pump water through the pipe members (100); and a vane pump fed by pressurized water from the algae separator unit (841), the pressurized water having nutrients, and the vane pump configured to energize the propeller pump (347). 02. The integrated system for the production and harvesting of microalgae of claim 01, in which the concentrator (944) has a conical shape and the helical impeller (945) is configured to rotate, scraping the algae from the concentrator (944), forcing the culture of the reactor water through the concentrator (944), and thereby produce an algae slurry.